P. 1
Edge Box User Manual 50

Edge Box User Manual 50

|Views: 23|Likes:
Publicado poramadeus_x64

More info:

Published by: amadeus_x64 on Nov 18, 2010
Direitos Autorais:Attribution Non-commercial

Availability:

Read on Scribd mobile: iPhone, iPad and Android.
download as PDF, TXT or read online from Scribd
See more
See less

11/07/2011

pdf

text

original

Sections

  • 1 About edgeBOX
  • 2 Initial Configuration
  • 3 Dashboard
  • 4 Network
  • 5 VPN
  • 6 Security
  • 7 Office Servers
  • 8 IP-PBX and VoIP
  • box
  • mail
  • 9 Users
  • 10 System
  • RAID
  • 11 Reporting
  • 12 User Services and Applications
  • 13 Appendices

Dramatically simplifying voice and data networking

USER MANUAL V5.0

Disclaimer
Precautions have been taken to assure accuracy of the information written in this user’s manual. Typographic or pictorial errors that are brought to our attention will be corrected in subsequent issues. Product specifications in this manual are nominal and are provided for the convenience of our customers. They are all correct at the date of publication. Critical Links reserves the right to make product changes from time to time, without prior notification, which may change certain specifications or characteristics shown. We therefore recommend you to check for changes or updates before using for customer projects or further product developments No material will be accepted for return unless Critical Links grants permission in writing. The handling, installation and usage of the edgeBOX are applicable to certain environments and may be required for code compliance. Features of the device will not provide protection against abuse, misuse, improper installation or maintenance. It is important that installation, operation and maintenance are performed in accordance with instructions supplied in the manual. Electricity and electrical devices must always be treated with caution and respect.

Product Support
The edgeBOX software is distributed according to the End User License Agreement EULA included at the end of this User Guide. By using the software you agree to be bound by this EULA. If you do not agree to the terms and limitations of the EULA you should not use the software.

End User License Agreement
For product technical support please visit the following web site http://www.edgebox.com or contact us at the following email address: support@critical-links.com.

Critical Links, Inc
695 Route 46 West Fairfield, NJ 07004 USA Phone: 973.276.9006 Support Hotline: +1 888 433 4326 Website: www.critical-links.com Email: support@critical-links.com

4

edgeBOX 5.0 Help

Table of Contents
1. About edgeBOX 10

..................................................................................................................... 11 1.1. Introducing the award-winning edgeBOX ..................................................................................................................... 12 1.2. edgeBOX's main features 1.3. Unpack ..................................................................................................................... 13 and setup edgeBOX ..................................................................................................................... 14 1.4. Connecting to edgeBOX's web interface ..................................................................................................................... 16 1.5. Understanding edgeBOX's web interface ..................................................................................................................... 19 1.6. Connecting to edgeBOX's console ..................................................................................................................... 20 1.7. Working with edgeBOX's LCD panel ..................................................................................................................... 21 1.8. License, Hardware and Software

2. Initial Configuration 3. Dashboard 4. Network

22 26 29

..................................................................................................................... 30 4.1. Configure the internet connection (WAN interface)
......................................................................................................................................................... 30 through another device such as a cable modem or a router ......................................................................................................................................................... 31 through a DSL/PPPoE connection

4.2. Change..................................................................................................................... 32 the local network properties (LAN) 4.3. Change..................................................................................................................... 33 the DMZ settings ..................................................................................................................... 34 4.4. View and manage VLANs ..................................................................................................................... 35 4.5. Interfaces Physical and Logical Status 4.6. Monitor..................................................................................................................... 36 connections through edgeBOX 4.7. Change..................................................................................................................... 37 edgeBOX's hostname and network domain ..................................................................................................................... 38 4.8. View the system routes ..................................................................................................................... 39 4.9. Manage static routes ..................................................................................................................... 40 4.10. Wireless
......................................................................................................................................................... 41 Configure and turn on the wireless network ......................................................................................................................................................... 43 Indicate the type of authentication ......................................................................................................................................................... 46 Make the wireless network more secure ......................................................................................................................................................... 47 Make the wireless network public

..................................................................................................................... 47 4.11. Managing the DNS server
......................................................................................................................................................... 48 Adding or Editing DNS domains .................................................................................................................................................. 48 How to add a Master domain .................................................................................................................................................. 50 How to add a Slave domain .................................................................................................................................................. 51 How to add a Forwarder domain ......................................................................................................................................................... 51 Changing global DNS Settings ......................................................................................................................................................... 52 Managing DNS ACLs ......................................................................................................................................................... 53 Managing hosts on an existing domain

Critical Links, Inc.

Network

5

..................................................................................................................... 54 4.12. Use Dynamic DNS 4.13. Using ..................................................................................................................... 55 the DHCP service
......................................................................................................................................................... 56 Assign IP addresses using Ranges ......................................................................................................................................................... 57 Assign IP addresses using MAC-IP rules ......................................................................................................................................................... 58 Configure DHCP advanced settings ......................................................................................................................................................... 59 DHCP Leases

..................................................................................................................... 59 4.14. Manage the Webcache size and sites 4.15. Using ..................................................................................................................... 60 NAT and Port Forwarding 4.16. Using ..................................................................................................................... 61 QoS
QoS Upload......................................................................................................................................................... 63 configuration ......................................................................................................................................................... 64 QoS Download configurations ......................................................................................................................................................... 64 Service Classification ......................................................................................................................................................... 65 Internet and DMZ QoS statistics

5. VPN

67
General ......................................................................................................................................................... 69 Advanced .................................................................................................................................................. 70

5.1. IPSec ..................................................................................................................... 67

5.2. PPTP ..................................................................................................................... 71
......................................................................................................................................................... 72 PPTP Properties

5.3. L2TP

..................................................................................................................... 73

6. Security

75

..................................................................................................................... 75 6.1. Firewall
......................................................................................................................................................... 76 Securing the Internet and DMZ links ......................................................................................................................................................... 76 Securing Internal Connections ......................................................................................................................................................... 77 Using Advanced Firewall Rules

6.2. Setting ..................................................................................................................... 79 up a DMZ ..................................................................................................................... 80 6.3. Enabling NAT for the private networks ..................................................................................................................... 80 6.4. Using Port Forwarding ..................................................................................................................... 81 6.5. Website Access Restrictions
Domains ......................................................................................................................................................... 82 ......................................................................................................................................................... 83 Words in URL

..................................................................................................................... 83 6.6. Install and Manage Anti Virus Engines ..................................................................................................................... 83 6.7. Scanning Shared Folders for viruses ..................................................................................................................... 84 6.8. Scanning E-Mail for Viruses
Messages ......................................................................................................................................................... 85 ......................................................................................................................................................... 86 Actions Quarantine......................................................................................................................................................... 86

..................................................................................................................... 87 6.9. Scanning E-Mail for SPAM

7. Office Servers

89

..................................................................................................................... 89 7.1. Manage your web sites and intranets
......................................................................................................................................................... 90 Setting up multiple websites

..................................................................................................................... 92 7.2. E-mail Server and Webmail
......................................................................................................................................................... 92 E-mail Queue

Critical Links, Inc.

.................................................................................................................................................................................................... 118 Connecting Analog Phones and FAX machines .................................................................................................................................................. 149 Intercom Calls ........................... 115 Analog phone extensions and fax machines ...................................................................................................... 116 ISDN Phone extensions ............................ IP-PBX and VoIP 105 8.................................................................................................. 123 Phone Groups and Access Control Twinning ............................................................ 97 7...................................................................................................................................................................................................................... 141 ENUM service ...................................................................................................................................................................................... 113 SIP and IAX phone extensions ....................................................................... 133 Defining Automated Attendant menus Schedules.............................................................................................................................. 151 Call Pick-Up Critical Links............................... 139 8.......................................................................................... 140 VoIP Providers ....................... 150 Call Listening and Call Whispering ........ 111 Creating phones ..................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................... 130 Creating incoming call rules .............................................................. 119 configuration of phone devices ....... 143 ISDN PRI................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................. ................................ 138 Emergency number ........................................................................................................................................ 146 FXO-FXS 8.................................................................2.............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................. 99 7.................................................................6.................................................................................................................................4........................... 116 Connecting phones ........................................................................ Phone..............................................................................................................................................3............ 144 ........................................................................... 102 Setup Share Permissions ... Define....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................... 135 your outgoing call rules .................................................................................................................................................................................5................................................................................................................................................ 109 Understanding the Phones list ................................................................ 135 8........................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................... Configuring Voice Lines ........................ Configuring incoming call rules .................................... 106 Overview ............................. 93 E-mail domains and Webmail Aliases and.................................................................... 149 Group Calls ......... 142 Remote Offices Hardware ................................................................................ 136 Authentication ....................................... 93 Mailing Lists ............................................ 117 Connecting VoIP Phones ....................................................................................................................................................................................0 Help ................................................................................................................................................................. 96 SMTP Access Control .................................. Inc........... 94 Settings and Permissions ..................................................................... Managing your phones ...............................................................................................................1....................................................................... Windows Shared Folders Shares .....................................................................................................................................................................................4............................................. 103 Temporary Shared Folders ...................... 118 Connecting ISDN Phones Automatic.......................3............................................................................................................................................................................ 146 How to change configuration mode (E1 / T1) Analogue........................................................................................................... 148 Blind and Supervised Transfers .......................................................................................... IP-PBX................... 103 7.................................6 edgeBOX 5..................................................................................................... 136 Rules Definition ................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................ 147 operations .............................................................................. 122 Auto Configuration Modes .................. 128 Internal Dial Plan ........................................... Windows Shared Printers 8.................................................5.......................................... 129 8............ 108 8................................................................................................................................................................................................................................. 126 .................. Windows Server ...................................................................................................................................... 143 ISDN BRI................ 100 ....................................................................

.... 182 Using a remote LDAP Server ..5................. 181 Using remote authentication ..................... View currently Connected Users ............................................................................................................. 189 Fine tunning Internet and DMZ access Access to ........................ 165 Define Country Zone ............................ Authentication .............................................................7............................................................................................................................. 158 8....................... Adjusting Date and Time Critical Links.................................................................................................................... 184 the user login web page ...........................................................IP-PBX and VoIP 7 Twinning ..........................................................................8.......................................................................................................... 179 Authentication ...11............................................................................................................................................................................ ............................................................................. 183 Using a remote AD Server Customize............................................................................................ 170 8........................................................................................................................... 196 10........................................................... 190 other VLANs ........................................................................................................................................................................................ 163 Key Codes Customize............................................................................................................................................................................................ 154 8..........................13...............................................729 Licensing ...... 159 8........................ 181 Using a remote RADIUS Server ..................................... System 196 ............................................................................................................... 164 Sound Files ................................................................................................................................................................................................... 153 One Touch Recording .....................................................................14........................................... Delegate a Local Administrator .....1......................................... 165 Echo Cancellation ...... 161 How to send a fax using MailFax? ..................................2..................................................................................................................... 175 network users ....................................... 152 ... Conference Rooms .............................................. 157 Settings for Queues .....................10. 169 8.. 172 activity logs ............................... 167 Manager Interface Advanced................................................................................................................ 155 8.........1....................................... Privileges ....................................................... MailFax Service ............. 177 Importing and Exporting Users ............. Default Predefined Phone Numbers 9............................................................................................................................................................................................9.................................................................................................................................................................................................................... VoIP ...........3..............................12......................................................... 163 Call Parking Operation. Managing Call Queues Advanced..................... Codecs ........................................................................ 191 9....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................... 194 9......................................................................................................................................................................................... 168 NAT ................................................................................................................................... 153 Labeling CDR records with Cost Centers ................................. Configure authorized RADIUS clients 10............................................................. 191 9........................... 174 9............................................................................................................................................................ 151 Follow Me ............................................................ Users 174 Managing .................................................................................................................................................................................... Advanced VoIP Options Voicemail ............6....................................................................................................................................................................................... 179 Default Quota Activating....................................................................... 172 8.....................................................15....................CDR ............................................................................................................................................................................................................. Automatic Call Recording 8......................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................... 162 .................................................................................................................................................................................................................................... Inc.......................................................................... 166 G.......................................4...................................... 162 8........ 166 Billing Service ........................................ Music On-Hold .............. Groups ...... 194 9................................ 186 9...........................................

..................................................... 202 Backup Scheduled................................................................. 233 Accounting .................................. 201 10..6... 224 Disk Usage Interfaces....... SNMP .....................................9..................................................... 213 10......................................................................... 218 10............................................................................................................................... Temporary Shared Folders .................................................................................. 229 E-mail ...................................0 Help .................... 238 12.................................................................................. Reading and Managing System Logs ..................8................................................................................................................................. 225 ............................................................................................................................................. 223 Load ................................... 231 VPN ...................................................1............................ 232 ............................................... Diagnostic Tools ....................................................12............ Services Control Panel ........................... 211 10...................................................................................................................................................................... 228 ....10................................................................................................................................ 234 HTTP Access ........................................................................................................................................ 198 10..................... 234 E-mail .................................. Notifications ........................................ Managing Software Updates ........................................................... 217 10.............................................................................................................................2................................................................................. 222 ............. Users General .............. Backup & Restore Immediate................................................................... Managing and Diagnosing RAID .................................................................................................1.......................................................................................................................................... 232 11..................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................... 199 10.................................................................................................................................................................. 235 VoIP ................................... Flash................................................ Maintenance ....................... 221 11................................................................................... 212 a faulty disk ............................................................................................ Inc.....................................4................................................................2.......................................................................................... 236 VPN 12........................................................ 215 10................................ 227 Web Server Firewall ..................................................................... 243 Operator Panel (FOP) Critical Links.......................................................... 216 10..........................................................11................................................................................................................................................................................................8 edgeBOX 5. 242 12...................................... Services ..................15..................................................................................................................................... Webmail 12...................... Reporting 221 .........................................13...........................................................................3.... System .................................................... Using HotBackup for redundancy Managing ................................................................................................................................................ 217 10.......... RADIUS Accounting .......3........ User Services and Applications 237 .................................... . Administration ..........................................................................................................2..... 219 10................................................................................................. 208 software updates in a Hotbackup scenario ....................................................... Hardware Monitor ......................... 205 10.......................................................... 230 VoIP .................................................................................... 226 11.................................... 203 Backups ....................................................14............................................................................................................................................................................................................. 221 CPU Memory ..............................................3....................... 210 10.............................................................................................................7....................................................................................................................................5........................................................ 226 HTTP Access ......................................... 214 10............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................... 212 Disk Notifications Replacing ............................. Remote Management 11....

................................ 250 Conference Calls ............................................................................................................................................................................ 253 Remote configuration .................................................................................................................................................................................................................... 265 VLAN Scenario 2 ...................... 249 Queue Managment .......................................................................... 258 ................................................................................................................................................................................................ 267 VLAN Scenario 3 ....................... Appendix C: Windows Integration ... 264 VLAN Scenario 1 .................. 246 Initiate a Call ..................................... Appendices 251 ...... 250 Typical Caller Scenario 13.....................1x WPA ............................................................. Appendix D: VLAN based Infrastructure .....................................................................................................................................User Services and Applications 9 FOP Login..................................6........................................................................................................... 261 Shared Folder on Windows ................................................ Appendix G: Usernames and Passwords Critical Links.................................................................................... 256 ........................................................ Appendix A: Authentication ........................................................................................................................5......... 260 13................................................................................................ Appendix B: Connecting to Wireless 802......................................... 251 Authentication architecture ........................................................3..................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................... 271 13.. Appendix F: edgeBOX Network Services .............................................................. 249 Park-Unpark Calls ...........................................................................................................................................................................................................................................2........................................................................................................................................................................4.................................................................... 248 call Barging ............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................ 244 .............. Inc................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................ 253 Putting it all together .......................................................................... 248 Create an..................................................................... 247 External Calls Transfer a................................................................................................ 268 VLAN Scenario 4 ................................. 270 13............................................................................................................ 251 13.......................................... 248 Agent ........1.................................................................................................... Appendix E: Factory Reset ..........................................................................................................................7................................................... 262 13.............................................................................................................................................................. 251 Require users to login vs Privileges policies .............. 254 13............... 260 Adding a Windows Host to edgeBOX Domain Mapping a......................... .............................................. 269 13............................................................................................................................

Inc. Specifically. data and IT functions at a Small and Medium Business (SMB) into one single appliance. Introducing the award-winning edgeBOX edgeBOX's main features Unpack and install edgeBOX to the network Connecting to edgeBOX's web interface Understanding edgeBOX's web interface Connecting to edgeBOX's console Working with edgeBOX LCD panel License. Critical-Links' edgeBOX provides an unified architecture and delivers all this in a single product. network access profiles .0 Help 1 About edgeBOX Critical Links’ edgeBOX is a network appliance that consolidates the voice.Privileges. it provides IP-PBX and VoIP. Windows Server . Security tools. Wi-Fi Access Point. .with advanced File and Print sharing. Hardware and Software Critical Links.10 edgeBOX 5. such as Anti Virus and Firewall and SMB Office Servers (e-mail / web server / windows server). Quality of Service (QoS). While all this is commonly delivered using up to 8 different independent products/devices. comprehensive Networking.

Reduces initial investment & recurring operational expenses over 60% · Initial cost reduced to less than a third of a multi-device solution · Recurring costs are nominal.1 Introducing the award-winning edgeBOX The edgeBOX appliance comes in 3 different form factors (with different redundancy & faulttolerance options). ISDN PRI/BRI. NOTE: The box already comes with a set of default configurations that will allow most customers to just literally power on the box and begin to use it. data Critical Links. even remotely 3. it also provides a customer the ability to customize the settings to support their environment. complexity and cost at a SMB. SMBs have had to incur a high degree of complexity (due to the many devices and vendors needed to be managed) and the attendant cost (due to expensive IT support) to get much needed voice and data features. Inc. data and IT capability · Managed through a simple.About edgeBOX 11 1. T-1/E-1 etc). Environmentally (and economically) friendly · Much smaller carbon footprint lower power/space consumption · Lower waste generated at end of life The edgeBOX eliminates the traditionally painful trade-off between features. Every edgeBOX has an intuitive GUI that allows the user to access the box and configure the various functions very easily. unified interface. Ethernet. The edgeBOX: 1. The edgeBOX comes with a wide range of interfaces to connect to the Internet and the PSTN (such as FXO/FXS. simplified management 4. Dramatically simplifies the SMB voice and data infrastructure · It replaces up to 8 independent products/devices with 1 device · Reduces maintaining & managing several devices (and vendors) 2. remote. Increases Productivity and Convenience at the SMB · Provides the broadest range of voice. . Now with the edgeBOX a customer can get a broad range of voice.

also ensures a best-of-breed solution that is competitively superior in terms of both feature richness and cost. The edgeBOX incorporates a set of functional capabilities that are necessary when provisioning voice and data services at a SMB. for example. Cable modems or other WAN Broadband devices. Supports dynamic and static IP Address assignment. interoperability. Inc. . further enhancing the user experience.9006 www. are also available for specific vertical segments. in addition to configuring the IP-PBX. e-mail server. The edgeBOX is changing the rules of the game for the SMB. Content Management System (for managing website content). Quality of Service (QoS). The SMBs can now focus on their core competence instead of worrying about the cost and complexity of managing their networking The edgeBOX. A remote based management system ensures remote provisioning. based on open source standards. 695 Route 46 West Fairfield. The edgeBOX comes provisioned with a default configuration for the router/switch settings and also for commonly used SIP phones. Critical Links.12 edgeBOX 5. by integrating the voice. Inc. monitoring and management of several edgeBOX appliances as well.S. and making all of them work together. If a VoIP service is to be provisioned.A +1.0 Help and IT services for a fraction of existing costs. NJ 07004 U. in one appliance and managed by a simple GUI dramatically reduces the complexity and brings down the costs. Current edgePACKs include the Learning Management System (for academia).critical-links. The edgeBOX. value-added application packages called edgePACKs.com 1-888-4-EDGEBOX 1. further simplifying and cost reducing maintenance. have to also be usually configured. and edgeExchange (for e-mail. these further augment the networking services in the edgeBOX with application oriented capabilities. also allowing the configuration of a registered domain name.973. This not only reduces the upfront cost but also speeds up service turn up.276. data and IT features. All this can be done right in the edgeBOX appliance from a GUI and without having to concern about the peculiarity of different devices.2 edgeBOX's main features · · Internet connections using ADSL. The number of features available on the edgeBOX is unmatched competitively and it provides more voice and data services than most SMBs would require currently. Router tables. More information on the edgeBOX: Critical Links. In addition. etc. Firewall. calendar and content sharing).

Possibility of reserving bandwidth for important users in your company or for high priority traffic types. DNS Server for both local private domain or as a master name server on the Internet. User time and traffic based accounting.3 Unpack and setup edgeBOX To install the edgeBOX onto your network please consult the Quick Start Guide flyer that was sent to you with your edgeBOX appliance.About edgeBOX 13 · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · DHCP server on the Intranet side with optional automatic name range generation. Integrated e-mail access using the internal web server. VoIP Features. Tell you how to connect edgeBOX to your Internet Modem and Ethernet Switch. 802. Explain the elements and connectors in the rear and front panels. 1. Optional Wireless Network with edgeBOX's access point. 4. User based access control to manage accesses to the network resources. Introduce you to all the edgeBOX components. Conference calls. A web server on both the Internet and Intranet side. Critical Links. Phone Auto Configuration. System updates from a remote server. Backup and Restore of edgeBOX's configuration and of users's data. Supports optional RADIUS session servers.1Q and Inter-VLAN access policies. Show you how to power up the appliance. The guide will quickly: 1. Supports Local User Authentication or Remote User Authentication using a RADIUS Server. Dynamic DNS. Call Rules. etc. Support for a dynamic Intranet with content management capabilities. Group based access control for third part applications integrated with edgeBOX. VLAN aware router. Full access control over the internal network services and the Internet access. Supports 802. Inc. Interactive Services. Supports DynDNS or No-IP. IMAP and POP3 Servers. 3. See who is on your network and from what IP address. including support for line fail over. 2. Hunt Groups. Fax2Mail and Mail2Fax. . LDAP Server or using Active Directory. such as voice traffic. Sound Manager. with optional home pages for every user of the network. Traffic control in inbound and outbound traffic. VPN tunnels based on the IPSec standard or the PPTP protocol. Support for SMTP Relay for Road Warriors.1x Port based authentication with Single Sign On. Internet E-Mail Server with anti-spam control.

com or https://192.0 Help 1.0/24 range (ex. 2. use 192.0 for Subnet-Mask. · Or configure it with a static IP address: the IP address used must lie in the 192. or · to a hub or a switch connected to edgeBOX's LAN interface.255.168.50). to connect your computer to the edgeBOX: · Configure it to automatically obtain it's local network IP Address from the edgeBOX using DHCP (recommended).100.168. With a browser. also 192. The LAN interface is initially configured with the IP address 192. 192.254 for Default Gateway.254 for Nameserver. so that it meets your requirements. the first task after you connect the edgeBOX to the network is to change the default configuration. Then.254 and DHCP is active. .168.100. Typically. open the webpage https://myedgebox. Inc.168.100.100. After the page opens. use 255.168. Critical Links. from the computer: 1.255. click the Login link. You can perform the initial configuration from a computer connected either: · directly to edgeBOX's LAN interface. This way.168.100.14 edgeBOX 5.4 Connecting to edgeBOX's web interface The edgeBOX appliance is configured with a default factory configuration.254:8011.100.

When loading completes you will see the Dashboard page with a quick overview of some relevant edgeBOX variables and it's global status. IP-PBX. System and Reporting sections and menus. Use admin for username and root for password to login (this is the default password.About edgeBOX 15 edgeBOX initial page 3. Security. Critical Links. VPN. . The edgeBOX web interface will then start loading. for security reasons you should change it). hit the Login button. Office Servers. To use the edgeBOX web interface you'll need the Java Plug-in installed: Java Runtime Environment version 6. At the top you'll also find links to the Network. Feel free to click the links and navigate the interface. This will help you get familiar with edgeBOX. please note it might take a few moments and you may have to accept one ore more warning messages due to the Java Platform. Users. Inc.

1.such as graphical symbols.5 Understanding edgeBOX's web interface edgeBOX's administration web interface makes use of several common user interface concepts and resources . Critical Links. At this point you might want to: · have a look at the Understanding edgeBOX's web interface page of this manual. This page introduces those common concepts and resources and explains their global meaning and usage scenarios. or · jump to the Initial Configuration section to get a an initial roadmap. . Congratulations.16 edgeBOX 5. popup dialogs and others.0 Help edgeBOX webadmin initial page: the Dashboard That's it. Inc. ready to start configuring it. buttons. When you see the Dashboard you are succesfully connected to edgeBOX's web administration interface. This helps to improve the user's experience while maintaining overall coherence among similar operations and concepts across distinct panels and dialogs.

you can make any quick changes you need and get back to your starting point. . This gives you an alternate and useful navigation path. Service Status and Service Start/Stop The Service Status Bar [4] shows you the current operational status of the corresponding edgeBOX service: the green color indicates the service is active while gray is be used for services Critical Links. Once there you get a summary overview with current configurations and the most relevant status variables concerning the topic involved. Related Topics In each Menu you'll find context specific links to other related configuration menus in the Related Topics corner [3]. select the configuration Menu from the menus list [2] at the left. Navigation is a two-step interaction: choose the Section you want from the sections bar [1] at the top and. once that section loads. If you click the links you'll get immediate access to those configurations in a new popup window.About edgeBOX 17 The following image displays most of these features and will be used as a starting point for further explanations below: Navigation The interface is divided into Sections. Sections are subdivided into Menus. Inc. Then.

If you feel lost. Edit allows you to change an existing entry and Delete let's you remove configurations. in order to apply your changes to edgeBOX. Critical Links.Edit . when in doubt. In the example image above we are trying to search for a user called Alves. Inc. please keep in mind: · none of the changes you made is actually applied to edgeBOX until you press Save. during the configuration sequences between the administration interface and edgeBOX itself . it's a way to say: "Please wait. the red color is used for error situations. those lists include a filtering option [6] that lets you quickly search for specific entries. By clicking them you actually instruct edgeBOX to change the administrative status of the service. this also means that. Lists with Filters Some of the lists presented may grow a lot as you add new entries. New lets you create new entries.usually when you press Save. . At the right end. · in any situation. By entering the alv sequence our search is considerably narrowed and it's now easy to find the person we are searching for.Delete All over the interface these three operations [5] are executed in innumerous situations. Glass Pane: in order to keep your interaction with edgeBOX even safer. or if you're in doubt. Save applies . Depending on the complexity of the operations being executed you may need to wait a little bit. New .Cancel cancels While configuring edgeBOX you'll enter data into several dialogs.the interface is covered with a Glass Pane that prevents you from pressing any buttons or interacting with the interface.18 edgeBOX 5. the Service Status Bar gives you control over the service by means of the Start Service and Stop Service options. On the left. In several situations the sequence of popups that need your input may even become a bit more complex. if you press Cancel the dialog is immediately aborted and no changes are propagated to edgeBOX. we are busy". but also in other situations .0 Help that are not running. press Cancel. an informative text message is displayed accordingly. Please note: these are global principles that should hold true in the great majority of the situations you might find. For faster search. you need to press Save at some point.

If edgeBOX encounters some error then a red X will be shown. 1. 8 databits). you will be confined to the limited set of commands available. If the operation is successful a green V sign will be displayed. · SSH: you need to have SSH service active on your Firewall. no parity bit. However. the Privilege you are assigned to needs to have access to SSH. on Windows you can use Hyperterminal. if you have the Authentication service running. Inc.About edgeBOX 19 Context Sensitive Help Usually located at the top-right corner you will find the Help icon [7]. The screen should display a prompt requesting a login/password to be entered. connect a monitor to the VGA port located in the rear panel. on Linux you can use minicom. Status Bar Located in the lower-left corner. Clicking it will open a new browser window directly into the correct page of this manual. Entrer the usual admin username and it's password (root if not changed). At the eOS> prompt type help to get a list of available options. You can acces the CLI in three diferent ways: · keyboard/VGA: connect a keyboard to the PS2 port or any of the USB ports located on the rear panel. enter help <SOMETHING> to get specific help on <SOMETHING>. use no hardware or software flow control. Rx and Tx wires are "crossed") serial cable to the serial port in the rear panel and the other end to your laptop's serial port. . from the internal network you can use the address myedgebox. Now that you have a global understanding of the interface you can jump to the Initial Configuration section to get a roadmap. 38400N8 (38400 bit/s. the Status Bar [8] shows you when the interface is busy interacting with edgeBOX. · Serial Port: connect a null-modem (also known as serial cross-over cable.com or the LAN interface IP Address.com). on Windows you can use putty.6 Connecting to edgeBOX's console It is also possible to connect directly to edgeBOX's console to manage the appliance using a Command Line Interface (CLI). Critical Links. on Linux open a terminal and use the ssh command (ex: ssh admin@myedgebox.

20 edgeBOX 5. Critical Links. if the firewall is enabled or Firewall Off.0 Help ex: help service shows you a usage summary of all commands starting with service. · Firewall Status . · DMZ IP . · Gateway Address . · User Authentication Status . 1. · WAN IP . edgeBOX's LCD panel View information about the network To see information about the network on the LCD panel. The DMZ is often used as an internal Server network. press the Up or Down buttons near the LCD screen. .Default Gateway IP Address. The information available is: · LAN IP .7 Working with edgeBOX's LCD panel The edgeBOX LCD panel is a simple information panel available on Business and Enterprise appliances. Using it incorrectly may compromise edgeBOX's correct functioning or even stop it to work completely. Use the command line only if you are an advanced user. press the Power button.The IP address of the Internal Network.DMZ IP address. Then.Firewall On. Inc. service status will show you a list of services and their current and administrative operational status. edgeBOX will beep.Enabled (LAN based users are required to authenticate) or disabled (LAN based user are not required to authenticate) Shutdown the edgeBOX To shutdown the edgeBOX. if it is disabled. and edgeBOX will beep twice and start the shutdown process. · press the Power button again.The IP address of the Internet Connection.

Administration section..About edgeBOX 21 · or press the LCD Enter button.8 License. · Version 5. each edgeBOX has a distinct license." will be displayed in the LCD. edgeBOX will start the shutdown process and the message "Shutting down system. System . · Hardware Description: hardware reference and serial number. you'll get information about edgeBOX's software version. · Network users limit: maximum number of users allowed for this licence. hardware settings and license definitions. 1. You can also shutdown the edgeBOX using the web interface. 29/06/2009: software version.0. Wait. build number and build date. Critical Links.. · Product Licensed to: licence owner (person or company). Inc. Build 1. · License Serial Number: edgeBOX license. . To do this go to the Webadmin interface. Hardware and Software By clicking the about link at the top-right corner.

First: you need to open the webadmin interface If you haven't done this before please follow the steps in the Connecting to edgeBOX's web interface section of this manual. all IP devices in your network will somehow find a way to make messages reach edgeBOX's LAN interface IP Address and edgeBOX will know how to send them back IP messages identified with it's own LAN IP Address. edgeBOX is Critical Links. When you get connected you can jump to Step 1 and get started configuring edgeBOX Step 1: Connecting edgeBOX to the Internet . and so does edgeBOX.your LAN. the first step is to connect it's WAN interface to the internet. each and every device interacting in a TCP/IP network. for short . make VoIP calls to another country . like yours.LAN · Concept: your internal network .WAN · Concept: edgeBOX is supposed to work as the main link between any devices/systems in your internal network and the Internet.access the Internet. Inc.through this interface edgeBOX reaches all those LAN devices and all of them know how to reach edgeBOX if they need to. In seven simple configuration steps you'll understand the concepts and review the sections in this manual where the configuration details are covered. they all communicate by connecting to the so-called TPC/IP Ethernet infrastructure and the messages thus interchanged are all identified with two distinguishing marks: the IP Address of the sender and the IP Address of the destination computer or server. has it's own IP Address.0 Help 2 Initial Configuration If you've just turned edgeBOX on for the first time. you need to make an initial basic configuration so that edgeBOX can start managing your network and services. so. send an e-mail.is composed of computers. · Hands On: Configure the internet connection (WAN interface) Step 2: Setup your Internal Network . you need to assign such an address to the LAN interface of edgeBOX . laptops. IP Phones and other miscellaneous IP devices like printers and so. whatever you may do .keep in mind: edgeBOX is the gateway to the outside world. .22 edgeBOX 5.

fileserver. change it to your location. then a possible domain could be megasoft. such as mycompany. · Hands On: Change the local network properties (LAN) Step 3: Specify a hostname and a domain name · Concept: the hostname is the name by which the edgeBOX is known in the network (the name that the computers in the network use to refer to the edgeBOX). that domain is visible to everyone in the world throughout the Internet. but if you do. com. the domain is the name by which your network is known.. · Hands On: Change edgeBOX's hostname and network domain Step 4: Check and adjust edgeBOX's Date & Time · Concept: edgeBOX. edgeBOX is shipped with the Firewall service running and this. Inc. .loc. is enough for providing a very high degree of Critical Links. a hostname is a descriptive name (gateway. if your company is called MegaSoft. edgebox. · Hands On: Adjusting Date and Time Step 5: Overview your Firewall and secure your network · Concept: the Firewall is possibly the most important network security resource shipped with edgeBOX. alone. several edgeBOX features rely on a correct Date and Time in order to operate in a timely fashion as expected by network users and other processes. for example. don't change it if you don't need to.com. additionally you should adjust your Timezone too: edgeBOX is shipped to use timezone Europe/London.Initial Configuration 23 shipped with the LAN 192. this domain will be private and visible only within your network. if you do not have a registered domain. like critical-links. it's very important that you consider always having your Firewall service up and running (don't turn it off unless you really need to). you can choose any name you want. as any other computer. printerhost).168. if you have a registered domain. then you can give your network the domain you want. for example.254 IP Address previously configured for you. then you can use that public domain. you can and should adjust Date and Time.100.. if you have two offices with an edgeBOX in each. keeps it's own date and time internally. you can call eboxhead to the first and eboxbranch to the other.

this means that the administration web interface is available from the outside world... by default only Ping and Webadmin services are allowed from the Internet. Step 6: Add a User and a Phone · Concept: edgeBOX is for Users. Users want to use services. to let only specific users access the network. · Hands On: at this moment let's just take a look around to get familiar.. once you decide the services that should or shouldn't be available. just jump to the Firewall section in this manual for the details ( don't start configuring the Firewall until you have read that section of the manual and you are confident on what you're doing). as more people join your company edgeBOX will always be ready to provide resources for them: a Phone. the fundamental concept you should keep in mind is: if my users don't need this service then I will make it unavailable at the Firewall or if that specific service is not supposed to be accessible to the Internet then the Firewall will block any requests to it. go to the Security section in the Webadmin interface. this could be good if you need to administer edgeBOX from home: later on you may come consider this unnecessary. right now you may just want to start configuring the Firewall. click the Internal Connections. Inc. if you really wish to do it. edgeBOX Firewall working principle is the definition of Allow/Deny rules for specific network services and protocols. edit and delete users) them and setup authentication services. nevertheless. you need to manage (create. a personal web page. to follow this section through up to Step 7 to get the whole picture.. your internal users can access all edgeBOX services. access to the Internet. a great deal of effort has been put into making edgeBOX a user oriented product. by default. furthermore you need to consider Security: if you'll allow everyone to use your network or just let specific users to use it.. that is configuring your Firewall. by default the list is empty: that means that. we advise you.. Critical Links. Users want to share files and need Phones to chat internally or to make long distance calls.24 edgeBOX 5.. edgeBOX will automatically determine the best Firewall settings and use them. a personal Windows Share for documents.. this is where you would add some service that you'dd wish not to be available internally. you name it. Users are central in edgeBOX. a popup window will show you the list of forbidden services for your internal network. well. but. Users want to make Phone calls. the Firewall menu will load by default. allowing access only to specific users gives your network more security. . link.0 Help security for your network users and services.. Users have needs. notice the services that have allowed access for connections from the Internet. to provide the maximum security possible to itself and to your network. and you may wish to increase security even further by removing the Webadmin from the Internet allowed services. but let's leave it for later.

adding a new User and a Phone for the new user is an easy task... go for it. please change it immediately.. concept. this is a simple. . or some place away from work. please review the following Next Steps and feel free to navigate around.. edgeBOX is shipped with a default password for the admin user: "root". pick a password you can remember and write it down in some safe place.. Step 7: Change the webadmin password · Concept: you should change the password. you have a pretty good picture of edgeBOX's basics. at home.. yet very important. Next Steps: how do I . · Hands On: go to the Users section in the Webadmin interface and follow the details here Managing Network Users. At the end of Step 7.. To step into more advanced edgeBOX features you might need for your network. if you expose edgeBOX to the Internet this risk is even higher. please realize: adminroot is a very simple guess for most hackers and password exploits and attacks. · Hands On: in the Webadmin interface click the System section and choose the Administration menu. you should change it. the admin password is used to access the Webadmin interface.Initial Configuration 25 Authentication is actually a very important aspect but.. create Windows Shared Folders ? change User Privileges ? activate Webmail ? secure the Internet (WAN) interface ? configure the Firewall for internal connections ? enforce Authentication ? setup VLANs ? Critical Links. Inc.. away from edgeBOX.. right now. follow the details here. let's leave it be.

percent CPU usage (averaged over a 5 minutes interval).0 Help 3 Dashboard The Dashboard provides a quick summary overview of the most relevant edgeBOX variables and status informations in an intuitive graphical display.processor load indicator (from left to right: 1 minute. 5 minutes and 15 minutes process load average). colors and icon behaviours and refreshed every 30 seconds.26 edgeBOX 5. · Processor: · CPU usage . The Dashboard is divided into: System · Date & Uptime: current Date and Uptime (time elapsed since last boot). Inc. · Memory: current instantaneous RAM usage/total and current instantaneous SWAP usage/ total. . · Load . Critical Links. 7/6/2009 17:13 and 14d 11h 32m in the picture. Information is provided in the form of values. · Temperature: motherboard temperature (if available).

then a red 'X' icon will be shown instead. as depicted. 10. · Line Color: the line connecting edgeBOX to the LAN will be green. · Authentication: On or Off. · LAN icon: colored. · Firewall: colored. you get persistent reds. 192. Inc. · Browsing Test: green if edgeBOX can actually browse the World Wide Web. red otherwise. If. · WWW icon: colored. · Line Color: green indicates edgeBOX considers the WAN connection is fully operational with respect to those 3 tests. if WWW is accessible as depicted. If any of the horizontal bars changes to yellow. gray-scale otherwise. · Connection Status: the red connection status icon (a red triangle with an exclamation mark ' ! ' inside) will show up if no LAN hosts are detected (see the also DMZ explanation). as depicted. · Gateway Test: green if edgeBOX is able to ping the Default Gateway.51 in the picture. as in the picture. if your LAN seems operating normally (both LAN link is detected and LAN hosts activity is detected too).126.Dashboard 27 · Storage: current instantaneous System Storage and Home Storage percent occupation/ total. as depicted. red otherwise. if link is detected on the LAN connector (meaning that edgeBOX is actually connected to an active network device). red otherwise. on the other hand. as depicted. WWW · WAN IP Address: the currently configured IP address for the WAN interface. · Connection Status: the red connection status icon (a red triangle with an exclamation mark ' ! ' inside) will show up if any of the three tests fails: something is not operating as expected. LAN · IP Address: the currently configured IP address for the LAN interface (default VLAN). tells you if the User Authentication service is active. gray-scale otherwise. as depicted. On in the Critical Links.5. gray otherwise.168. in the situation depicted edgeBOX detects link on the LAN connector and active LAN hosts. · DNS Test: green if edgeBOX can access an operational DNS service. if no link is detected the line will change color to gray. if the LAN connector does not have link (cable disconnected at one of the ends). if all three tests fail then a red 'X' icon will be shown instead. as depicted. gray-scale otherwise. . if the three tests are successful it will not show up. that means you should try to diagnose the problem and take action to prevent any damage or operational instability.160 in the picture. if the Firewall service is running. you should stay alert.5.

software updates or other. System Messages · There are new system messages: when new notifications arrive. 15 in the picture. . Please read them carefully. Wifi If your system has wireless. · DMZ icon: colored if link is detected and DMZ hosts activity is detected too.28 edgeBOX 5. · Users Logged In: the amount of users currently authenticated. 2 in the picture. the picture shows that the DMZ connector is actually connected to some device . · Line Color: same behaviour as for the LAN. · Connected Devices: the number of wireless clients currently connected (6 in the picture). in the picture the ' ! ' sign is showing: that means that no hosts are being detected on that interface. · Connection Status: same behaviour as for the LAN.168. A new popup window will display them.200.link detected. 4 in the picture. Inc. the Wifi icon will show you: · Line Color: green if WiFi is enabled (as in the picture). Critical Links. gray-scale otherwise (as depicted).0 Help picture. · SSID: the current wireless SSID is displayed within parentheses (mywifi in the picture).254 in the picture. DMZ · IP Address: the current IP address on the DMZ interface. · Ongoing Calls: the amount of phone calls currently in progress. link.. 192. · Phones Online: the amount of phones currently active. gray otherwise.. the information icon will show up in the lower-left corner. Just click the Read Messages. such as system messages.

Inc. manage DHCP. change the local network (LAN) properties. Setup and secure your Wifi network with WEP.1x. List web sites that you do not want the edgeBOX to cache. manage access controls (ACLs) or use Dynamic DNS. Setup a Demilitarized Zone . · · · · · · set the internet connection (WAN). .QoS: assure bandwidth for services and users. Use Network Address Translation . configure edgeBOX's DNS server: add and remove domains. overview your virtual networks (VLANs) and specify a domain and a hostname.to allow computers on the network to connect to outer networks like the Internet.DMZ for your Internet servers and other special purposes. Allow remote computers to access services on a specific host or hosts within your private network . Manage Quality of Service . edgeBOX includes a DHCP server that allows you to automatically assign IP Addresses to the computers in your network based on ranges of IP address or based on specific IP Addresses. Use Diagnostic Tools to solve connectivity issues. WPA and 802.NAT .Network 29 4 Network The Network section is where you can overview and configure most details and functionalities of your network.Port Forwarding. view IP routes managed by the edgeBOX (system routes) and create and manage your own routes (static routes). · · · · · · Related Topics: · Cache Websites · Firewall Critical Links.

Related Topics: · Cache Websites · Firewall · NAT · Dynamic DNS · Internet Traffic · Diagnostic Tools 4. the Secondary DNS fields represented in the Internet Connection menu will automatically revert to the first and second entries in the Forward DNS Servers list. If the DNS service is not running edgeBOX will use the DNS servers configured and displayed in the Internet Connection menu. The Primary DNS and.0 Help 4.1 through another device such as a cable modem or a router If.1 Configure the internet connection (WAN interface) To configure how edgeBOX connects to the Internet or to another wide area network you should choose the Internet Connection menu in the Network section. because edgeBOX is actually not using them. you can choose to: Critical Links. There you will be able to change the configuration for the external WAN Interface. Inc.. statically or dynamically. for the Internet Connection will not be displayed here. in your setup. button to select how edgeBOX connects to the Internet: · through another device such as a cable modem or a router or · through a DSL/PPPoE connection.1. . Click the Change. The DNS servers configured.. edgeBOX connects through another device such as a cable modem or a router. Those settings override any static or dynamic DNS settings configured for the WAN interface in the Internet Connection menu. edgeBOX will use these DNS servers for all external DNS queries. if displayed. If you change the Forward DNS Servers list and you have the DNS service running.30 edgeBOX 5.

press Ok. Advanced Options ..1.2 through a DSL/PPPoE connection If edgeBOX connects through DSL/PPPoE connection.Network 31 Obtain the data for the connection automatically from the device (DHCP) If you chose the DHCP connection method. 4. Type-in the MTU size as agreed with your Internet Service Provider.. Activate the Override MTU check-box. 1.optional). you don't need to enter any additional information. you need to provide: Connection Settings For this type of connections you must type your username and password (please contact your Internet Service Provider in order to correctly determine these two settings). The primary and alternative DNS servers you type here will be added to the list of DNS Servers in the Forward DNS Servers list. 3.MTU If your Internet Service Provider requests it. you can change MTU (Maximum size of the packets). The edgeBOX will get all needed information from the DHCP server Use statically configured IP settings (Static) You need to provide the: · IP Address · Netmask · Gateway · Primary DNS (IP Address) · Alternative DNS (IP Address . . Advanced Options In the Advanced Options menus you should specify how your connection details will be configured Advanced Options Critical Links. Press Save. 4. Inc. Click the Settings. 2. button.

If you change the local network IP address while you are accessing edgeBOX from the LAN segment.254. Choose the LAN network from the list and click the Edit button at the top of the Networks table. · You may also need to change the properties of the network connection of the computer you are using to manage the edgeBOX.0 Help Click the Settings.. type in your browser the address https://10. If your computer receives the IP dynamically from the edgeBOX. Packets · MTU: In this section you can override the MTU (Maximum size of the packets). select the option Override MTU and change the value in the text field to the value requested by your ISP.32 edgeBOX 5. you may need to ask the Critical Links. . close your browser.254:8011. to do it. Type the desired IP Address for the edgeBOX (IP Address for the edgeBOX’s internal interface) in the IP Address field. · Obtain DNS Servers automatically or specify the desired DNS servers. in the VLAN field. · PPPoE over VLAN: select this option if you belong to one of your Internet Service Provider's VLANs. 2.2 Change the local network properties (LAN) To change the properties of your local (internal) networks. There you will find a list of all your networks (including VLANs).1. you may loose access to the edgeBOX web management. View example. 1. · You need to indicate the new address of the edgeBOX in the browser to connect to the edgeBOX’s web management. if you select this option. this may be required by your Internet Service Provider (ISP).1. View example. your ISP may require this.1. Type the network mask in the field Subnet Mask.1. 4. you should navigate to the Networks menu in the Network section. and you can proceed. button: Connection You should choose to: · Obtain the IP Address automatically or specify it yourself. in that case. or simply to adjust your LAN interface IP address. · Obtain the Gateway automatically or specify it yourself. as specified by the ISP. type the VLAN. make sure you re-adjust your IP address (DHCP or static).. Inc. If you change the edgeBOX’s IP Address to 10.

even if you have Firewall based DMZ services active. 2. Select the Enable DHCP Server on this Interface if you wish to have DHCP also on the DMZ network. 3. Or if you have defined a static address in the connections of your computer.3 Change the DMZ settings To change the properties of your DMZ network you should navigate to the Networks menu in the Network section. Related Topics: · Cache Websites · Firewall · NAT · Dynamic DNS · Internet Traffic · Network · Interfaces · DMZ · Diagnostic Tools 4. Change the IP Address and the Netmask fields with the desired information. Choose the DMZ network from the list and click the Edit button at the top of the Networks table.Network 33 operating system to repair the connection to gets a new IP address. Related Topics: Critical Links. 1. Please note: you can activate the DHCP service on the DMZ interface. you need go change that address to a new IP address of the network. Click the Apply button in the bottom right corner of the tab. Inc. There you will find a list of all networks currently managed by edgeBOX. .

2. For more details on edgeBOX's VLANs and possible scenarios please refer to Appendix D: VLAN Based Infrastructure. The status icon will turn green. Define the Guest VLAN Critical Links. a VLAN can isolate those users from the remaining network so that information will not be accessible for other groups. Change the properties of a VLAN 1. · Easily manage the network . You can use VLANs. · Tag – The number that will be used on the network packets to allow the edgeBOX to send the packet to the correct VLAN. you have more than 200 devices on your local network and your local network is getting slower because there is too much broadcast traffic (data that is sent from one computer to all computers in the network). The VLAN status icon will become red. for instance. Your switch should be configured accordingly · IP Address and Netmask of the VLAN – edgeBOX will be active on this VLAN with this IP address.4 View and manage VLANs edgeBOX allows you to have up to five VLANs active on your network. Disable or enable a VLAN To disable an enabled VLAN select the desired enabled VLAN from the list and click Disable at the top of the list.For example. They also provide additional security by separating groups of devices.For example. · Increase security . Why to use VLANs? VLANs offer higher performance because they limit packet broadcasts in the network. Select the desired VLAN from the list and click the Edit button.34 edgeBOX 5. To manage VLANs navigate to the Networks menu in the Network section. Each VLAN tag must be different. . Each computer on this VLAN will have an IP address in this segment.0 Help · DMZ Traffic 4.If you have groups of users that need more security due to the type of information they share between each other. VLANs will limit the broadcast only to the specified group of devices within a VLAN instead of broadcasting to all devices in the network. To enable a disabled VLAN select it and click the Enable button. Inc. to: · Control bandwidth usage and make the network faster . separate users that have VoIP phones from users that do not have them. Change the desired properties of the VLAN: · Name – A descriptive name to allow you to identify each VLAN.

After they authenticate. Critical Links. Click the Define a Guest VLAN.. 4. back in the Networks list the choosen Guest VLAN will be identified with an appropriate note. eth3. thus. the Guest VLAN is the VLAN the network users are temporarily assigned to if they haven't authenticated yet or if they have introduced an incorrect username or password. the eth3 (AUX. 3.. View an example where VLAN 6 is used as the Guest VLAN. they are assigned to their respective VLANs. if available) and the ath0 (your wireless interface. The information displayed is somewhat detailed in that it shows you how edgeBOX implements certain networking aspects using specific techniques like Bridging and VLANs. This panel is accessible in the Related Topcis corner of the Networks menu . logical or physical. refered to as br0. ath0 for example). That's the case of the br0 interface: it commonly bridges together the eth0 (LAN). Inc. . to be treated transparently by edgeBOX kernel as your LAN. option. It is commonly used to display information about how the users can authenticate properly onto the network. operational or logical status of edegBOX's network physical or logical interfaces you need to load the Interfaces popup. form a virtual interface. The informations available are: · Interfaces: the current composition of the bridge (eth1.. This VLAN usually has limited network privileges.. interfaces together: same as saying Bridges. if exists).Network section. Configure your switch accordingly: to do this you must configure you switch to use that VLAN as the Guest VLAN. To configure the Guest VLAN: 1. 2.1x authentication on your switch. Choose the Use as Guest VLAN the VLAN: and pick the VLAN to be used as Guest VLAN. If you don't wish to have a Guest VLAN make sure you select the Have no Guest VLAN option at step 2.5 Interfaces Physical and Logical Status If you need to determine the current physical. It is divided into three major sections: Bridges Here you'll find virtual interfaces used by edgeBOX to logically "attach" several other. · IP address: the current IP configuration (IP/netmask) of this bridged virtual interface.Network 35 When you use 802. This means that the br0 brings together those interfaces in order to.

· IP address: the current IP configuration (IP/netmask) of edgeBOX in this VLAN. 4. this is a distinguishing marker identifying packets destined at a given VLAN.. like VLAN_D or SERVERS. or hardware address. . this Tag is the means by which your VLAN enabled switch or other VLAN enabled Ethernet devices can tell to which VLAN each packet belongs.1Q VLAN ID or Tag in use. For each of them: · Tag: the 802.36 edgeBOX 5.. · IP address: the current IP configuration (IP/netmask) of this interface. For each of them: · MAC Address: the interface physical address.0 Help Physical Devices Shows you a list of physical network interfaces found in the system. VLANs This section of the panel shows you your VLANs. If you don't find the IP address for some of these interfaces it just might happen that they are bridged. Related Topics: · What are VLANs ? · How do I configure and manage VLANs in edgeBOX ? · I need more details on deploying VLAN based scenarios with edgeBOX. Inc.6 Monitor connections through edgeBOX In certain situations you will need to determine exactly which network connections are actively passing through edgeBOX or determine if a given IP address is currently connected to some internet server. In that case the IP address you're searching for will be found in the respective entry in the Bridges section. eth2 and so. for example. · Interface Status: you'll get a graphical indication of Up/Down status and the interface current connection bit rate in Mbps. The Network popup will help you with that. if available. Critical Links. Each is identified by it's assigned name. For example: eth0.

You can choose any name you want.org indentifies the host server1 within a network domain called mycompany. Connections passing through edgeBOX This list shows you the network connections currently maintained by edgeBOX. What is the Hostname? The Hostname is the name by which the edgeBOX is known in the network (the name that the computers of the network use to refer to the edgeBOX). 4.7 Change edgeBOX's hostname and network domain You can find the Hostname in the Hostname and Domain menu. For each connection: · Source IP / User: the IP address that originated the connection. usually identified by a mnemonic indicating a well know network service like sip or http. Inc. As example. For each of them you can read the total bytes sent and received.mycompany. Other hosts could exist in that same domain.org. mycompany. If you have two offices and two edgeBOXes managing each one you can call one edgebox1 and the other edgebox2. A hostname is a descriptive name. if a username can be associated to this IP Address it will be displayed instead of the IP address for easier identification. like for example. · Destination IP: the other end of the connection. Status and traffic of edgeBOX's network interfaces The upper part of this panel shows you a graphical overview of your network interfaces: Internet Local Network and DMZ. for example.. server1. You can find the Domain of the network in the Hostname and Domain menu in the Network section. · Source Port: transport protocol level source port. To change the Hostname click the Change. within the Network section. The mycompany. john-laptop. · Destination Port: transport protocol level destination port.Network 37 You can find it in the Related Topics corner of the Networks menu in the Network section.org. What is the Domain? The Domain is the name by which your network is known.com part is called a domain name. Critical Links.. . Just click the Network link. the IP to which this connection is established. button and type the new name in the hostname text box (the hostname must be less than 16 characters long).

If the network is 192.168.102.168.255.38 edgeBOX 5. you have a VLAN named VLAN_B with the properties: 192. for example. the list should have a route with the following information: 192. An appropriate popup window will advise you of that need. in a simplified fashion.100. If your local network is 192.0 | 0. the contents of edgeBOX's IP routing table: at the top you'll find the Static Routes table. To change the domain of the network click the Change.255. the list should have a route with the following information: 192. then you can use that public domain. If your local network is 192. If you need to add routes to other hosts or networks please see Manage Static Routes .0 | WAN Critical Links.168. This domain will be private and only visible within your network.0.0 | DMZ · A route for every active VLAN (virtual local network VLANs interfaces).8 View the system routes In the Network section you will find the Routes menu.255. button and type the domain name you want in the Domain text box.0 | 255. bellow it you can find the System Routes table. If you have a registered domain.0 | LAN · A route for your DMZ network.0/24 in the edgeBOX's vlan3 interface.100.255 | 0.168.255.com.255.255.100. B or C. The System Routes list should contain several entries. for example. 4.255.100.168..170. the list should have a route with the following information: 192.170.0 Help If you do not have a registered domain.0. You can not edit these entries because they are configured automatically by edgeBOX. If you change the hostname or the domain you need to reboot the edgeBOX so that the changes take effect.254/32.com.0.0. This menu shows you. for example.168.0 | vlan3 (VLAN_B) · A route for the internet (WAN interface). then you can give your network the domain you want.0 | 255. like critical-links.200/24.200 | 255.255. edgeBOX does not update the reverse hosts files of the DNS Domains when you change the hostname and you have networks defined on the edgeBOX (the local network or the VLANs) that do not belong to network classes A. if your company is called MegaSoft then a possible domain could be megasoft. for example. . For example.168.0.0/24.102.0.254 | 255. for example.168. In the System Route table you should see: · A route for your local network (LAN interface). the list should have a route with the following information: 192.0 | 0. Inc..0.0 | 0. If.additional routes that you can create and modify.0.

0.0.0. the address of the WAN interface – the gateway address).12.254 | WAN · IPSec routes will be identified with the IPSec tag on the Interface column If your the remote IPSec gateway has the IP address 212. You can: Create a new route To create a new route.12.0. WAN. for example. 2. for example. and this IPSec tunnel gives you access to an example 10.Network 39 · A route for the edgeBOX (Loopback route).0 | 255. The list should have a route with the information similar to: 127.255.9 Manage static routes If you need to manually configure routes on edgeBOX.0 | 255. Network section.100.0 | lo · A default route (typically.0.0.0.0. A route that is used in case you do not have a connection to the exterior.0 | 0.168.168.12.0.0. Critical Links. If you need to enable access to other hosts or networks that are unknown to edgeBOX or aren't directly accessible.170.100. the list should have a route with the following information: 10. the list should have a route with the following information: 0.170. Please note: all necessary routes should be created and managed automatically by edgeBOX.12 | IPSec 4. the corresponding Destination Netmask and the Gateway (the secondary route through which edgeBOX will reach the destination network or host) The added route will appear in the Static Routes list.254.255.0 | 192. Click the New button. etc. It will open a new dialog window. use the Static Routes list in the Routes menu.0 | 212.12.0/24 remote network.12. Specify the IP Destination Address of the destination network or host.0. .routes that are created and managed automatically by the edgeBOX based on the settings your global LAN. This panel displays also System Routes . If your gateway has the IP address 192.0 | 0. on the Static Routes panel: 1.0. You can assume that edgeBOX will create and manage automatically all routes needed for it's correct operation. then you will need to add static routes. Inc. VLANs.

0 Help 4. Inc. To manage these access points you need to use the specific access point's management interface. edgeBOX cannot manage external access points.10 Wireless In the Wireless menu.40 edgeBOX 5. Network section you can configure and change the properties of the wireless network. Critical Links. It can operate with an embedded Access Point or as an 802. How does Wireless work on edgeBOX? edgeBOX provides a wireless LAN access to your office. Configure and turn on the wireless Indicate the type of wireless authentication Make the wireless network more secure Make the wireless network public edgeBOX allows you to have a wireless network and define several configurations to make it more secure. .1x Access Point controller if you use several external Access Points spread through the network.

WEP or 802. Inc. 4. This way. edgeBOX supports for WPA.1 Configure and turn on the wireless network To review or change your Wireless network. As edgeBOX also provides IP-PBX features.10. you can combine them with the wireless features to create wireless VoIP phone access. edgeBOX's wireless network is already running with a factory configuration defined: the network name is mybusiness. without having to configure anything on the edgeBOX. Critical Links.Network 41 As you can see in the image above. channel 11 and the WPA password is mydemokey. as seen by wireless clients (SSID). you can immediately start providing wireless access on your office. please go to the Wireless menu in the Network section. as integrated authentication using edgeBOX users' accounts or external authentication using a remote RADIUS server. By default. for quick reference: · Network Name: the network name. . you can set several scenarios. A short summary is provided.1x authentication.

.a 8 to 63 characters long sequence or a 64 hexadecimal characters sequence.IP Address. details are: Key . ex: mywifi. grants a very high level of security and privacy. also known as the SSID. how to get the MAC address ? Critical Links.a 10 or 26 hexadecimal characters sequence . (WEP is considered deprecated and has been cracked. · Allow only specific devices to use the wireless network: click the Add. WAP or 802. button to add a new MAC Address to the list. · Security: you have 4 choices · None (Public Network): this operation is insecure. Port and Password).42 edgeBOX 5.. Inc. if the network has no authentication then everyone will be able to connect to it. Port and Password).. this is commonly referred to as the PSK (pre-Shared key). button to edit.1x: with this option you can integrate your wireless network in RADIUS based authentication and accounting setups. A new window pos up with two tabs: General · Name: the name for your wireless network.and Key Position .. hit the Change. button and specify the following: · Data Encryption: choose WPA or Dynamic WEP. it's preferable to use WPA instead). · Hide Network: if you select this option the network will not appear in the list of available networks when users look for wireless networks in their computers. · Accounting: you can choose to save user statistics and other accounting information in a remote RADIUS Accounting server (again by specifying it's IP Address. details are: Key . don't use this option unless you really need to and you understand the insecurity consequences. only the MAC addresses specified will be allowed in the Wireless network.0 Help · Security: WEP.. the name of the wireless network is a name of your choice that will work as the public identifier of the network so users can connect to the network. Advanced · Channel: the radio-frequency broadcast channel to be used (from 1 to 11). · Authentication: can be local (using edgeBOX) or remote (using the specified RADIUS server .. .1x · Channel: the radio-frequency channel being used Hit the Change. · WEP: Wired Equivalent Privay. · 802.choose from 1 to 4. · WAP: Wi-Fi Protected Access.

The wireless service will be stopped. To secure edgeBOX wireless network you can use one of the following authentication methods (protocols): Which type of authentication should I use? The type of authentication you use depends on the devices that are going to access the wireless network. or if you don't want to have a wireless network anymore. the MAC address is identified by the Physical Address. select a channel that is not used in the overlapping networks in the Channel Selection drop down list in the Basic tab when you are creating the wireless network. This step will ensure your network is.Network 43 On Windows computers. you need to reboot edgeBOX after you added the card. . some smartphones or older network devices do not support WPA security yet. 00-0C-29-C5-91-9F.2 Indicate the type of authentication When you create your wireless network you should configure the wireless Security option in the General tab. . other Access Point devices or other edgeBOXes. if you wish to make the wireless network available again just click Start Service. Related Topics: Indicate the type of authentication for the network Make the wireless network public 4. Inc. per example. go to the Start menu and run the Command Prompt.10. If you wish to temporarily turn of the wireless network for any reason. For example. when the black command line appears type ipconfig /all. to avoid conflicts with the other devices. Change the Channel of the wireless network You will probably need to change the Channel of the wireless network if you have other devices than this edgeBOX providing wireless networks nearby. . go to the Wireless menu in the Network section and hit the usual Stop Service. . This is because each of the overlapping Access Points must have a different channel. . . for example: Physical Address . Critical Links. so you need to use WEP authentication to ensure compatibility with all devices. Later on. . To change the Channel of the edgeBOX's Access Point. but the configurations will not be erased. If you add a wireless card to the edgeBOX. to some extent. protected against undesired users.

. It is normally used to secure wireless networks on workplaces. WEP is relative relatively easy to break.1x authentication is even more secure than WPA authentication. Type-in a 10 or 26 hexadecimal characters long sequence. 2. then use the 10 hexa chars sequence. Indicate a key (passphrase or a pre-shared key) that will be used to authenticate to the network. use WPA with a strong password instead because it is more secure. avoid using WEP authentication. 802. Example of a 26 chars key: ACBB-8EF2-3410-23AA-F8F0-EEEE-A2. How must the passphrase or the pre-shared key be? · Pre-shared Key . Use static WEP keys authentication To use WEP authentication on the wireless network: 1. Go to the General tab and choose the Security WEP. You can obtain random generated secure keys at the GRC website. Inc.must be between 8 and 63 characters long and cannot contain spaces. to grant a certain level of security.44 edgeBOX 5. How must the key be? The key must be formed using groups of hexadecimal characters (A to F and 0 to 9) separated by '-'. WEP is relatively easy to break. 2. then use WPA instead of WEP. If all your devices support WPA authentication. you should use the 26 hexa. You should try to always use secure passphrases and pre-shared keys to increase the network security. Use WPA security To use WPA authentication on the wireless network: 1.0 Help If you don't need to grant compatibility to older devices. 3. If you need to use WEP then change regularly the WEP keys. nor special characters like | \ / : * ? ! < > “. Go to the General tab and choose Security WPA.must be composed only of exactly 64 hexadecimal characters (A to F and 0 to 9) and cannot have spaces.1x authentication Critical Links. Activate 802. You should indicate the passphrase or the pre-shared key to the users of your network you want to be able to access the wireless network. · Passphrase . but if you need to ensure compatibility with devices that do not support it. This is not easy to accomplish if you have many users of the wireless network because you need to inform them all about the new active key each time you change it.

Inc.1x Access permissions. If you have devices that do not support WPA accessing the wireless network. Check box in the Accounting zone and indicate how edgeBOX can connect to the remote server (IP Address. the user needs to have 802.Network 45 802. You can validate these credentials: · Locally on the edgeBOX It means that. in the Users section. . To use 802. This is the default option.1x authentication on the wireless network: 1. Go to the General tab and choose the 802. This is normally called WPA-Enterprise. Below the option. port and password for that server. using the 802. you can save that information on a remote remote RADIUS server.. Related Topics: Make the wireless network more secure Make the wireless network public (with no authentication required) Critical Links. edgeBOX will see if the username and password of the user exist in the edgeBOX's list of users and if they match. instead of using a network key that is shared by everyone. 3.. For a user to be able to login. If you also wish to save information like the time the users were connected or what did they do. button. a remote RADIUS server will validate the users' credentials instead of edgeBOX. Check the option Authenticate Users on another RADIUS Server. 2. Define the Authentication type: where users' username and password are validated when they try to login to access the wireless network. port and password). choose Dynamic WEP instead. · On a remote RADIUS server It means that. Select WPA in the Data Encryption section.1x method.1x authentication means that each user who wants to enter the wireless network has to login using its own username and password. fields to indicate how the edgeBOX can connect to the remote server will appear: IP address. You can verify these settings in the Privilege user.1x option and hit the Change.

Inc. hit the Change. Activate the Allow only specific devices to use the network option and add the desired MAC addresses to the list using the Add. If you don't want a computer to belong to the list anymore. they need will need to connect to the network manually. To do that just enter the MAC Addresses (or Hardware Addresses) of the computers for which you wish to allow access to the network: in the Wireless menu. people won't try to enter a network if they do not know it exists in the first place. Even if you don't use this option you still have control over who accesses your wireless network because users still need to authenticate using a wep key.. For your network users to use the hidden wireless network. button and select the Advanced tab.0 Help 4.. that is.10. or using 802.. even if you are already using a secure type of authentication: Allow only specific devices to use the wireless network If you want just a list of specific computers and other network devices to be able to use the wireless network. Related Topics: Indicate the type of authentication for the network Critical Links. Activate the Hide Network option. Hide the network You can hide edgeBOX's wireless network from appearing in the list of available networks people see when they scan for available wireless networks they can connect to in they computers.. To hide the network go to the Wireless menu. Why should I hide the wireless network? Hiding a wireless network is a way of improving the network's security..3 Make the wireless network more secure You can configure two settings on the edgeBOX to make your wireless network more secure. WAP. It makes difficult unauthorized access attempts. to be able to connect to edgeBOX's access point..46 edgeBOX 5. Network section. . button and select the Advanced tab. This option will restrict even further more the access to the network to specific devices.. hit the Change. select the MAC Address of the computer from the list and click Remove . This process differs according to the user's Operating System.) button.. Network section.1x. (or Edit.

Inc. grant query access from internal or external networks. Related Topics: Critical Links. Always secure the wireless network if you don't want everybody to access it.227. DNS is a network service that translates literal hostnames and domain names (such as webmail. There you can review and change edgeBOX's DNS Server configuration. For more information see Wikipedia DNS. slave or forwarder type name servers. unauthorized people can get access to the information on the computers on the network and use the connection to access the Internet. Settings – Shows the DNS status and the properties of the DNS server. It means that everyone who receives the radio signal will be able to enter it and use it. .103). Related Topics: Configure the wireless network Indicate the type of authentication for the network 4. edgeBOX's DNS configurations are divided in the three first subtabs. edgeBOX supports DNS through the well-known named server.11 Managing the DNS server If you need to configure DNS you should navigate to the DNS menu in the Network section.4 Make the wireless network public A public wireless network is a network with no authentication method. If you want to make your wireless network public: go to the Wireless menu in the Network section and select Security: None.com) into numeric IP addresses (such as 209.85.Network 47 4. Wireless networks are more vulnerable to hackers and malicious software because the signal is available for everybody nearby edgeBOX's access point.10. If you don't protect the network. Access Control List – Defines access controls for the domains that the DNS server knows. · · · Domains – Where you can indicate all the domains that the DNS server will know. It is possible to: · · configure master. critical-links. Avoid creating public wireless networks if you don't really want to make it available for everyone for a given reason.

. Three possible Domain Types are available. a Master DNS domain. 4. If Direct is chosen. the host entries required (map IP's to names). or edit. These are: · Master: a Master domain server stores the domain database locally (also called authoritative domain for that domain). using that database. otherwise for private domains you will most likely want to grant only to internal hosts for security reasons. Inc. There you will find the current DNS configurations table. · Resolution Type: choose Direct or Reverse.11. if you have a registered domain you will grant access to external networks to query this zone. This option is not accessible if you have selected Resolution Type Direct and the Manual Reverse DNS Management option · Name Server: here you specify the IP address of the name server.1.0 Help · Dynamic DNS 4. If reverse is chosen. you should go to the DNS menu in the Network section.11. · Slave: a Slave DNS domain gets its zone file information from a zone master and it will respond as authoritative for those zones for which it is defined to be a 'slave' (it is sometimes referred to as a secondary). This option is not accessible if Critical Links. · Forwarder: a forwarder type domain server does not answer queries directly: it will forward them to another name server. when hosts are added. · Network: IP address and the class (A. just follow these steps: Domain Tab · Name: the domain name.1 Adding or Editing DNS domains If you need to add new DNS domains. B or C) of the IP segment for which this domain is valid. · Allow only internal hosts to query this domain: selecting this will restrict DNS answers to queries coming form your local networks.48 edgeBOX 5. It will answer the queries for that domain. On the Domains Tab click New. this choice is only active if you have selected Manual for the Reverse DNS Management option in the global Settings tab. the forward entries are required (resolving names to IP's).1 How to add a Master domain If you need to add.

Click the New button and specify the following: · Type: Choose Network or Host based access control rule. You can have several rules. and the next time it checks to see if it needs a new copy.Network 49 you have selected Resolution Type Reverse and the Manual Reverse DNS Management option. you should use the Permissions Tab. re-use them here. Permissions Tab If you wish to have higher control of hosts. or how. or networks. when creating or editing your DNS domains. · Retry time: The time which the edgeBOX will wait before querying a Master (if the master fails to respond to a request) Critical Links. and type bellow it the corresponding values for Network IP address and Netmask or Host IP address · Query Permissions: from the choice boxes displayed choose if you wish to: · Allow or Deny Queries: indicates if queries are allowed for this domain · Allow or Deny Transfers: determines whether other servers are allowed to copy the zone information from this server. it will process the DNS queries. If no match is found the default behaviour is to allow queries and transfers but to disallow updates. It might be a good idea to create that list first and. . Here you can specify an Access Control List (ACL) of rules that will be pre-verified before the server determines if. later. Time Options Tab · Refresh time: The number of seconds between the time that a secondary name server (slave) gets a copy of the zone (or sees that it hasn't changed). for which this domain will be responsive. Please refer to that section. ACLs created in the Access Control List tab will be available to you in this process. Hosts Tab Managing the contents of the Hosts tab is explained in section Managing hosts on an existing domain. If a rule matches it will be applied. the user needs to add an ACL with the IP/Hostname of the the respective slave domain and allow the transfer option. · Allow or Deny Updates: whether other servers are allowed to submit dynamic updates for this domain To add access from Slave domains to a master domain witch is configured to only let internal hosts make queries. Inc. or how it will operate.

11.50 edgeBOX 5. · Network: IP address and the class (A. Click the New button and specify the following: · Type: Choose Network or Host based access control rule. a Slave DNS domain you need to provide: Domain Tab · Name: the domain name. if you have a registered domain you will grant access to external networks to query this zone. You might wish to lower this if you are going to change your DNS entries and then increase it to a normal value after the changes have been made and tested 4. . B or C) of the IP segment for which this domain is valid. · Resolution Type: choose Direct or Reverse. or how. and type bellow it the corresponding values for Network IP address and Netmask or Host IP address. or how it will operate. for which this domain will be responsive. Here you can specify Access Control rules that will be pre-verified before the server determines if. · Master Servers: here you specify the IP address(es) of Master DNS server(s) for which this domain is a Slave (from which it gets it's DNS database). you should use the Permissions Tab. · Allow or Deny Transfers: determines whether other servers are allowed to copy the Critical Links. · Allow only internal hosts to query this domain: selecting this will restrict DNS answers to queries coming form your local networks.1. otherwise for private domains you will most likely want to grant only to internal hosts for security reasons. or edit. · Query Permissions: from the choice boxes displayed choose if you wish to · Allow or Deny Queries: indicates if queries are allowed for this domain. Inc. You can have several rules.2 How to add a Slave domain In order to add.0 Help · Expire time: The number of seconds that lets the secondary name server(s) know how long they can hold the information before it is no longer considered authoritative. Permissions Tab If you wish to have higher control of hosts. this choice is only active if you have selected Manual for the Reverse DNS Management option in the global Settings tab. or networks. · TTL time: Specifies the maximum amount of time other DNS servers and applications should cache the DNS record. it will process the DNS queries.

or edit a Forwarder domain you only need to enter it's: · Domain Name · Preferred DNS server and · Alternative DNS server (optional).. See Forward DNS Servers below. To add. options are: Critical Links.11. requests are made to the forwarder server(s) and. 4.2 Changing global DNS Settings In the DNS menu. only if you have entered forward DNS servers). Network section you will find the global DNS server options.11. · if Local is chosen. the local consult will not be attempted. Instead. an attempt will be made to find an answer locally.Network 51 zone information from this server. those queries will be forwarded to an alternate DNS server. Server Options The settings displayed can be changed by pressing the Change..1. Click the Settings tab. if not answered. . 4. button: · Reverse DNS Management · Automatic: the reverse domain is automatically created · Manual: the admin is responsible for creating the reverse domain (if a reverse domain is required) · Lookup Mode: determines the first nameserver to be consulted when a request is received. · if Remote is selected (this is an appropriate option. · Zone Transfer Format: determines the format used by the server to transfer zones.3 How to add a Forwarder domain DNS queries for a Forwarder type domain will not be answered by the DNS server. Inc.

· Many: will pack as many records as possible into a maximum sized message. Use the Move Up and Move Down buttons to change the order of the entries. This setting overrides any static or dynamic DNS settings configured for the WAN interface in the Internet Connection menu. edgeBOX will use these DNS servers for all external DNS queries. Click the Add button if you wish to add more servers to the list. · Max. because edgeBOX is actually not using them. You can add several rules. DNS menu and click the Access Control List tab. ACLs names must start with a letter and can consist of only letters and digits. If the DNS service is not running edgeBOX will use the DNS servers configured and displayed in the Internet Connection menu.11. Forward DNS Servers This list contains the servers to which queries will be forwarded if the domains queried are not in the current list of domains. Rule Type · Use an existing rule: choose from Critical Links. . Two tables are presented: the System ACLs table and the User ACLs table.0 Help · One at a time: will place a single record in each message. To do this you need to add one or several Access Control Lists (ACL). This will be the Name Server(s) used to resolve external domains. · Max. Inc. Click the New button in the User ACLs table. Zone Transfer Time: maximum time allowed for inbound zone transfers. You need to provide an ACL Name and a set of rules. If you change the Forward DNS Servers list and you have the DNS service running. The DNS servers configured. Go to the Network section. the Secondary DNS fields represented in the Internet Connection menu will automatically revert to the first and second entries in the Forward DNS Servers list.52 edgeBOX 5. 4. The Primary DNS and.3 Managing DNS ACLs This section tells you how to allow/deny clients the use of your server to perform DNS lookups. You can add and edit User ACLs. if displayed. for the Internet COnnection will not be displayed there. statically or dynamically. The System ACLs are managed automatically and can not be edited. Query Cache Time: maximum time requests are cached internally.

4 Managing hosts on an existing domain During the process of creating a new Master domain or editing an existing one. Critical Links. Action · Allow . For large DNS deployments. · Use IP Address: here you specify the hosts for this rule by typing-in a Host IP Address or a Network IP/Netmask pair. DNS menu. referring to your LAN/VLAN or DMZ hosts. Inc. you should use localnets instead.11. you can manage the hosts on that domain. Click on the Hosts tab. VLANs and DMZ networks).Network 53 · none: for no hosts. if some host verifies a rule for Deny and. the ACL will deny the DNS service to that host. a rule for Allow. · localnets (your LAN. · localhost: for edgeBOX's system internal localhost interface (please be very careful when using this one. the localhost rule is considered an advanced rule and should only be used in specific situations).Access to this domain is available for IP's/Networks in this list. Go to the Network section. you can add or remove existing IPaddress-to-name and name-toIPaddress mappings (the management of the domain database). . when you create or edit a DNS domain. · external (for networks external to edgeBOX). 4. Select an existing Master domain (the same applies when creating a new Master domain). SRV and TXT. CNAME. Note: Deny takes precedence over allow. simultaneously. NS. · Deny . · any: for any host. You can create new entries or manage existing ones. That is. if you mean 'the hosts on my local network'. MX. · Record Type: select from the list. For each of the record types a different set of data is required: · A: the Host Name and it's IP Address. available choices are A. The first thing you need to do is to choose the Type of DNS record you're adding (this option is only available when creating new entries). all ACLs created here are made available to you.Access to this domain is unavailable for IP's/Networks in this list. That is. The current hosts list is presented. in the Permissions tab.

· SRV: the Service. Priority: the priority of the target host. Weight. the Time-to-Live for this entry and the Text Message specific for this kind of entry. Weight: A relative weight for records with the same priority. The longer TTL means faster resolution times because of caching.org or www. but to push it down 5 minutes when changes to DNS are expected. Weight (PWP). · CNAME: the Alias name and the corresponding existing Domain Name. Used in load balancing. What is the Time-to-Live for ? The Time-to-Live (TTL) allows you to specify how frequently domain data may change. You can use one of the two supported dynamic DNS services: · · DynDNS No-IP To see details on how to setup and manage an account on these services. 4. . Priority. It's common to set this value to several hours normally. when you don't have static IP configuration on the WAN side) and you still want to access your host from external networks by a name of your choice. Port/Protocol): used when more servers are providing the same service. Port: the TCP or UDP port on which the service is to be found. Port/Protocol. the e-mail server with a priority of 5 will be tried first. lower value means more preferred. Inc. What is the purpose of the PWP ? PWP (Priority.dyndns. the higher the priority. Thus. if one e-mail server is set as 5 and the other as 10.org. consult www. · NS: the Name Server (you need only to enter the left-most part). the Domain Name. · TXT: the Hostname. but also means the data may be stale for longer.no-ip. the Target Host. the Time-to-Live.12 Use Dynamic DNS Dynamic DNS is a usefull service when you don't have a fixed IP Address to connect to the Internet (that is.54 edgeBOX 5.0 Help · MX: the Domain Name (you need only to enter the left-most part) and the Priority field. How does the Priority field work ? The lower this number. Critical Links.

..no-ip.: mybusiness.org or myserver. DHCP menu. browse to the Network section and click the Dynamic DNS entry on the Related Topics (at the lower-left corner of the browser window). A table with three tabs will be presented: · IP Address Ranges: the ranges displayed will be used by your DHCP server to assign IP addresses to computers or phones that request them. button if you wish to configure it: · Provider: choose your service provider. · Password: the password given to you by the provider. · Hostname: this is the name that you created when you set up the account of the service. This process is accomplished with the Dynamic Host Configuration Protocol . type-in the FQDN (fully-qualified domain name. Managing your DHCP server To get an overview of the current status and configurations point your browser to the Network section. DNS sever(s) and other TCP/IP related informations. a Netmask. A new popup dialog will show you the current configuration status of your Dynamic DNS service.13 Using the DHCP service The DHCP Service assigns IP configurations to hosts. possibly. . · Advanced Options: here you'll find several global options the server will comply to.DHCP (to learn more visit Wikipedia DHCP). VLANs and. · Fixed IP Addresses: this section shows you the IP addresses that are automatically assigned to one specific host or phone. e. IP phones and other devices will request the assignment of an IP Address. · Username: type the username given to you by the provider. in order to be able to actively participate in the network they are attaching to. Click the Configure. computers.Network 55 Enabling Dynamic DNS · You need to have an account on either one of those services.g.dyndns. a specific host is identified by it's MAC address. such as maximum lease time and host configuration variables. What exactly is DHCP ? Usually on boot. · When you have that. your DMZ.org). Inc. laptops and phones on your internal networks: LAN. this way you can have static MAC-IP assignments. Critical Links. 4. a Default Gateway.

will also receive 'mobile200.0 segment and your DMZ is 192. the DHCP service will assign it an available IP address from one of the existing ranges.0/255. · For each IP address interval you can define a prefix.70. .168. this range would not be used at all. you will not be able to add another from 1.56 edgeBOX 5. thus forming the hostname sent.20 because you do not have an internal network compatible with this range. Indicate the higher IP address of the range in the End IP Address field.local.3.0 Help Related Topics: · DHCP Leases 4. 2.255.10. · You can create several IP address intervals as long as they don't overlap.0/255.10 to 192.168.100.255.255.200.3. then you must indicate a prefix.1. Optionally.13.100.255.50 to 192.2.0. type the Prefix. VLANs or DMZ).200 because they overlap.168. then a host to which the IP address 192. Create a new range To create a new range of IP Addresses: 1.If you enter mobile as the prefix and the domain if your network is local. On the dialog window indicate the lower IP address of the range in the Start IP Address field.255. you have an active VLAN on the 192.50 to 1. see an example Let's use the following reduced scenario for simplicity: your LAN segment is 10.255.200 is assigned. Delete a range Critical Links.1 Assign IP addresses using Ranges Here you can define ranges of IP Addresses that will be assigned dynamically.103. View details about the prefix · Example . · E-mail Server . see an example If you have a DHCP range from 1.100 because it fits into one of your internal networks (the DMZ in this case).3.loc. Inc.2. on the other hand you can define a DHCP range like 192.0/255.200.If you have edgeBOX e-mail server running and you want to have domains or hosts in the SMTP Relay list.168. · Each DHCP range created must completely fit into one of the currently configured internal networks (LAN.168.200.3.0. Click the New button below the Ranges list in the DHCP tab.2. When a computer in the network requests an IP Address. you will not be able to add a DHCP range from 192. 4. it will be prepended to the last portion of the IP assigned. 3.loc' as hostname.2.168.168.70. in the e-mail server's Access Control definitions.10 to 1.

Related Topics: · Assign IP addresses using Ranges · Overview the settings of the DHCP service · Configure DHCP advanced settings Critical Links. Click the Apply button to save the changes. If you delete a DHCP range. Related Topics: · Assign IP addresses using MAC-IP rules · Overview the settings of the DHCP service · Configure DHCP advanced settings · DHCP Leases 4. . 3. the server will provide the IP address you specify. Enter the device's MAC address in the corresponding afield. to a computer.13. Click the Delete button below the list. Click the New button. 2. Be careful when deleting DHCP ranges. Network section. allows you to assign always the same. Type-in the IP address you want for the device in the IP Address field. specific IP address. Other failure situations are possible.Network 57 To delete a range of IP Addresses: 1.2 Assign IP addresses using MAC-IP rules The Fixed IP Addresses tab. Inc. Each time that specific host or phone requests an IP address to connect to the network. Select the desired range from the Ranges list. 3. the computers that receive IP addresses from that range may not be able to connect to your network the next time they are turned on. 2. Create a new MAC-IP Rule To assign a specific IP address to a specific device: 1. DHCP menu. To find the MAC address of a computer you can use the ipconfig /all command in the command line of Windows systems or ifconfig in the command line of Linux systems.

for short) hosts. in other situations they can ask for a specific lease time.. Inc. it determines the domain to which the host belongs when getting it's IP configuration. · Maximum Lease Time: hosts usually simply ask for an IP Address and use it for the default lease time. a host can use the given IP Address. button and specify them manually by entering data into the desired text fiels.58 edgeBOX 5. in seconds. will only be provided to internal network (LAN. button and type in the desired value(s). the default configuration is to provide edgeBOX's LAN IP address. Gateway and DNS These settings control the Gateway. In those cases. Related Topics: Critical Links. · Domain: this is the network domain to be provided. will be provided on any network zone to which the DHCP service is reachable. otherwise the maximum time will be used. in the popup dialog.. by default this is edgeBOX's LAN IP address.0 Help · DHCP Leases 4. · DNS Server(s): this/these are the DNS servers the host should query in order to resolve names.3 Configure DHCP advanced settings The Advanced Options tab allows you to further refine your DNS server's configurations. To change any of them just hit the Change. . click the Change.13. If you need to change these default settings. the DHCP service will assign the IP address for the requested duration if it is smaller than the max. will be provided only to LAN and DMZ (if enabled) hosts requesting dynamic IP configuration. and thus.. by default edgeBOX will take on that task. · Gateway: determines the Default Gateway to be provided to the hosts requesting the dynamic IP configuration. · Default Lease Time: is the default duration. DNS and Domain Name that will be provided to the network hosts as part of their IP configuration.. The Advanced Options are separated into: Lease Time The Lease Time is the length of time for which the host can use the IP Address assigned by the DHCP Service before he is required to request it again from the DHCP Service.

in the Related Topics corner. Hit the Save. also minimizing WAN bandwidth usage This is made by saving parts of the webpages in the edgeBOX. It makes the webpages your network users consult more frequently to be loaded quicker..dates of each lease. Follow the Cache Websites link in the Related Topics corner.and end .Network 59 · Assign IP addresses using Ranges · Assign IP addresses using MAC-IP rules · Overview the settings of the DHCP service · DHCP Leases 4. . To do this. Change the size of the Proxy Cache 1. Click the Change.13. the Device Name (if available).. please navigate to the Network section. 2.4 DHCP Leases The DHCP Leases popup is available in the DHCP menu. It shows you the IP Address assigned. Indicate cache exceptions Critical Links. edgeBOX acts a Transparent Proxy Caching Server. 4.... the host's MAC Address. option to get a list of leases considered expired. The Ping Status column will show you if that specific IP Address is currently present on the network: select an entry from the list and click the Ping button to update this field. It shows you the current list of IP addresses assigned to each computer in your internal network. and the start .. button and select a value between 128MB and 8192MB in the Cache Disc Size drop down list. Network section. Click the View expired DHCP Leases. button.To field .From field . About edgeBOX's cache.14 Manage the Webcache size and sites You can specify websites which you don't want to cache of (cache exceptions). Inc.

4. It may be useful for some specific websites. 2. You can stop the service if you don't want edgeBOX to cache any websites. edgeBOX caches all websites.0 Help By default. Click OK. Click the New button. Please refer to that section for details: NAT and Port Forwarding. Do not cache websites / stop the Proxy-Cache Service By default edgeBOX caches the websites your network workers visit. To start caching websites again. To stop edgeBOX's proxy cache click the Stop Service link at the top. being mostly Firewall related. click Start Service. . is fully covered in the Security section. Security section. If you have Premium traffic defined in the QoS section. edgeBOX will not be able to block access to websites you may have blocked or block access to websites containing words and expressions you may have blocked in the Website Restrictions options. You can indicate websites that you don't want the edgeBOX to cache. Critical Links. This is. To indicate to the edgeBOX not to cache a website: 1.60 edgeBOX 5. If you stop caching websites.15 Using NAT and Port Forwarding The usage of NAT and Port Forwarding. the Proxy Cache service is by default running. You can also delete and edit these entries. Inc. this traffic is not cached by the edgeBOX. Type the IP address of the website that the edgeBOX must not cache in the window that will pop up. like websites that are very dynamic and their content changes constantly. 3.

maximum delay variation and maximum packet loss. maximum delay. As the Diffserv nomenclature is very technical. that is. . the IPSec tunnel and the users' Internet access when the network is congested. all traffic is somehow included in a user privilege. otherwise. User Privileges 3. A CoS is deployed by a internal mechanism which shapes the network traffic in order to meet a set of expectations such as the minimum rate. This is possible. given by a Privilege. we may want both the scenarios. The order of packet classification is the following: 1. In this case. The edgeBOX provides a set of CoS according to the Diffserv model. we would need to classify the service by creating a rule to assign an assured rate to every ESP and GRE packets. service traffic differentiation requires service classification configuration. information about how the service packets may be recognized among all others on the network. Inc. Moreover. Service classification 2.Network 61 4. we just need to select an appropriate traffic profile and assign it to the users' Privilege. The process of service and user QoS configuration is different both in the concept itself and the difficulty to accomplish.16 Using QoS The edgeBOX QoS (Quality of Service) consists of differentiating the network traffic resulting from the activity of services and/or users. the edgeBOX provides the following CoS: CoS Olympic CoS Diffserv DSCP (hexadecimal) ToS (hexadecimal) Maximum Percentage Rate Critical Links. On the other hand. On the one hand. Therefore. just by applying both configurations. we may not be concerned with a service in particular and we may just want to be able to grant Internet access to a certain group of users even if the network is overloaded. It is also important to keep in mind that service classification is always processed in the first place. Classification based on the packet DSCP mark Classification based on the DSCP mark will only be used when the authentication is turned off because. Let's consider that we want to be able to use an IPSec tunnel no mater how much congested the network is. Classes of Service The differentiated traffic behavior is given by CoS (Classes of Service). In this case. These two approaches have different purposes. we chose to use a more user friendly one called Olympic. Nevertheless. user traffic is much easier to configure as it only involves assigning a traffic behavior to a group of users.

The CoS provided for inbound and outbound traffic are not exactly the same. . 0xe 0x28. Actually. 0x78 0xb8 Only the Premium class is configurable and cannot be classified directly neither by the users or by the services. VoIP QoS VoIP traffic classification is handled internally as a pipe. Thus a pipe. 0x16 0x48. it is possible to decide whether to apply or not QoS on each interface . Network section. inheriting the Premium configuration except for the rate. Therefore. Inc.62 edgeBOX 5. 0x1e 0x2e 0x68. Starting and Stopping QoS The QoS Service can be started and stopped on the service bar at the top of the QoS menu. 0x14. that is. Furthermore. In this context. for inbound traffic classification. AF12. The only configuration required is setting the VoIP assured rate. IAX) is classified as Gold. 0x1c. although premium has no pipes it can be classified directly. AF13 0xa. AF23 0x12. rate is to be set by the user. 0xb. 0x50. is a user defined traffic profile. then it will not use this hidden pipe anymore and will use the Gold for every VoIP packets class instead. 0x38 Silver AF21. 0x30. The purpose of this class is to be used to build a set of high priority subclasses called pipes. 0x70. AF33 EF 0x1a.0 Help BE DF 0x0 0x0 10% of non premium rate 20% of non premium rate 30% of non premium rate 40% of non premium rate User defined Bronze AF11. the premium class cannot be assigned but pipes can.WAN and DMZ (if available). However. Related Topics: · Privileges Critical Links. 0x58 Gold Premium AF31. AF22. AF32. VoIP audio (RTP) packets are classified as Premium and signaling (SIP. only two of those classes are provided: BE and Premium. that is. there is an exception: if the VoIP QoS is set to 0.

· Allow other classes to borrow unused Premium bandwidth: selecting the option means that the Premium CoS will borrow bandwidth whenever it is requested by another CoS and if that premium bandwidth is not being used. It includes: · the pipe's Name. packets will be classified and marked according to the Diffserv architecture. · the Percentage of Premium assured rate assigned to the pipe. · Pipes Management: by clicking on the New (or Edit) button a window will be presented with the Pipe configuration. button in the QoS menu.. Inc.1 QoS Upload configuration To set QoS upload configurations for the Internet (the same applies for the DMZ. Otherwise unused Premium bandwidth will always stay unused.. this can be used to limit the upload rate for all the upload traffic. Critical Links. enable this feature only if you have an SLA (Service Level Agreement) with your ISP.. These settings consist of the following: · Mark DSCP: by checking this. · Premium Assured Percentage: sets the maximum percentage of the upload bandwidth assigned to the Premium CoS.16. . · VoIP Assured Percentage: sets the percentage of upload Premium bandwidth to be used for VoIP traffic. button opens another window with the advanced upload QoS settings. A new window with the QoS upload properties will be presented including the following parameters: · Maximum Rate: sets the maximum upload rate. Advanced QoS Upload Configuration The Advanced Configuration. if available) just hit the corresponding Change.Network 63 · Internet Traffic · DMZ Traffic 4. Network section..

LAN>DMZ. LOCAL->DMZ. This parameter it's only visible for TCP and UDP protocols. DMZ>LOCAL (LOCAL referrers to packets going from or coming to the edgeBOX itself). · based on the user privilege and · based on the packet DSCP field. a port-range or a set of ports and port-ranges. accepted values are TCP. there are three packet classification strategies: · based on the service. DMZ->LAN. Single IP Address or IP Address Range.. · Source Ports: sets the source ports. · Source Address: sets the source IP address(es). edit or remove QoS service classification rules option. a port-range or a set of ports and port-ranges. accepted values are LAN->WAN. Critical Links. 4. The parameters which may be used in service configuration are the following: · Traffic Direction: sets the direction of the packet. WAN->LOCAL. options are options are Any IP Address. Network section.16.16. UDP.2 QoS Download configurations To set the QoS download configurations for the Internet or the DMZ. it accepts a single port. Remember that there are only two classes in inbound (Best Effort and Premium) and no pipes.3 Service Classification As mentioned before in this section of the manual. · Destination Ports: sets the destination ports. button in the QoS menu. just click the corresponding Change. QoS menu by clicking the Create. Download configuration includes the following parameters: · Maximum Rate: maximum download rate. WAN->LAN. It was also mentioned that the first has higher priority and it is always applied in the first place. . LOCAL->WAN. · Service Class: sets the CoS which will be assigned to the service. · Protocol: protocol of IP packet. · Premium Assured Rate: percentage of the maximum download rate that will be used for the Premium CoS. The available options depends on the traffic direction and on the pipes created. GRE or ESP. if supported.. Inc. · Destination Address: sets the destination IP address(es). it accepts a single port.64 edgeBOX 5. The service configuration panel is accessed in the Network section. options are Any IP Address.0 Help 4. This parameter it's only visible for TCP and UDP protocols. Single IP Address or IP Address Range.

in the Related Topics corner. will be classified as BE.4 Internet and DMZ QoS statistics The Internet Traffic and DMZ Traffic popups are available in the QoS menu. of course. 4. In this case. from 20 to 100.16. Rules priority is changed by selecting a rule and clicking the Up and Down buttons on the toolbar. to any IP address. left and right. On the other hand. form any port. Data is calculated for a period of 15 minutes using values that are collected every 2 minutes. All TCP packets from LAN to WAN. from any IP address. specifying service classification rules demands special attention to these issues. with the exception of port 22. classified as upBE. but each for it's corresponding network zone: Internet zone (WAN) or DMZ zone. to the port range 20-100. the DMZ Traffic popup can identically be reached in the Related Topics. to any IP address. setting rule 2 priority higher than rule 1. to port 22. Security section. from any IP address. . Critical Links. Network section. 2. let's consider the following two rules on the following order of priority: 1. Only rule 1 will be used to classify these packets. Inc. All TCP packets from LAN to WAN. For convenience. Upload Bandwidth and Download Bandwidth · the two. Similarly.Network 65 Service Rules Priority There may be conflicts between service classification rules. will have a completely different result. form any port. Therefore. These panels allow you to view traffic control statistics for the Internet Connection and for the DMZ interface. classified as upGold. upper corner panels show you the inbound and outbound current bandwidth usage and the current QoS Maximum Rate in Kbps: as example 235 Kbps of 20000 Kbps. port 22 is included in the port-range specified on rule 1 and as rule 1 has higher priority than rule 2. rule 2 will never been reached because. For example. In this case. packets destined to port 22 will be classified as Gold and packets destined to the other ports. Both display the same kind of information. In other words. · Transmitted bytes: total transmitted bytes. is subsumed by rule 1. inverting the priority. that is. the Internet Traffic popup can also be reached in the Related Topics corner of the Internet Connection menu in the Network section. DMZ menu.

Transmited Packets. Transmitted Bytes. Silver. Dropped Packets. Bronze and Default (BE) QoS traffic classes displays the same four values: Bandwidth Used.0 Help · Transmitted packets: total transmitted packets. Gold. Transmitted Bytes. Transmited Packets. Critical Links. Dropped Packets. Inc. .66 edgeBOX 5. · Dropped packets: total dropped packets. You can use the Reset button to bring all values to zero and restart statistics. Upload Bandwidth per class For each of Premium. Download Bandwidth per class For each of Premium and Default (BE) QoS traffic classes displays the same four values: Bandwidth Used.

or a user and a private network. This is accomplished by the usage of authentication and encryption techniques which assure privacy and security form one end to the other. . Inc. thus providing safe connectivity for remote sites or users. edgeBOX currently supports three options for enabling VPN connections: · IPSec · PPTP · L2TP 5. can be made to communicate and interoperate. which is best suited for remote users to connect to a protected network. This kind of IPSec VPNs is referred to as Net to Net IPSec. Nevertheless edgeBOX also supports the RoadWarrior type. using an available link through an unsafe network.1 IPSec IPSec VPNs are especially suited for establishing tunnels between two private networks over the Internet. connecting them securely. Critical Links. such as the public Internet.VPN 67 5 VPN This section allows you to review and change VPN configurations · · · IPSec PPTP L2TP A Virtual Private Network (VPN) provides the means by which two private protected networks.

Stop and refresh the Status of each tunnel.68 edgeBOX 5. Inc. navigate to the IPSec menu in the VPN section. The Configured Tunnels table shows you several details about each tunnel: · Name: the tunnel's name · Gateway: the tunnel's gateway IP address or the RoadWarrior indication · Networks: the two network endpoints · Status: the current operational status of each tunnel. All other options are also available. In addition to the usual management operations (New. limited to situations where the edgeBOX have an interface directly connected to the tunnel local network.0 Help Net to Net IPSec VPN connecting two private networks To review or manage your IPSec tunnels. Please note that the Status function's correct operation is. IPSec Routes edgeBOX automatically generates and manages IP routing details necessary for the correct manipulation of IPSec traffic between the two tunnel endpoints. Edit and Delete) you can also Start. You'll get access to a context menu with an option named View that allows you to view current details of the running tunnel. An overview is presented with a list of configured tunnels. you will need to choose among two kinds of IPSec: Net to Net and RoadWarrior. the Status function will not produce a correct tunnel status information. their details and their respective status. Please note that the IPSec service can not be started if the WAN interface is not configured. If that is not the case. To create a new IPSec tunnel. in the service status bar. For tunnels that are running you can select the entry and right-click it with the mouse. architecturally. To Start or Stop the IPSec function globally you can use the usual Start Service and Stop Service options at the top of the menu. These routes are distinguished with a specific 'IPSec' identifier in the Device column of the System Routes panel in the the Network Critical Links. .

0/255. Depending on the type of VPN tunnel. go to the Advanced Tab.0) or any of your VLANs (ex. the PSK should be generated from purely random characters. Critical Links.1. this key is the pre-shared secret (PSK).255.1 General After clicking New and choosing the type of IPSec . If you need to review them or change them.168. RoadWarrior specific: · Remote Hosts: any or a specific host.0). a number of networking and security related parameters are automatically set for you.255. Inc.you can configure several details for the tunnel: General Tab: The general tab allows you to configure a VPN tunnel with a minimum of information. · Shared Key: both local and remote ends of the tunnel must have the same key to initiate encryption.Net to Net or RoadWarrior . · Gateway: the IP Address of the IPSec server this tunnel is to be established to. you should provide: · Tunnel Name: a name by which to identify this tunnel · Local Network: IP Address and Netmask specifying the internal segment on the "local" side of the tunnel.101.255. That is.0/255. 192. 192. . Related Topics: · Routes 5.168.VPN 69 section. could be your local LAN (ex.100.255. Net to Net specific: · Remote Network: IP Address and Netmask specifying the IP segment on the "remote" side of the tunnel (as will be "seen" locally).

a FQDN or an e-mail address. but exposes identities of the peers to potential eavesdropping.0 Help 5. · Remote ID: default local ID (IP Address) or. making it less secure. . ID Information · Local ID: default local ID (IP Address) or.. generally speaking. Inc. a specific Configure.1 Advanced You'll find all IPSec Advanced configurations in the Advanced Tab. · Agressive Mode: Enables faster tunnel creation/operation as fewer messages are exchanged between peers. a FQDN or an e-mail address. The defaut values are: Proposals · Phase One · Encryption: Options are 3DES or AES (128 bit encryption) · Authentication: MD5 or SHA1 · SA Lifetime: 8 hours to 24 hours · DH Group: Options are Group2 (1024bit) or Group5 (1536bit) · Phase Two · Encryption: Options are 3DES or AES (128 bit encryption) · Authentication: MD5 or SHA1 · SA Lifetime: 1 hour to 8 hours · DH Group: Options are Group2 (1024bit) or Group5 (1536bit) · Perfect Forward Secrecy: provides additional security by preserving the security of your old encrypted data even with the private key compromised. alternatively an IP Address. To let you fine tune them. Critical Links.1. button exists in each of the four configurable sections. usually set to on.. alternatively an IP Address. avoiding aggressive mode should be preferred when possible.1.70 edgeBOX 5.. Please note: edgeBOX supports only AES-128. This tab shows you an overview of your current options.

VPN 71 Tunnel Access Control · Incoming Access: list or rules specifying whether your hosts are. you can grant or revoke access to services running on the edgeBOX for hosts in the remote network. you can review and change your PPTP configuration.. and .. 5... · Connected Users: a table where each connected user is listed as well as the IP address of the Critical Links. visible to remote hosts over the tunnel. Inc. A short overview is provided: · Remote Users are authenticated by the: local authentication service or remote RADIUS server · IP Addresses are dynamically assigned between . This allows remote users to access the internal network from anywhere on the Internet. · Outgoing Access: list of rules blocking access of your hosts to the remote network. PPTP tunnel connecting a host to a private network In the PPTP menu. or aren't. by default all hosts in the network will be able to use the tunnel. Allowed Services · this add/remove service list provides the means by which edgeBOX services allowed/denied through the tunnel. . VPN section.2 PPTP PPTP is used to establish VPN tunnels across the Internet.

Please review that option if you loose access to the Internet. No additional configuration is needed. the Port and Password for the RADIUS server. You should keep in mind that edgeBOX manages all users permissions around the concept of Privileges. Critical Links.2. IP Address Assignment These two fields allow you to set the IP address range which will be assigned to clients connecting through PPTP..trying to establish a PPTP connection . The address range should not overlap the DHCP range. · Authenticate the remote users using a remote RADIUS server: type the IP Address. you will not be able to access the Internet via the PPTP connection. Inc. This is because it makes more sense to access the internet via your local network. Click the Change..is or is not allowed to do it depends solely on the Privileges defined for that user. such as RADIUS user creation.72 edgeBOX 5. . go to the VPN section PPTP menu and click Change. You'll need to specify configurations for: User Authentication · Authenticate the remote users using the local authentication service: selecting this option means that the authentication will be performed by edgeBOX. When using PPTP with the (local PC) default remote gateway option checked (connection TCP/ IP options). Related Topics: · Privileges 5. and the time at which the connection was established. Access to PPTP is one of those features. nor should any static IP addresses in this range be defined...1 PPTP Properties To change the PPTP properties. Authorization for PPTP VPN use is configured in the User Management panel. button to edit these settings.0 Help client machine from where the connection was established. which reduces edgeBOX traffic and encryption overheads. The process by which edgeBOX determines if a given user ..

. Click the Change. L2TP menu. Access Privileges using remote RADIUS authentication If you want PPTP users to authenticate in a remote RADIUS server instead of the edgeBOX.VPN 73 Please read on. Related Topics: · Privileges 5. Inc.3 L2TP Layer Two Tunneling Protocol (L2TP) is an extension of the Point-to-Point Tunneling Protocol (PPTP) used by Internet service providers to enable the operation of a virtual private network (VPN) over the Internet. with access to the network services based on the profile policies he belongs to. the privileges the user has are related to the access profile the user belongs to. . Else. so you don't need to create the users in the edgeBOX.. If you need to configure L2TP go to the VPN section. Access Priviliges using Local Authentication When a user accesses the network using a PPTP connection. A quick overview is provided stating the current tunnel status. which is the password for the Critical Links. Please provide: · Server IP: IP address of server · Username: Username on the server used for authentication · Password: Password on the server used for authentication. the user will have no access privileges at all besides the specific access rules defined in the Access Profile's Destination Access Policies list. If the profile of the user has the Allow full access to LAN from PPTP connections option switched on then the user will have access to the LAN as if he was a regular LAN user. edgeBOX verifies the access rules defined on the profile of the user to determine access to the LAN and VLANs. PPTP users that authenticate in a remote RADIUS server will always belong to the 'Default' access profile as it is impossible for the edgeBOX to know who they are. button. then all the process is made in the Remote Server.

0 Help above username · PSK: Pre-Shared secret key (must match the one on the server) · Keep Connection Alive: Polls the server to maintain the connection At the end make sure the L2TP service is running. Critical Links. Inc. Encryption/Privacy should be provided by higher protocol layers and/or applications.74 edgeBOX 5. . Note: L2TP is not encrypted but simply allows the tunnel connectivity.

Internal Connections. Blocking. prevents internal users from accessing edgeBOX's ftp service but still allows users to ftp. allows or blocks access to that service on the edgeBOX. If you wish to block user's connections to other servers besides edgeBOX then you should look at the user Privileges section. Inc. SPI NAT and Port-Forward Website Access Restrictions Anti Virus Engines Shared Folders Scanning Mail Scanner 6. Related Topics: · Services Critical Links. There you can: · Apply Firewall settings for connections coming from the Internet and the DMZ · Adjust firewall blocking rules for Internal Connections · Fine tune your Firewall using Advanced Firewall Rules If you do not activate the Firewall service edgeBOX will be working in pure router mode – all services will be available. Advanced Firewall. Go to the Firewall menu in the Security section. to outside servers. Enabling or disabling a service. ftp.1 Firewall Configuring the Firewall is an important aspect in the global security of your network. through the firewall.Security 75 6 Security This section allows you to review and change Security related settings such as: · · · · · · Firewall: WAN and DMZ service access. for example. . your network services and your users.

. A new dialog window will popup. Then. you gain access to a configuration panel that allows you to specify edgeBOX services that can not be accessed from the LAN and VLANs. Press Save in the end. if the SNMP service is listed you need to remove it from the list (if not listed you're done here). Inc. · Connections allowed coming from the DMZ: connections originating in the DMZ directed at edgeBOX will be allowed if listed.76 edgeBOX 5. Click it and click the Remove button. Please note that the services you add to this list will be unreachable from the LAN and VLANs (in the Internet and DMZ panel the rule logic was the oposite: to allow connections. any connections coming from the Internet to the SNMP service are unallowed. Firewall menu. . Click Save. This panel allows you to review and manage your Firewall configuration. By default.. Just Add and Remove items from the list. In this new dialog please select the sub-panel you wish: · Internet (WAN).0 Help · Privileges 6. 6.1.1 Securing the Internet and DMZ links The operation of your Firewall can be managed in the Security section. That's it: starting now. See an example: If you wish to block any connections to your SNMP agent that originate in the Internet. and use the Add and Remove buttons to edit the allowed services list according to your needs (note that managing the firewall is only allowed if the service is running). Critical Links. or · DMZ Network.. The interface is similar.. To add or remove a service from these lists click the Change. button and select the Internet tab.2 Securing Internal Connections Clicking Internal Connections. You need to press the Change. button.. the Firewall service is running and most services are forbidden from the outside: only Webadmin (https management) and Ping are allowed. This menu shows you two horizontal panels: · Connections allowed coming from the Internet: connections originating in the Internet directed at edgeBOX will be allowed if listed..1. here the rule is "services added here are unallowed"). after installation.

.... This is actually an increase in network security because you increase the ability of the firewall to determine if a packet is or is not supposed to be allowed in. link in the Network -> Firewall menu. Configure: · Inbound Rules / Outbound Rules: to manage rules in each traffic direction. The order by which rules will be verified can be changed with the Up and Down buttons. . You can have distinct a Default Rule and a diferent SPI setting for each traffic direction. existing rules. Even if you don't activate the User Authentication service you can manage which services your users have access to. to learn more see Wikipedia Stateful Firewall. or Delete.. you can explicitly allow/ deny incoming/outgoing traffic based on the source. no matter what configurations you might add somewhere else. destination and protocol. rules and Edit. Now you need to add or edit rules.. 6. Rules You can create New.1. · Stateful Packet Inspection: keep track of the state of incoming/outgoing network connections (analyse packets in packet context and in connection context). How do I fine tune and manage connections that originate in the internal network ? This is an important topic when configuring your edgeBOX.. how can it be usefull for me ? A Statefull firewall raises the level of network security obtained because only packets matching a known connection state will be allowed by the firewall.. You need to keep in mind that edgeBOX supports extensive mechanisms for granting and controlling Users and their Privileges. But if that is the case you can use the Advanced Rules. Inc.Security 77 Services added to the Internal Connections. Check the Use Advanced Firewall Rules option to activate the rules panel.3 Using Advanced Firewall Rules In most situations you should not need to add extra firewall rules. For each rule. Please refer to the Users section for detailed information.. a wizard-like sequence of dialogs will guide you through the creation/edition of your advanced firewall rules: Critical Links. (blocking) list will be blocked to the LAN and VLAN users. · Default Rule: click Allow or Deny to determine the default rule to be applied when no rule matches (a Red/Green icon will toggle indicating the current default rule). others will be rejected. Using this..

0/24 from sending any kind of e-mail through SMTP. This is how you'dd do it: Step 1 Block TCP port 25. Device. · To location: Any. Critical Links. Device (connections that originate in a specific IP Address). Inc. Step 2: Source and destination · From location: Any (connections that originate anywhere). 500-600). Step 2 From: Any To: Device (that specific host IP Address).255. TCP (you can choose All destination ports or specify individual ports or even port ranges like 21. UDP (same as TCP) and ICMP.. Network.0 Help Step 1: Action and connection type · Allow/Block connections: choose if this rule is to Allow something or to Deny something. RFC 1918 determines that "because private addresses have no global meaning. So edgeBOX's default behaviour is not to block routing of incoming or outgoing packets based on the nature . Network (connections that originate in a specific segment. Step 3 name it forbidden.of WAN segment. 22. Step 3: Name and Summary · Name: a suggestive name for this rule. To Any.0. you might wish to deny any kind of access to a specific host: Step 1 you'dd need to Block All.2.3. ..78 edgeBOX 5.0/255.255. and packets with private source or destination addresses should not be forwarded across such links". Private Network Routing. edgeBOX can have it's WAN interface attached to a public or private IP segment.2. menu.. Step 3 Name nosmtp123. Step 2 From Network 1. as specified by an IP Address and a Netmask) and edgeBOX (connections originating in edgeBOX it self).. Due to the fact that edgeBOX is designed to operate in a variety of network configurations.public or private . If you need to implement such behaviour you should add specific firewall rules in the Advanced Rules. Show me an example Lets imagine you need to prevent all computers from IP segment 1. routing information about private networks shall not be propagated on inter-enterprise links. edgeBOX (connections directed at this edgeBOX it self). On the other hand.3. 80. · Summary: at the end. · Connection Type: All. an overview of the rule.

. you may specify a port range to which access will be granted · Protocol: The specific protocol to which access will be granted. ICMP and ALL. via appropriate rules. After checking this option you will need to create rules to grant access to hosts residing in this subnetwork. The rules are shown in a table which can be modified with the following options: New.2 Setting up a DMZ A DMZ is a small sub-network that sits between a trusted internal network (for example. Next. is being appropriately routed to edgeBOX. UDP. but cannot access the trusted network. this kind of networks is used to house Internet servers (web servers. this range will be a public range.Security 79 6. you will have to explicitly grant access to hosts residing in it. and so your ISP must provide routing to it). A new DMZ rule is set up this way: · Destination IP: The host/range to which access will be granted. a Corporate internal network) and an untrusted external network (such as the Internet). Choices available are TCP. Although this address space is accessible from the external network. Make sure you configure an appropriate address range for the DMZ interface. DNS servers. This kind of network is used as a buffer between the two networks: hosts placed in this network are accessible either from trusted and untrusted networks. Edit and Delete. To: if you select this option. Enabling your DMZ Go to the DMZ menu in the Security section. Usually. e-mail servers). · From. · Netmask: The netmask to be used. .. · Port: If you select this option. This interface is configured with an IP address range accessible from the external network (in case the external network is the Internet. you will need to specify the single port to which access will be granted. As usual you can start and stop the service on top. and that traffic with this subnetwork as its destination. Related Topics: · DMZ Traffic Critical Links. Inc. we will show the options available for configuring a DMZ.

LAN or VLAN) 3.3 Enabling NAT for the private networks In the NAT menu.80 edgeBOX 5. by NAT'ing their IP addresses on the WAN segment. You can use Port Forwarding from the Internet (WAN interface) to your local network or from the DMZ to you local network. you are actually providing the means for the hosts on the 10. What is Port Forwarding? Critical Links. All requests made from internal hosts are seen by the external networks as being made by edgeBOX which then translates back the response packets' destination addresses to the originating internal host NAT is by default enabled on the edgeBOX.255.4 Using Port Forwarding You can find edgeBOX's Port Forwarding functionality in the Port Forwarding table of the NAT menu. by default. Configure NAT on an internal network To configure NAT on an internal network: 1. you can view and change NAT settings for your network. Type the IP address and the Netmask of the network for wich you want to have NAT working (most likely it's one of your internal networks. Use the Drop-Down list to select the interface used to reach the network you just indicated.0/255.. it is already configured for the LAN and for each of the VLANs. Also. Click the New button and a dialog window will appear 2. without needed to configure anything. .0 for Network IP/Netmask and WAN for the Interface. you are able to use private addresses in your internal network.0 Help 6. If you use 10. in the Security section. So you can connect to outer networks from the computers of your network immediately.10. What is NAT ? NAT (Network Address Translation) translates the private IP addresses of computers in your internal networks to a single public IP address.10. Inc. so that the computers can connect to outer networks like the Internet and have access to several services.10.. Security section.10. With NAT.x IP segment to have access to the Internet or any other external network accessible through the WAN interface. Show me an example. 6.255.

. Also.Security 81 Port forwarding allows remote computers (e. To configure this service just point your browser to the Security section. like a web service or an e-mail service. · Internal Settings · Internal IP:address (in your local network) of the computer that is running the service you want to make available. Filtering can be performed on either domain names or by checking URLs for certain keywords.g. · External Settings · Single Port: to indicate the external Port visible in the interface chosen or. 6. Inc. as if it was running on edgeBOX itself. from that IP address.5 Website Access Restrictions The edgeBOX provides a web page filtering service that can be used to block access to web sites. · Range of Ports: to indicate the start and end ports of the Range of external ports. you can make a service run on an internal host visible to the outside world. This is because Premium bandwidth HTTP traffic bypasses edgeBOX's Proxy. where the traffic will be forwarded to. · Single Port: to indicate the internal port. alsonote that HTTP traffic that is configured to use Premium bandwidth cannot be blocked. public machines on the Internet) to transparently connect to a specific computer within your private networks so they can use services that your computer shares. Add a port/service to Port Forward To make one or more internal services available to external networks click the New button to create a new entry in the Port Forwarding table. Please specify: · Interface: choose the interface where you want to make the port forward available ( WAN or DMZ). A new dialog will appear. Note: The web filtering service only blocks words in URL and domains in HTTP (port 80) traffic. HTTPS and FTP traffic can not be checked. · Range of Ports: to use the same range of ports that was chosen in External Settings (this option is only available if you have selected Range of Ports in External Settings). With port forwarding. Website Restrictions Critical Links. HTTP traffic that has QoS rules defined in the QoS Services panel cannot be blocked either.

pt) Note: There is no space before or after the | character Blocks.example.com'.com' will match 'example.5. www.net (eg www. for example.82 edgeBOX 5./] *\.ttdoggy.mylocal..com' or 'old.com' and 'test.. A domain preceded by a dot will match that domain and all subdomains.net [-.example. For example './]dog[-. it will match 'test. button you should choose the type of file you are uploading: · Domains list to be denied · Words-in-URL list to be denied After uploading any file you should enable/disable their usage by clicking the Enable/Disable buttons according to your needs.catty. if you specify test.regular-expressions. or can contain regex expressions To find out more information about Regex exprssions.school.com/help'. Each line in the file may be a domain to deny. Critical Links.(exe|bat) Block anything.exe or www.bad.com' as well as 'new.1 Domains File Format The format of the uploaded file is one entry per line.pt/download/file. visit: http://www.verbad. the following rules apply: A single domain will match all urls under that domain and is case-insensitive As an example./] [-. Inc.com) Blocks domains containing the word dog or cat (eg www.net) Blocks domains containing the word dog (eg www. Clicking the New.0 Help menu./](dog|cat) [-. com'. .com/getit.info Some one-line examples for the domain file are: .net or https://www.example.bat When adding a domain to the file. 6.

if you specify 'goo'. Sophos. Click Change. To perform the installation and configuration of Anti Virus engines and update their IDE files. McAfee and ClamAV. The Install dialog will require you to select the appropriate file from your computer. which contains the word GoO (recall that the word lists are not case sensitive). Currently the supported Anti Virus engines are: Sophos.com and www. Inc. Related Topics: · E-Mail server 6. and specify: Schedule Critical Links.5. edgeBOX is not shipped with the Sophos or the McAfee Anti Virus engines installed. and then click the Anti Virus Engines link.7 Scanning Shared Folders for viruses The Shared Folders Scanning menu in the Security section allows you to configure the shares scanner. either completely or as a substring. When adding a word to the file.Security 83 6. A summary of the configuration is displayed. so you will have to buy the appropriate number of licenses to use and upload them to edgeBOX.6 Install and Manage Anti Virus Engines Currently. McAfee and Clamav.myinfo.. click the Mail Scanner menu. as both URL's contain the word goo. Select the desired Anti Virus engine and hit the Install or Update button.2 Words in URL File Format The format of the uploaded file is one entry per line. in the Related Topics list.pt/ToGoOver/help. it will match 'google. . navigate to the Security section. the following rules apply: A single word will match all urls which contain that word.. It matches the second URL as it contains ToGoOver. support is available for three Anti Virus engines. The rest of the task will be automatic. As an example. 6.

.8 Scanning E-Mail for Viruses In the Security section you'll find the Mail Scanner configuration menu. Advanced Configuration To access further Anti Virus operation details click the Advanced Configuration..84 edgeBOX 5..0 Help · Scan every day at: choose the time of day for the operation. Actions · Delete infected files found · Delete infected files and send me an e-mail notification · Don't delete infected files. McAfee or ClamAV (Sophos and McAfee engines are not shipped with edgeBOX. Basic Configuration Please select whether or not e-mail should be scanned for viruses. Inc. . If so. unless they are installed) · Also scan files when they are placed inside the shared folders (this option is only available for ClamAV). possible choices are Sophos. Just send me an e-mail notification Related Topics: · Anti Virus Engines · Windows Shared Folders 6. Click the Anti Virus tab. please specify: · Anti Virus engine: choose one form the list · Notify sender: for the sender of the message to be notified · Notify to the specified e-mail address: and type an e-mail address. button: · Messages: special options for detecting types of messages or scanning based on message Critical Links. · using: the Virus Scanning package to use.. button. Click the Configure. so these choices are not available from the dropdown.

it will not be done properly.allow messages where the body is stored in a remote server and not in the actual message. It will be up to the e-mail client to fetch the message body later. · Convert dangerous HTML to text . See more.allow messages to carry Object codebase tags. There is also a filter for faster search. · Allow form tags .Security 85 characteristics. · Allow external message bodies . Setting this option is particularly dangerous. This will give you access to the list of infected e-mail messages and their details. As the scan is not performed on the whole message but on its fragments.1 Messages Message characteristics · Allow partial messages . MailScanner never scans the message body so it may allow viruses into your network.allow messages to carry Form tags. decide to Forward the message(s).8. Critical Links. Quarantine If any e-mails were placed in quarantine you can inspect the by clicking View Quarantine. Inc. · Actions: for finer grained configuration of actions to be performed in case a virus is found. This is a good alternative to disallowing or leaving them untouched.enable the conversion of Iframe and Object codebase tags into plain text.allow messages to carry Iframe tags. at this point. . Setting this option is very dangerous as viruses may go undetected. · Allow object codebase tags . Related Topics: · Install and Manage Anti Virus Engines · Administrator e-mail address · System E-mail aliases · E-Mail Server 6. to Unblock it.allow messages that contain only a fraction of the attachments. to Delete it or to View Attachments. You can. · Allow iframe tags .

infected attached documents are automatically disinfected and sent to the original recipients. .enable blocking of encrypted messages.allow the delivery of Rich Text Format attachments produced by some versions of Microsoft Outlook that cannot be completely decoded at present.enable the conversion of all HTML tags into plain text. · Sign clean messages .0 Help · Convert HTML to text .8.2 Actions Possible Actions: · Deliver disinfected messages . 6. 6. its attachments appear on the list on the right.DAT file.messages that originally contained a silent virus are still delivered.8. for some reason had its attachments removed. Inc.86 edgeBOX 5.enable expanding of TNEF attachments that are joined in one WINMAIL.3 Quarantine View the incoming or outgoing e-mails that are put under quarantine (blocked) by edgeBOX because they may contain files with virus. · Include warning as attachment . Unblock a quarantined e-mail Critical Links. · Block unencrypted messages . · Mark unscanned messages . If you don’t check this option then the filenames within the TNEF attachments will not be checked. · Deliver unparsable TNEF . · Mark infected messages .include warnings for dangerous or infected attachments will as an attachment. · Expand TNEF .infected or dangerous attachments are stored in directories created under the quarantine directory. · Block encrypted messages . · Quarantine infections . If you expand an e-mail you will be able to see the sender and the receiver of the mail. If this option is not selected then the warnings will simply be included as inline text. even if the addresses were chosen at random by the infected PC and did not correspond to anything a user intended to send.mark every message that is not scanned by MailScanner. You can expand and browse through the folders to find the e-mails.If you check this option MailScanner will mark every infected message and every message that. If you select an e-mail. · Deliver silent viruses . The e-mails are grouped by date inside folders in the list on the left.enable blocking of unencrypted messages.make MailScanner sign every clean message processed.

Delete an e-mail 1. 3.9 Scanning E-Mail for SPAM E-mail can also be scanned for spam. If so. This way you can remove the files that are infected and then still deliver the e-mail to the receiver. involves nearly identical messages sent to numerous recipients by e-mail. Click the Unblock and then the Apply button. Select the e-mail from the e-mails list. . Inc. The e-mail will be sent to its original receiver. Click the Delete and then the Apply button. 4. also known as junk e-mail. Click the Configure. Select the e-mail to unblock from the e-mails list. then specify: · Also log spam-related events: this will make spam related activity to show up in the logs. A common synonym for spam is unsolicited bulk e-mail (UBE). A short summary is presented. This is particularly useful to remove virus from the e-mails without deleting the e-mail. Type in the e-mail address of the person you want to forward the e-mail to. Select the e-mail to delete from the e-mails list. Forward an e-mail to another person If you want to send a blocked e-mail to a different person than its original receiver: 1. 2. 2. Delete all attachments with viruses. button. You can also make operations to the attachments of the e-mails. Make sure you remove all infected files of an e-mail before you unblock it. Definitions of spam usually include the aspects that e-mail is unsolicited and sent in bulk. "UCE" refers specifically to unsolicited commercial e-mail. 2. Please choose if messages will or will not be filtered for SPAM.Security 87 To remove a blocked e-mail from quarantine and deliver it to its intended receiver: 1... Delete: The message is silently discarded. What is spam ? E-mail spam. Critical Links. Click Forward. A dialog window will appear. Spam usually confuses and annoys e-mail users. Click OK and then Apply to forward the e-mail. In the Security section you'll find the Mail Scanner configuration menu. 6. Click the Anti-Spam tab. · When spam is found: · · Deliver: The message is delivered to the recipient as normal.

What is an RBL server ? An RBL server.dsbl. At the time of this publication examples of hosts providing such lists are: list. contains lists of internet servers that are considered to SPAMers or abusers. Inc. See details in http://en.RBL). or DNSBL.org and bl.0 Help · Attachment: The original message is converted to the attachment of the message. .spamcop.88 edgeBOX 5.net. These lists are dynamic.wikipedia.org/wiki/DNSBL Related Topics: · Install and Manage Anti Virus Engines · E-mail Server Critical Links. · RBL servers: this feature allows you to have a anti-spam protection based on existing spammers' databases (The Realtime Blackhole List . After checking this option you will have to provide hosts serving these lists.

one or several .like edgeBOX's .Office Servers 89 7 Office Servers This section allows you to explore and configure several services that enable communication between the people and integration of software resources in your company/office. Click Change. To do this just hit the New button at the top of the Websites managed by edgeBOX list and follow the details. in the Office Servers section.websites and intranets · Setup your e-mail server and enable Webmail · Create Windows Shares for network file storage · Allow users to use edgeBOX attached Printers · Allow users to autonomously create public shared directories · Configure edgeBOX to act as a Windows PDC (Primary Domain Controller) 7..1 Manage your web sites and intranets Whether you need to bring up one or several web sites for you company or you want to configure a web-based intranet to propagate information throughout your company. Changing global settings The Web Server menu displays a short summary of the global settings. the default configured value is 150 which should me more then enough for the majority of situations.you can setup and deploy any amount of virtual Internet or Intranet http servers transparently. you can safely lower this value. . This important feature is usually referred to as Virtual Hosts: with a Virtual Hosts enabled web server .. Inc. Adding new Internet websites or web-based intranets edgeBOX's internal Web Server can simultaneously serve and manage several distinct and separately configurable virtual webservers... to alter this: · Maximum Accesses: the maximum amount of simultaneous connections the web server will allow before starting refusing new connections. Critical Links. these are all tasks for edgeBOX's Web Server. You may wish to: · Configure your company's .

for example. simply because the DNS name-to-IP translation can not be performed.1. with username jsmith. So.local. those pages will be located in the user's home directory.mydomain. just to remind you that an A or CNAME record needs to be added to the DNS for this setup to be complete..somedomain. 7. the FTP root directory will initially contain two directories ("intra" and "inter"). a DNS related warning may popup.com/users/jsmith · Webmaster account: this option allows you to change the password for user 'webmaster'. note well: you have just entered a name for a host. This account is initially disabled so you will have to set a password in order to use it.1 Setting up multiple websites This panel allows you to configure one or several HTTP Virtual Hosts..com.com. then Mr. so. · Personal Webpages: check the box if users will be allowed to have personal web pages.somedomain. but more may be created. the user will be able to manage their personal webpage through FTP – after logging on.. if your domain is local. · Website URL: the name of this virtual host such as mycompany. no one will be able to reach this website.loc. edgeBOX will either create an appropriate DNS host entry for the domain.somedomain. under the public_html directory. and you add a virtual host for docs. if the main URL is http://edgeBOX. then you need to a DNS entry for host docs pointing to edgeBOX’s IP Address. How do I access my personal page ? Let's assume user John Smith. The user's personal webpage URL will be formed from the concatenation of: · the main edgeBOX http URL + "~jsmith". Critical Links. or edegBOX must translate it. .0 Help unless you plan to setup several web sites and expect to have considerable amount of traffic for all of them. either this name is translated to IP in the outside world.. Inc. Smith's webpage will be accessible at: · http://yourcompany. keep in mind that your Webmail users will lose access to the Webmail.com/~jsmith or · http://yourcompany.loc. if so. Please note: the Webmail service depends on the Webserver. if you stop the Webserver. in this case. they will automatically be placed in their directory. . the 'webmaster' has FTP access and owns the directory tree for the Intranet and Internet websites. corresponding to these websites. or remind you that you will need to create one manually.90 edgeBOX 5. or · the main edgeBOX http URL + "users/jsmith". Otherwise.

168.100. png images.. the administrator will be informed that the DNS entry needs to be added manually on the system which is hosting the domain.Office Servers 91 If the domain for the new web server entry does not exist: · and the edgeBOX is not the master domain.100. or if it will be globally available. · Files Location: where this website's files (html pages..168. and Remove buttons to manage the list of redirection URLs. it will send the request to the proxy (as nominated in the URL field) and add the path (if there is one) to the request. For example. which is the filesystem directory where the webmaste user will be placed after logging on through FTP. this dir will be located under /home/wwwhost. · The files are not stored locally: this option enables you to setup a web site by aggregating several other sites solely by using redirection of requests. type the username. will actually. · Additional redirect requests: use the Add. if someone tries to load an non- Critical Links. if the edgeBOX receives a request for the proxy domain.com/support will be redirected from the virtual host to the proxy at http://192.7/ and url=http://192.clk. Edit. the webmaster must now access edgeBOX using FTP and transfer the website's files into the correct directory...7/. the webmaster password must be activated before the account is created. all URLs accessible on this site. options are: · In the public_html directory: of a given user. if Path=/support/4. be redirected to other URLs that you specify in the table below.150. · and the edgeBOX is the master domain. · Internal Website: if this website is only accessible internally (like an Intranet). .. please refer to Webmaster Account in the previous section. The DNS entry will only be created if the above condition exists and if the condition shown in the following table is true: Internal Website DNS Domain Access = Internal Yes (LAN IP) Yes DNS Domain Access = External No Yes (WAN IP) Yes No DNS host information will not automatically be deleted when the web server host is deleted. then the new host for that domain will be added to the DNS domain and the administrator will be informed via a popup.150/support/4. other) will be stored. Inc. a request to the edgeBOX for www. · Webmaster E-mail: the optional webmaster e-mail address. this website will correspond exactly to the given user's personal webpage. · In the directory: just type-in the name of a directory to store this site's files (if it does not exist it will be created).

or other reasons) are queued in edgeBOX's e-mail server awaiting delivery.0 Help existent URL. Inc. please note that the process of attempting delivery may take some time.2. for example. · Add your own aliases and manage simple mailing lists. 7. a warning page will be return with this e-mail address as footnote just in case the person wishes to get in contact.92 edgeBOX 5. despite edgeBOX tries to deliver all incoming and outgoing e-mails in queue every 10 minutes. · Configure other settings and permissions like relay control and message size. · Enable and Disable Webmail. please be sure to reload this panel after some seconds or minutes (especially if there are many messages to be processes in the queue). Critical Links. for some reason (destination SMTP server temporarily unreachable.1 E-mail Queue Choose the Queue tab. this options allows you to perform such attempt immediately. deliver. in the end some messages may still remain undeliverable.2 E-mail Server and Webmail Please refer to the E-mail server menu in the Office Servers section if you need to: · Review. The table presented shows you the queue of incoming and outgoing e-mails that edgeBOX e-mail server is processing at the present moment and also e-mails that. forward or delete e-mails currently in queue. . you can forward queued e-mails to another receiver. · Add new e-mail domains. so. You can: · Deliver All: a delivery operation will immediately be attempted. this can be useful when. · Forward: click the Forward button after selecting an e-mail. Related Topics: · Scanning E-mail for Viruses · Scanning E-mail for SPAM 7. an e-mail is blocked in queue because its destination e-mail is invalid.Office Servers section. in the E-mail Server menu .

Office Servers section. From. Just hit the New button and enter the desired domain. keep in mind that your Webmail users will lose access to their e-mail.mybusiness. in the E-mail Server menu . Date.com and · @spin-off.mybusiness.. Inc. Subject. · Delete: to delete an e-mail.com. directed at edgeBOX's users. for any of the domains specified. . · Domain: choose the domain for which webmail will be accessible. you may edit the aliases' list. To. You can add as many domains as you wish. 7. edgeBOX will accept e-mail. This topic is not related to domain relaying: see Access Control for details on relaying. To specify the webmail domain click the Change.Office Servers section.2 E-mail domains and Webmail Choose the Domains tab. check Web Mail. button and: · Enable webmail for the specified domain: check this if you wish to have enable webmail.. uncheck if you dont want webmail.2. For details on using and accessing the webmail functionality. that the Web Server must be running to access Webmail. in the E-mail Server menu . Webmail Only one domain may be a Webmail domain. In this panel. so. Domains E-mail domains let you configure more than one virtual e-mail server for your company.2.Office Servers 93 · View Message: click the View Message button after selecting a message to get the details. For example you could receive e-mails being sent to: · @mother-house. Size and Status. 7. E-mail aliases allow forwarding of e-mail to alternative e-mail recipients Critical Links. if you stop the Webserver. Also note.3 Aliases and Mailing Lists Choose the Domains tab.

. Office Severs section. The details are: Critical Links. hit the Add button. Starting now. Smith has determined that all e-mails requesting help will also be received by the guys at Nice&Clean. The panel shows you summarized information as a quick overview. E-mail Server menu. Mr.. You can choose to redirect e-mail for these aliases to another user.94 edgeBOX 5. Smith and to the people at Nice&Clean. Creating a simple mailing list Following the above example. Just hit the New button and enter: · Alias: type-in the new alias help-24-7. so that they receive the messages. type wecanfixit@niceandclean. All e-mails sent to help-24-7 will actually be received by Mr.com in the text field. Inc. button. · E-mail addresses that will receive the messages: click Add and type jsmith. Inc. hit the Edit button and. 7.4 Settings and Permissions Choosing the Settings and Permissions tab. . in the popup. That's it. Smith instead (the help-24-7 account doesn't actually exist: it's an alias). All you have to do is: select the help-24-7 / jsmith entry in the aliases table. all e-mails sent to the help-24-7 alias will be delivered to Mr.2. Creating a simple e-mail alias Lets imagine edgeBOX user jsmith is actually the person in charge of maintenance in your company. let's say your company has hired the services of an external maintenance company called Nice&Clean. This table has some predefined aliases related with management that can not be deleted. forward e-mail to another host or create mailing lists. You can create an e-mail alias for the maintenance service called help-24-7. Save all in the end.0 Help With this element you can provide alternate names for individual users. Server Settings To change any of these hit the corresponding Change. you gain access to some advanced configuration options for your E-mail server and users.

from a distinct server. check the box and enter the value you need. your network users will typically interact directly (Webmail. despite the e-mail will be received. if you choose a different host for storing e-mail. in an example situation. Click the Change.Office Servers 95 · Connections Limit: the maximum number of simultaneous connections. · Whether users can send e-mail to external domains from outside (relay support). domain. · Keep original e-mail envelope address: check this if you wish that the domain name. · Check the box if the SmartHost requires Authentication and type the Username and Password. button and follow the details here. if you choose to Save e-mail data in an external server. you can change this. depending on your specific needs you might wish to limit the message size to. above this value. connections will be rejected. Inc. some ISPs block outgoing e-mail traffic and require their users to send out all e-mail through the ISP's e-mail server: that server will be the SmartHost for edgeBOX. SMTP. imap) with the storage server instead of edgeBOX. edgeBOX will initially accept e-mail directed at any of it's e-mail domains and them forward those messages to the e-mail storage server. · SmartHost server: A SmartHost is an e-mail server through which outgoing e-mail is relayed: that host will actually perform delivery to the final destination e-mail server. to which the e-mail was originally sent. say. the default setting is None.. by the user... You can also create advanced access control rules based on host. please specify: · Hostname/IP: the hostname or IP Address of such server. pop. just check the Send messages through a SmartHost box and enter: · Hostname/IP: the hostname or IP Address of the SmartHost. instead of edgeBOX. E-mail permissions A short overview is presented: · Whether users can send e-mail to external domains from within the local network. the default value is Unlimited. · Message Size Limit: e-mail messages with size greater than this value are not accepted.. check the box and enter the value you need. the default setting is Unlimited. 10 MB or 50MB. be preserved. · Storage Location: by default e-mail will be stored in edgeBOX. · Whether e-mail from unresolvable domains is or is not to be accepted. sender and receiver. Critical Links. to change this. these are typical values. .

this setting is particularly useful for users who are connecting from external networks (while traveling for example) and for which we want to allow relaying.0 segment). check the box if you want to: · Accept e-mail from unresolvable domains. the e-mail's origin can not be verified. but some users travel and connect from other places and you want to let those users send (relay) e-mail through your server: whenever someone logs in via pop3. n ormally you only permit e-mails to be relayed (sent) from within your own network.1 for a 10. button..ex. You'll get two lists: · Accept or Reject e-mails based on the connection · Choose action: Accept e-mails. for security reasons the default behaviour is not to accept.0 Help 7. or 192.96 edgeBOX 5.1 SMTP Access Control Choosing the Settings and Permissions tab on the E-mail Server menu . 10. Critical Links. and select source: · From specific domain: type-in the domain to which this rule applies.1.0/255.Office Severs section you can click the Change. Accept and relay e-mails. criticallinks. the server notes the IP address from which the connection was made.. this a time limited authorisation.2.4. and permits relay from the IP for a limited period. Inc. . Hit the Change.com · From specific subnet: type-in the first 2 or 3 fields of the subnet address (p. as it will expire some time later. Advanced Permissions Allows further refinement of acceptance/denial rules for incoming e-mail based on domains. senders and receivers. E-mail to external domains Check the corresponding box if you want to: · Allow users to send e-mail to external domains from within the local network · Allow users to send e-mail to external domains from within outside (relay support): by checking this option you are allowing relay to users authenticated while reading e-mail through pop3 (usually referred to as pop-before-smtp).100.0. IP addresses.100 for a 192.. p.168.ex. this technique is widely used by spammers.0/16 segment.168.255.255.. Reject e-mails. button in the E-mail Permission area: Unresolvable Domains When a sender domain can't be resolved.

personal webpage) in edgeBOX much simpler and intuitive (this setting is not represented in the panel summary). · Accept or Reject e-mails based on the sender/receiver · Choose action: Accept e-mails or Reject e-mails. you may use wildcards (“*”). edgeBOX may also act as a Primary Domain Controller (PDC) and WINS server. edgeBOX can actually be the network's Primary Domain Controller or edgeBOX can just act as a Workgroup computer. 7. · Coming From / Going To: select and type the e-mail address to which this rule applies.3 Windows Server edgeBOX can interact with other hosts in your network just as if it was a regular Windows server. Inc. When edgeBOX acts as a PDC and Roaming Profiles are enabled. . a) users' desktop preferences can stored in edgeBOX and b) their home directory can be mapped to windows network drive Z: automatically. If a given domain is listed. You should use the Critical Links. all sub domains will also be included in the rule. The panel displayed shows you a summary of the current configuration.Office Servers 97 · From specific e-mail address: type-in the sender e-mail address to which this rule applies. this makes the task of accessing their files (ex: documents. Besides the usual file/folder sharing and printer sharing services. Learn more. To set this up point to the Windows Server menu in the Office Servers section of edgeBOX's web based administration interface: Primary Domain Controller / Workgroup You have two main options for the behaviour of edgeBOX as part of the Windows network.. With the Advanced Settings you could come up with complex rule sets to meet very specific situations. Note: When entering a value (eg the address or IP). If edgeBOX is configured to belong to some workgroup it will be visible and accessible to other Windows Workgroup hosts..

. button to alter this behaviour or change any of the settings: · edgeBOX is the Primary Domain Controller of the Network. this is the Workgroup name that all computers on the network should use to associate to the Workgroup. those users will still be able to login in that computer even if you remove the computer from the popup list.. If a given computer has been added to the edgeBOX domain and some users have successfully logged-in the domain from that computer. in this case the settings are: · Domain Name: enter the desired Workgroup Name.98 edgeBOX 5. This happens because the trust relationship is still valid between the users and that machine. the host will download the user's Desktop preferences from edgeBOX. More details. · store the user's Desktop preferences on the edgeBOX: · when logging into the Domain. it's created and managed automatically by edgeBOX and displayed in the initial panel for your convenience. · Click the Computers of the domain link to review the workgroup computers currently connected. and · the users will have their home directory mapped onto drive Z: (if you choose not to select this option the user's home directory will still be available but not automatically mapped onto a drive). · edgeBOX Description: enter a descriptive string for easy identification of edgeBOX in the network. you should specify: · Workgroup Name: enter the desired Workgroup Name (all computers with the same Workgroup name will be associated to the same network group and so will edgeBOX). · PDC support is disabled.0 Help Change. How to add computers to the domain? See Appendix C. Inc.. In the popup you can: · hit the Update button if you need to search for new hosts entering the domain or · the Remove From Domain button if you need to remove a host currently loggedin. edgeBOX just belongs to the windows network. · Description: a descriptive identification string.. Critical Links. · Domain SSID: this setting is not available for configuration. .

What is WINS? WINS performs name registration and resolution.. are sub-divided into two major features: · Shares: shared network folders managed by the edgeBOX administrator. Options are: · Use edgeBOX as the WINS Server: edgeBOX will deal with all domain registration and resolution requests · Use a remote server as the WINS Server: if another WINS Server exists on your network and you wish edgeBOX to use it. Home Directories Access · If edgeBOX is not the PDC you can determine if you want or don't want users to be able to access their homes. Windows clients can query a WINS server directly. · If edgeBOX is the PDC.wikipedia. and check the Provide WINS Support box if you wish to activate WINS. .org/wiki/ Windows_Internet_Name_Service Click Change. with fine-grained control of permissions and ownerships. Critical Links. · Relay registration and resolution requests to the remote server: with this option checked edgeBOX will just send the response from the remote server back to the original client. thus resulting in an improvement in performance (the hosts don't need to process broadcast packets). 7. in the Office Servers section.Office Servers 99 WINS Support Provides the WINS service. Inc..4 Windows Shared Folders The Windows Shared Folders functions. To learn more http://en. use the Allow/Deny button to change this. users always have access to their home directories and the Allow/ Deny button is not available. instead of using the usual broadcast method. · Server IP Address: type-in the remote WINS Server IP Address.

Related Topics: · Shared Folders Scanning 7. blocked services list. otherwise no access to shares whatsoever will be possible (the Firewall settings are always superimposed on anything else). then none of this will be possible.4. . it's users will loose access to the Shares (the Privilege setting is always superimposed on the Share permissions). A list with currently active shared folders is presented. · your Firewall may also come into play here: if the Firewall rejects access to the Samba service. if it is listed you need to remove it. add more Shares. some users actually using that Privilege. · Description: a description string specifying any comment for further details (this will be visible only if the windows user selects the Details option when viewing his network resources) Critical Links. or change details. if you.100 edgeBOX 5. at any time.1 Shares To review the currently configured shares. disable the Samba service on any Privilege. otherwise the dialog windows for configuration of the Share will not show you any valid entries to add. Share Details · Share Name: type a name for the share. please make sure that the Samba service is not listed in the Internal Connections. This share is fully accessible to all users. if necessary. To add new Shares hit the New button . Inc. network shared folders freely created by your network users.. For your convenience edgeBOX is shipped with a pre-configured shared folder named Public. you must have at least one Privilege with access to the Samba service enabled and. · moreover.. it should be related to the contents or the purpose of the share.to edit an existing share the interface is similar: Please note: · the setup of a shared folder will require the choice of a network user for the role of Share Owner and you can pick up specific permissions for specific users or specific Privileges.0 Help · Temporary Shared Folders: temporary and size-limited. for this to be possible. go to the Windows Shared Folders menu in the Office Servers section.

Office Servers 101 · Owner: the share owner. · Disable Write access for regular users. Share Options · Inherit Owner: new Folders and Files will be owned by the share owner. in this case please hit the Specify Users Permissions... Administrators are users who have full control of a share.. · Hide Unreadable: do not show files users cannot read. · check the box if you do not wish to adjust permissions for specific users or Privileges.. · Inherit Permissions: new Folders and Files will always have the permissions defined in Share Permissions. How do I map/mount an edgeBOX Share onto a X: drive on my Windows desktop ? Related Topics: · Users · Privileges Critical Links. click the Select Owner. button to add or remove Administrators of this share. check the box if you want this restriction.. . Read access will depend on each user's permissions. button and follow the details here. this user will be the share owner (the role of the owner in a share will be clear ahead) Share Permissions · All users can access this Share: · uncheck the box if you wish to adjust permissions on this share to specific users and/ or Privileges. button and pick-up a user from the list.. Only the Owner and the Administrators will be able to Write: other users will not be able to write on the Share. Administrators · Select Administrators.. Inc..

. for the ones selected. when a new Privilege is created users in that Privilege will have read access to all non-Public shares and Read-Write access to all Public shares. you get a list of Users and Privileges currently configured with permissions for this Share (please note the icons: Privileges are shown with a different icon than Users). the user may still have access to the Share. · Deny all access: to Deny All. His permissions will be defined by his Privilege permissions. leave always selected at least one deny or allow option when editing the permissions of a user or an access profile. in the Security tab of the shares properties window. specify: · Read only access to this share: to Allow Read. The popup dialog will let you choose among remaining Users and Privileges and. Otherwise Windows will remove the user or access profile from edgeBOX share permissions' list. If you remove a user from the list. Inc.1 Setup Share Permissions Setup Share Permissions By clicking the Specify Users Permissions. The details are: · User/Privilege: the name of the user or Privilege for which each permission applies. 7. On the other hand. · Write only access to this share: to Allow Write.1. If you remove a Privilege from the list.102 edgeBOX 5. · Allow Read: a green check icon indicates Read permission for this User/Privilege on this Share · Allow Write: a green check icon indicates Write permission for this User/Privilege on this Share · Deny All: a green check icon indicates no Read nor Write access will be allowed for this User/ Privilege on this Share. . selecting any of the entries and clicking the edit button or clicking the New button you can reconfigure permissions. · Read and Write access to this share: to Allow Read and Allow Write..0 Help If you change the properties of a shared folder using Windows XP or Windows Vista. Now. no user that belongs to that Privilege will be able to access the Share unless the user has a specific entry in the list.4. Please keep this in Critical Links.

button. · Status: Connected or Not Connected (if a printer is shared but not connected it will be displayed as Not Connected). maximum 240 minutes. The list displayed will show you your printer(s). all files and folders inside will be lost. the user will still only be able to read the share. · Maximum Number: the system will not allow the simultaneous existence of more than this maximum number of shared folders. If you want to use this feature please go to the Windows Shared Folders menu in the Office Servers section. These folders are deleted automatically after a while.Office Servers 103 mind when creating new Privileges. You might need to come back to this section and change these default settings. Note that these particular permissions do not override the general permissions of the Share. Check the Allow users to create temporary shared folders box.2 Temporary Shared Folders Enabling Temporary Shared Folders allows users to dynamically create network shared folders to share files when necessary. Inc.5 Windows Shared Printers Printer sharing is an easy task in edgeBOX. · Maximum Size: the folder is limited in size to this value..4. Simply connect the printer to one of edgeBOX's USB port (s). you can choose from 8 to 1024 MB. if the limit is reached users will have to wait for any of the folders to be automatically erased before they can create any more folders. click the corresponding Change.. 7. Ex. At the bottom. you can choose from 1 to 20 maximum simultaneous folders. Power-up the printer and go to the Windows Shared Printers menu in the Office Servers section. . minimum: 30 minutes. Critical Links. How does one create a shared folder ? 7. if you use the Disable Write Access for regular users option and you give a specific Write access. and set the values for: · Maximum Life Time: each folder will be automatically erased after this time. For each of them: · Name: the printer's manufacturer and model.

To stop sharing it hit the Unshare button. . just select it and press the Share button. Critical Links.104 edgeBOX 5. Please note that the Windows Server must be running for the shared printers to be accessible on the network. edgeBOX supports any printer supported by the Common Unix Printing System.0 Help · Share: Shared or Not Shared. To start sharing a printer. Inc.

including call conferences. and the automated conference rooms service. · Managing Call Queues: Queues are perfect for Customer Support and Sales Departments. If you're using PSTN voice cards (ISDN or Analog) you shall setup the country settings since it may impact on the voice quality because some parameters vary from country to country. and others. · Outgoing Call Rules . IVR. among others. The PBX allows for the integration of ordinary VoIP extensions with plain standard analogue or digital (ISDN) phone lines. · Incoming Call Rules . DISA. and those calls can't be always answered immediately then you should use queues. Critical Links. This is where you can define the route(s) and prefixes to use to make a call. Call parking number. Voicemail main number. parking and forwarding. type of call and time period. fallback to PSTN. voicemail. specific extensions. Those messages will be converted to (and from) phone calls. outgoing call rules apply. IVR and others. twinning. codecs. Here you can also organize your phones into groups for better organization and access policy definition. · Overview . Call recording rules and others. These tasks are accessible directly as main topics on the left menu of the UI's IP-PBX section. LCR. · Phones . · Advanced Setup Options: In this section you will find advanced setup options like Country. calls. Whenever you have a stream of customer calls to be answered. Here you can define the flow of every incoming call depending on caller (CallerID) and callee (DID) numbers and time schedule. Inc. Identified system warnings will also be displayed providing a quick way to identify and follow up on potential system problems.Understand your phone system deployment: In this section you can see the overall phone system logical scenario. You can also restrict access to calls based on dialed number. · Mailfax accounts: Mailfax provides a facility where you don't need an actual fax machine running in your company. like connections. incoming call rules apply. extensions and correspondent configurations like voicemail. The fax documents will be sent and received through e-mail messages. ACD. Tasks to configure your phone system To setup your VoIP system. The queue will place the calls in music-on-hold until an agent is available to answer the call. · Managing Conference Rooms: This is where you create and manage conferencing rooms.IP-PBX and VoIP 105 8 IP-PBX and VoIP edgeBOX IP-PBX provides all the telephony features a small business needs. You can divert the call to automated attendants.Defining Incoming Call Rules: Whenever the system receives a call from the outside world.Managing your phones: In this section is where you define and configure everything about the phones. configuration options are divided into categories having in mind the main tasks you need to perform.Defining Outgoing Call Rules: Every time a user makes a call to the outside world. phones. . together with the real time status of the phone system.

phones. edgeBOX supports SIP. IAX and Analog phones. twinning. In this section you can see a complete list of phone operations and default keycodes. 8. Understanding the IP-PBX Overview panel The picture below presents the main areas and the correspondent information contained in each one.1 IP-PBX Overview When you load the IP-PBX section in the webadmin interface you get an overview display where can see the overall phone system logical scenario. See below the pointers to how users can interact with the phone system: · Phone Operations: The most basic tool to use the phone system is of course the phone itself. and others. calls. together with the real time status of the phone system. park and others. · edgeDESKTOP: This is an application that provides a self-service operations for the end user. Allows the Operator to view the current status of the PBX and can use drag and drop functionality to make.0 Help Working with the phone system Having the phone system setup and running. Inc. calls add move calls to queues. . seamlessly integrated with the user's phone. Critical Links. All extensions and phone operations are available from the application's UI. like connections. · Flash Operator Panel: This is an application specifically for PBX receptionist/operator use. user's can start using it for daily work. Identified system warnings will also be displayed providing a quick way to identify and follow up on potential system problems. forward.106 edgeBOX 5. providing a number of keycode operations like transfer. for example.

Critical Links. icon behaviours and tooltip texts. Realtime Status Shows you realtime status in terms of: · Calls Status: the counts displayed show you the current usage intensity of several of your PBX features. the green/gray circles on the left show you the current administrative status of these services. n groups and k queues are currently configured. The IP-PBX Overview is composed of the following major sections: Configuration Displays a summary with your current configurations regarding: · Phones and Faxes: m Phones and n Fax Accounts are currently configured. Inc. · Services: status and operational details regarding the Authentication for Outgoing Calls and Autoconfiguration services. colors. . many of the values and labels displayed are actually hyperlinks to detailed information regarding the topic involved: clicking on them will load additional status panels and configuration menus concerning the topic clicked. Additionally. · PBX: m conferences.IP-PBX and VoIP 107 The IP-PBX Overview is refreshed every 30 seconds and gives you several useful informations in the form of values and labels.

Analog and ISDN phone extenxions · Use Phones Automatic Configuration Critical Links. 8. Depending on the specific characteristics of your setup. Point your browser at the Phones menu. Topics are separated in a task oriented approach. Inc. you may get only a subset of the picture. IAX. for each type of connection. Up to four lines are displayed linking edgeBOX to the four possible outside world voice connection types: · Remote Offices: SIP or IAX connections to other remote edgeBOX's. the following global colouring rules apply: · Line Color: green will tell you that at least one of the connections of each type is healthy and working as expected. through a trusted ISDN Line.2 Managing your phones This section brings together several aspects related to the manipulation and configuration of your phones and the corresponding edgeBOX features. · Public Telefony Network: connections to the PSTN through FXO interfaces.0 Help · Warnings: the warnings displayed help you diagnose the reds in the central synoptic. · Connections Status Icon: a green 'V' sign means everything is Ok. from which edgeBOX accepts calls as internal. in the IP-PBX section of edgeBOX's webadmin interface. gray will denote total failure or all connections bad. In any case.108 edgeBOX 5. . attempting to provide a quick grasp of their current operational status. · VoIP Providers: connections to VoIP service providers on the Internet. Synoptic The central synoptic of the IP-PBX Overview focuses on the connections of your IP-PBX to the outside world. these Warnings give you a little more insight onto what is not ok. From there you can acomplish the following goals: · Understanding the Phones list · Create SIP. the red 'X' and '!' icons displayed tell you that something is not Ok. · PBX: connections to other PBXs. a red exclamation mark '!' tells you something is wrong concerning those types of connections. BRI cards and others. a red 'X' tells you there is no connectivity whatsoever in that(those) connection(s).

This manual section helps you understand it fully as it may help you getting a quick overview of your phones status and also provide immediate detailed information regarding each of them. Data is refreshed every 30 seconds. If this extension is currently assigned to a Critical Links.IP-PBX and VoIP 109 · Create Groups of Phones and Manage Access control in bulk · Understand and Manage Twinning Related Topics: · Groups · Automatic Call Recording · Internal Dial Plan · Voice Lines · Network Users 8. The list is divided into six columns: Extension This column displays the extension's number and name.2. . colors and icon behaviours. this list may prove to be a useful diagnostic and overview tool for your installed VoIP infrastructure.1 Understanding the Phones list The Phones list in the IP-PBX section displays a considerable amount of information about all phones configured in edgeBOX. In conjunction with the Overview panel. Inc. The list provides information in the form of text labels.

indicating it's current connectivity status.0 Help specific user then it's username will be shown in shaded color below the number. OffHook. A Port number in case of analog phones. Show me a detailed example. Let us consider extension 1607 in the screenshot above. The extension's name is poly607 and it is not assigned to any specific user. there is no twinned phone at this moment. analog phones are identified with the ANALOG label. Ringing or Busy. IP / Port / MAC The phone's IP and MAC addresses. · Analog Phones: OnHook. · Forward (nnnn): Follow Me is active for this extension. calls are being forwarded to number nnnn. Configuration The Configuration column provides a quick summary of the most relevant configuration features currently active for each phone. · Twinning (nnnn): Twinning is enabled for this extension. Ringing or Busy. Status The Status shows you the current connectivity status and operational conditions of each phone. if known. A small green/ gray circle is displayed on the left. The information displayed depends on the type of phone: · IP Phones (SIP or IAX): Offline. . In some cases.110 edgeBOX 5. despite the feature is enabled.. this phone is twinned with the phone at number nnnn. other IP phones are simply identified by the VoIP (SIP) or VoIP(IAX) labels. a short status each of those features is added within parentheses: · Voicemail (m msgs): Voicemail is active for this phone and there are currently m new messages. Inc. Setup Mode The Setup column tells you if the phone is configured Automatically by edgeBOX or Manually by yourself.. · ISDN Phones: Up. The green circle at the left indicates the extension is online (meaning that edgeBOX can actually communicate with the phone over the Ethernet TCP/IP Critical Links. Online. Down. Ringing or Busy. Brand / Model The Brand and Model of supported IP Phones. if nnnn is missing then.

168. Contact your Reseller/Support before planning a ISDN Phones scenario.as displayed in the Status column.101.on a call or similar . The Configuration column tells you that this extension has Twinning and Voicemail configured.IP-PBX and VoIP 111 infrastructure). · Number: The number used to dial to the extension (like 2010). for any phone you want to connect to edgeBOX you need an account (extension) to register into. · ISDN: Used for ISDN phones. · Analog: Used for Analog phones and Fax machines. There are four different types of phone extensions supported: · SIP: Used for IP Phones compliant with the SIP protocol. Manual Config and Phone-to-Extension Assignment buttons please refer to the Automatic Configuration section of this manual. This requires hardware configuration.2.2 Creating phones Extensions in edgeBOX work like phone accounts. To use ISDN phones you need to have an ISDN card with ports configured in NT mode. Common properties among all phone types Independently of the phone type (SIP. Analog or ISDN) there's some information that is common among them. The Phone's Ethernet Hardware Address is 00:04:F2:18:D3:E6 as and it's currently assigned IP Address is 192. You can dial this name to call the extension. You need the analog card option in your edgeBOX with FXS ports. The Setup Mode is Automatic meaning edgeBOX will automatically configure this phone. · This extension can be called directly through incoming lines (Publish Extension): When checked means that this phone will be able to receive SIP URI calls. What are SIP URI calls? Critical Links. the name will be displayed at destination's extension. · IAX: Used for IP Phones compliant with the IAX2 protocol. the phone is currently Busy . The SIP protocol is the most widely available in IP phones. When you call from this extension. Inc. For details regarding the Synchronize. . Actually. IAX.199. The phone (or fax machine) is connected directly in one FXS ports in edgeBOX's back panel using a RJ11 cable. Follows a description of each one of them: · Name: This is the “friendly” name of extension (like John) and the login name for the VoIP account. The Brand / Model is the text displayed in the 3rd column: it's a Polycom IP phone. 8. There are three new messages in the Voicemail account. You need the ISDN BRI card option in your edgeBOX. The phone is connected directly in one of the ISDN BRI ports in edgeBOX's back panel using an ISDN cable.

are not associated with any user. You can enable or disable the ability of the user to have twinning..Extension Number: "1000".. Please follow the links below for details: · IP Phone extensions · Analog Phones and FAXes · ISDN Phone extensions Default configured phones edgeBOX comes with 3 already configured example phones. The phone "user" is associated with one of the example users that also exist by default. com or 2010@mycompany.com) instead of using a number. · Identification (Caller ID): The name and number by which calls will be identified to the called party. Related Topics: · Voice Lines · Groups · Automatic Call Recording · Network Users Critical Links. · Phone "desk" .0 Help SIP URI calls are calls made from IP SIP Phones using a URI (like john@mycompany. phone "desk" and phone "room". Extension PIN: "1010". Extension Password: "1010". Extension PIN: "1000". · Ring Duration: Time the extension will ring without being answered. More details about Voicemail. and by default is generated using the data introduced previously in the Name field. Extension Password: "1000". · Phone "room" . or handed over to the voicemail system if voicemail is active for the extension. For more details see Twinning. The other two phones. · Twinning: The twinning feature can be used with any phone type. Usually identifies the person using the extension. and to configure the number which will be used together with the extension.Extension Number: "1010". Extension Password: "1020". After this time the call will be finished automatically. · Voicemail: The voicemail settings are also common among all extension types. Inc. · Phone "user" . This field is placed in the advanced tab. . The fields you need to provide are the PIN number to access extension's voicemail account an e-mail address were edgeBOX will send notification about new voicemail messages.Extension Number: "1020".112 edgeBOX 5. Extension PIN: "1020".

IP-PBX and VoIP 113 8.2.2.1 SIP and IAX phone extensions SIP is the most widely available VoIP protocol in IP phones. Another protocol, called IAX is also supported by edgeBOX. Please navigate to the Phones menu in the IP-PBX section to create and manage SIP and IAX phones/extensions. Below you can find the most common operations regarding these types of IP phones. Quick steps to create a VoIP phone extension 1. Goto IP-PBX > Phones. 2. Click New, and select New SIP/IAX Phone. 3. Enter the number you want to assign in the Number field. This number will be used to dial to this extension. 4. Enter the name you want for your extension (like MeetingRoom) in the Name field. 5. Enter the password you want for this extension in the Password field, and repeat in Repeat Password field. When using Phone Auto-Configuration system in Callback mode for configuring phones, use numbers for the password instead of letters, it will be easier to enter when using the phone keypad. Phone Auto-Configuration applies only to SIP phones. 6. Click Add to save the phone settings. Only basic properties are mentioned above, those that are mandatory (an typically the the only ones you need), for a description of other properties see Common Properties and other Advanced Phone Properties below.

Configuring Codecs Codecs affect the quality and the bandwith consumption at the same time, higher quality means higher bandwidth consumption. In the Codecs tab of the new/edit VoIP phone extension dialog you can define the codecs allowed to be used by the phone using this extension. By default when you create a new VoIP extension G711 codecs are selected. As best practice use high quality codecs (like G711) for phones connected in the LAN, and low bandwith codecs (like GSM or G729) for phones connected in the WAN. This way you will provide high quality in your internal phones and avoid large Internet bandwith consumption by your external phones. You have to make sure that your phone is also configured to use the same audio codecs as the extension. For more information see Codecs.

Enabling Video Calls If you have a video enabled phone (or a softphone with video support and a video camera) you can make video calls using edgeBOX.

Critical Links, Inc.

114 edgeBOX 5.0 Help

In order to do that you must allow the extension to use video codecs (like H261, H263, H263p or H264) in the Codecs tab of the extension's properties dialog. You have to make sure that your phone is also configured to use the same video codecs as the extension. See your phone's manual for instructions.

Allow phones to connect in peer-to-peer mode (Can Reinvite) By default the voice traffic between two VoIP phones flows through the edgeBOX, meaning when a phone A is calling phone B, voice traffic flow is A > edgeBOX > B. You can change this flow to be A > B directly, thus reducing traffic and CPU consumption in edgeBOX. Peer-to-peer mode is specially relevant in scenarios where you have phones connecting from the Internet (registering through the edgeBOX's WAN port). Imagine the same two phones A and B in the WAN making a call between themselves, you'll have both of them consuming your Internet line, if they could connect directly your Internet line would not be used at all (except for residual SIP traffic). To allow phones to connect in peer-to-peer mode you need to enable the Can Reinvite option in the Advanced tab of the extension's properties dialog. In peer-to-peer calls DTMF shortcuts (like transfer or park) are not supported, because edgeBOX is not listening the tones anymore. In this case you need to use the correspondent special keys in your phone.

Other Advanced options · Disable NAT Support: to enable/disable this option; necessary when the phone is behind devices as a router or a firewall; see more in Advanced NAT; · Do not Send Keep alive packets to this phone: without this option selected edgeBOX will send keep alive packets to this phone every 2 seconds; · When not registered this phone is reachable at static IP Address: use this only if this phone will have a static IP address; · DFTM Mode: the way the client deals with DTMF signaling; this parameter should be the same as in the phone itself; options are: RFC2833 - selected by default; INFO; INBAND DTMF signaling within the call; note that this type of signaling is not supported by the GSM codec.

Critical Links, Inc.

IP-PBX and VoIP 115 8.2.2.2 Analog phone extensions and fax machines If your edgeBOX includes an analog card with FXS ports, you can connect your analog phones or fax machines directly to those ports.

If you are using analog phones connected through ATA (Analog Telephone Adapters) you must use SIP extension type instead of Analog. The ATA will connect into the LAN and will behave to edgeBOX as a SIP phone.

Please navigate to the Phones menu in the IP-PBX section to create and manage analog phones/ extensions. If your edgeBOX includes an analog card with FXS ports configured, you will see the New Analog Phone option when you click the New button in the Phones list. Below you can find the most common operations concerning analog phones. Creating an analog extension to connect a analog phone 1. Goto IP-PBX > Phones. 2. Click New, and select New Analog Phone. 3. Enter the number you want to assign in the Number field. This number will be used to dial to this extension. 4. Enter the name you want for your extension (like MeetingRoom) in the Name field. 5. Select the port number (like Zaptel/11 for port number 11) where you will connect the phone in Line (FXS) field. What is the port number? The Port Number will match the numbers written on the physical ports in the back of your edgeBOX. 6. Click Add to save the phone settings. Only basic properties are mentioned above, those that are mandatory (an typically the the only ones you need), for a description of other properties see Common Properties and Advanced Analog Phone Properties. Creating an analog extension to connect a fax machine An fax machine is connected to edgeBOX the same way as an analog phone, so the steps to create the extension are the same. However there's a very important detail when configuring the fax's extension, which is about echo cancellation. Fax machines are very sensitive to variations in the sound timings, and echo cancellation algorithms tweak those timings. So, in order to have a proper fax extension, make sure you disable the echo cancellation for the respective extension. To disable echo cancellation edit the phone extension, and in the Advanced tab uncheck the option "Use Echo Cancellation...". Advanced Analog Phone properties There are a couple of settings for analog phones that you shall have in mind at this time. This settings are available in the Advanced tab of the extension's properties dialog in edgeBOX. You can fine tune these parameters with a few test calls from the extension you're configuring. · Use Echo Cancellation: This enables/disables the echo cancellation algorithm for calls to this extension and by default it's enabled. Disable only if you are using a fax machine

Critical Links, Inc.

116 edgeBOX 5.0 Help connected to this extension and you're experiencing reception problems. · Transmission Gain: Amount of gain applied to sound transmitted from this extension. The variation is from -8db to + 8db being the default 0db (middle position of the slider). Increase when the other end (the callee) is barely listening; decrease if other end is listening too loud, with too noise or with echo. · Reception Gain: Amount of gain applied to sound received by this extension. The variation is from -8db to + 8db being the default 0db (middle position of the slider). Increase when the you can barely listen; decrease when listening too loud, with too noise or with echo. 8.2.2.3 ISDN Phone extensions Please navigate to the Phones menu in the IP-PBX section to create and manage ISDN phones. Below you can find the most common operations regarding this type phones. Quick steps to create an ISDN phone extension 1. Goto IP-PBX > Phones. 2. Click New, and select New ISDN Phone. 3. Enter the number you want to assign in the Number field. This number will be used to dial to this extension. 4. Enter the name you want for your extension (like MeetingRoom) in the Name field. 5. Select the Line to which you want to connect the ISDN Phone in the Line (BRI)/MSN field. 6. Click the Advanced Tab 7. Check the box if you allow the extension to be called directly through incoming lines 8. Select also the Ring duration. 9. Click Add to save the phone settings. Only some properties are mentioned above. For a description of other properties see Common Properties.

8.2.3 Connecting phones
The following sub-sections give you details on how to connect your: · VoIP Phones · Analog Phones and FAXes · ISDN Phones

Critical Links, Inc.

IP-PBX and VoIP 117 8.2.3.1 Connecting VoIP Phones VoIP phones are the most common phone types used today and the most flexible. You have available on the market a number of these phones with a wide range of prices. edgeBOX works seamlessly with Polycom, Linksys, Aastra and Granstream phones but any phone following the SIP standard protocol will be able to use edgeBOX. You have two options for VoIP phones, both suitable for use with edgeBOX: · Hardware phones, that work pretty much as a plain old phone, and · Software Phones that you can run in your laptop.

Manually configuring and connecting a SIP Phone The configuration of SIP phones is generally the same among all brands/models. Usually the configuration is done through a web page provided by the phone itself (open your browser at a url like http://192.168.100.195) or follow the built in menu on the phone. See your phone's user manual for more details, or look for a specific edgeBOX How-To document for you phone model. There are really only three fields you usually need setup: · SIP Proxy: this is the name (like sip.edgebox.com) or the ip address (like 192.168.100.254) of the edgeBOX. Pay attention were you are connecting your phone, in the LAN or the WAN. Usually you connect the phones directly in the LAN of the edgeBOX for local personnel and remote workers will connect to the WAN from the Internet. · Account: the Extension Name (like MeetingRoom) that you want your phone to use. · Password: the password of the extension. Other fields you may need to have in attention are: · DTMF: This is the type of Dual Tone Multi-Frequency, and affects the conversation with dial tones between the phone and edgeBOX. They must match in both sides (the phone and extension's properties in edgeBOX). The default value in edgeBOX is RFC2833, and that's usually the same in the phones. · Codecs: The codecs configured in the phone must match the ones configured in the extension properties in edgeBOX. The default codecs of a new extension are G711 a-law and G711 u-law and those are usually supported by default in the phones. Order the list of codec by preference, edgeBOX will always try to use the first, then the second and so on.

Automatic configuration of SIP Phones edgeBOX provides an automatic configuration system for Polycom, Linksys, Aastra and Grandstream phones (see more details here). When the auto-configuration system is enabled, at the moment you connect the phone's ethernet cable to the LAN of edgeBOX, the phone will be detected (by mac address) and displayed in the Available Phones list, you can then assign it to an extension.

Critical Links, Inc.

3.118 edgeBOX 5. decrease when listening too loud.2. Disable only if you are using a fax machine connected to this extension and you're experiencing reception problems. · Reception Gain: Amount of gain applied to sound received by this extension. . The variation is from -8db to + 8db being the default 0db. You can fine tune these parameters with a few test calls from the extension you're configuring. with too noise or with echo.3 Connecting ISDN Phones ISDN Phones edgeBOX supports EuroISDN BRI phones seamlessly. Critical Links.3. · Transmission Gain: Amount of gain applied to sound transmitted from this extension. 8. These settings are available in the Advanced tab of the extension's properties dialog in edgeBOX. Increase when the other end (the callee) is barely listening. Increase when the you can barely listen. with too noise or with echo.2. 8.0 Help See Phone Auto-Configuration How To guide. the edgeBOX Online Help or the Phone Configuration How To available in the edgeBOX documentation. The variation is from -8db to + 8db being the default 0db. Inc. decrease if other end is listening too loud. Just plug the phone (or fax) RJ11 cable to the proper FXS port in the back panel of your edgeBOX. Contact your Support before planning an ISDN phone deployment.2 Connecting Analog Phones and FAX machines Analog Phones and Fax Machines Connecting analog phones or fax machines to edgeBOX is quite simple. but there's a number of details and complexities arising from the underlying ISDN phone technology and the number of different proprietary signaling built by ISDN phone manufacturers. Analog phone settings There are a couple of settings for analog phones that you shall have in mind at this time. · Echo Cancel: This enables/disables the echo cancellation algorithm for calls to this extension and by default it's enabled.

Select the phone in the list. SPA 922. Critical Links. In the popup window select the phone extension you want to assign and click Add button. or. wait a moment for the automatic panel refresh (up to 30 seconds). a new file is generated and the phone is informed that a new file is available. avoiding the users to have to configure the phones themselves.4 Automatic configuration of phone devices The Auto Phone Configuration allows you to configure VoIP phones of your network directly on the edgeBOX. 53i. SPA 942. Learn more. 55i. 360. 480i. SPA 932. You'll see the phone in a line with <not configured> in the column Extension.IP-PBX and VoIP 119 8. · Make sure the Phones Auto Configuration System is running (the service bar at the top of the panel must be green). 3. This file is generated and maintained by edgeBOX based on the phone brand and model. The currently supported phones are Grandstream GXP 2000. Click Assign Extension to Phone button. avoiding this way. Why the phone is not listed? · Phones that have been connected just a few seconds before may not be listed yet. thus only phones configured through DHCP will be automatically detected. 57i and Snom 190. Whenever you change the settings of the extension. 2. At this point the phone reboots automatically and downloads the new configuration file. When you connect a phone to the network for the first time. IP670. Configure a detected phone To configure a phone that was connected to the network: 1. Inc. SPA 962. avoiding the configuration on the phone itself. just using the edgeBOX's web interface. Polycom SoundPoint IP320 IP330. SPA 941. . the configuration of each phone locally on the phone itself. How does it work? The Phone Auto Configuration allows you to configure VoIP phones directly on the edgeBOX. Using the Auto Configuration System you can configure phones remotely. Forcing the configuration of other models than the ones mentioned above may result in damage of the configuration of your phone. New phones are detected upon the DHCP dialog between the Phone and edgeBOX. and reflects the configuration of the extension associated with the physical. Each phone downloads a configuration file from the TFTP (Trivial FTP) service. Go to IP-PBX > Phones. it needs to be configured in order to make calls.2. Only supported SIP phones can be configured directly on the edgeBOX . Linksys SPA 901. 51i. This configuration is basically the configuration of the phones account to be used by the phone.Auto Phone Configuration. IP601. You can identify uniquely the phone by the MAC address. Aastra 9133i. 4. All the configuration of the phones is available through the IP-PBX > Phones panel.

In these cases you can resend the correct configuration to the phone. Depending on the Autoconfiguration Mode and the status of the physical phone you may need to reboot the before it gets the configured. To synchronize the phones configuration with edgeBOX's saved configuration: 1. Why should I ignore phones? Ignoring phones can be usefully if you have some phones on your network being managed by a device other than the edgeBOX. Select the phone in the list. the phone may stop working properly. Stop ignoring a phone If you want edgeBOX to stop ignoring a phone and start sending configuration information again just proceed as if you would configure it from start. Critical Links. Go to IP-PBX > Phones. 2. 2. and the line corresponding to the extensions you've selected in step 2 contains the Brand. 2. Click Unassign Phone from Extension button in the toolbar. At this point in the phones list the previously <not configured> phone is not listed anymore. 3. To ignore a phone: 1. Remove the configuration of a phone To remove the configuration of a phone: 1. Inc. 3. Click Synchronize button in the toolbar. The Setup Mode will change to Manual.120 edgeBOX 5. for example. 3. so it can work properly again. Select the desired phone in the list. Go to IP-PBX > Phones. The phone will restart automatically and will get the original configuration upon boot.0 Help 5. In these situations you don't want edgeBOX to be trying to send configuration information to those phones. IP and MAC addresses of the phone. a user changes incorrectly the configuration of a phone. by using the Assign Extension to Phone button in the toolbar. Ignore a phone You can ignore a phone so that edgeBOX doesn't try to send it configurations nor try to call it to start the Configuration Assistant. At this point edgeBOX will no longer try to configure this phone automatically. Synchronize a phone's configuration with edgeBOX If. Select the desired phone in the list. . Click Manual Config button in the toolbar. Go to IP-PBX > Phones.

Pre-Provisioning Phones You can also configure phones that haven't yet been connected but will be connected in the near future. When it arrives the end user just needs to plug it to the network and it's ready to use without further issues. Go to IP-PBX > Phones. Select (double click) the desired phone in the list (or Click New. You can just create the phone in the system. 3. Select the brand of your new phone in the Phone Brand field. When those phones are plugged in the network for the first time. Click Save button.IP-PBX and VoIP 121 4. 6. 2. Pre-provisioning is very useful when you're managing the office from a remote location and you need to install a new phone. and also in the package. or assign it to another extension. This item corresponds to the physical phone that was previously associated. Select the new brand of your new phone in the Phone Brand field. You can pre-provision phone independently of your configuration mode (Callback or Silent). Preprovisioned phones will be configured as soon as they connect to the network. Go to IP-PBX > Phones. Select the desired phone in the list (like 1020). meaning that when in Callback mode. 4. Enter the MAC address of the new phone in the MAC Address field. At this point you'll see a new item in the list with <not configured> in the extension column. and then mail it to the office. Replace a broken phone When a phone it's broken and needs to be replaced by another one proceed as follows: 1. Enter the new MAC address of the new phone in the MAC Address field. 2. Pre-provision a new phone 1. Critical Links. the assistant call doesn't happen. At this point you'll see a new item in the list with <not configured> in the extension column. 3. you can delete it (if the phone was definitely removed from the network). The new phone will be configured automatically as soon as you connect it to the network. 5. Edit the phone extension in the list (1020 in this example). Enable the option Assign a physical phone to this extension. 6. This item corresponds to the physical phone that was previously associated. The phone is now free of any configuration. You can now physically replace the old phone by the new phone. . and select New SIP Phone to create the a new extension). 4. Where can i find the MAC address? Usually the MAC address is printed in a sticker placed at the bottom of the phone. and another line corresponding with the extension (like 1020). Inc. they will immediately receive the configuration you have defined and become configured and ready to use right away. Click Unassign Phone from Extension button in the toolbar. 5.

Assign the phone to the extension by pressing the Assign extension to Phone button in the toolbar. 2. Plug the phone. and all the configurations are made through the administrator's panel. 3. Use the Callback configuration mode: · When you need your customer to configure the phones. Restart/Replug the phone to get the new configuration. Phone will reboot and start with the configured settings. · When you know mac-addresses. The Silent mode doesn't use any interaction on the phone's end. 4.4. One mode (Callback) is focused in configuring the phone by using the phone itself. . The configuration assistant calls the phone. Plug/Restart the phone 2. At this point you should answer the call.0 Help Related Topics: Auto Configuration Modes 8. · When setting up a new office on the field. Which configuration mode shall I use? Use the Silent Configuration Mode: · When you already have phones configured in the office. 5. 7. Hang up the phone. 4.122 edgeBOX 5. Use Case for Silent configuration mode 1. 6. · When you don't know mac-addresses. Call phones when they are first connected and start the Configuration Assistant Critical Links. the phone will receive a call with a configuration wizard where you can dial the extension to assign and respective password (numeric passwords only).1 Auto Configuration Modes edgeBOX provides two different operation modes for auto configuration of the phones. Use Case for Callback configuration mode 1. Dial number of an already existing extension.2. 3. Your phone will be listed in IP-PBX > Phones panel as <not configured>. Inc. Dial password of the extension. Press “1” to start auto configuration.

2. You or the network users can also call the Configuration Assistant at any time (for instance. 5. 5. to define access control policies restricting the operations and types of calls that user's or specific extensions can execute. 4.. Note: It is only possible to dial the Configuration Assistant if the configuration was interrupted previously due to some problem and needs to be finished to configure the phone. Click the Save button. Do not call phones when they are first connected to start the Configuration Assistant If you don't want the user to receive the Configuration Assistant call when he connects a phone for the first time (Silent Mode): 1. Go to IP-PBX > Phones 2. where you can specify to which Groups a specific rule is applicable to. Basically you need to create a Phones Group. which is the configuration assistant number.. 3. How to call the Configuration Assistant? To call the Configuration Assistant from a phone of the network. . If it is not running click Start Service. you or the user need to dial 1234.5 Phone Groups and Access Control edgeBOX allows you as an administrator.IP-PBX and VoIP 123 To configure the system to start the Configuration Assistant call each time a user plugs in a new phone in the network (Callback Mode): 1. Click the Save button. Related Topics: Phone Auto Configuration 8. Critical Links. Select the option Automatically call the phone and start the Configuration Assistant. Make sure the Auto Configuration System is running (you should see a green bar at the top of the panel). The same applies to Outgoing Call Rules.. if they do not answer the Configuration assistant call) from a given phone to start the phone configuration process. Click button Change. If it is not running click Start Service. Go to IP-PBX > Phones 2. and then define what operations that group can execute. 4. Click button Change. Inc. 3. The phones access control mechanism has in it's base Groups of Phones. Make sure the Auto Configuration System is running (you should see a green bar at the top of the panel).. Select the option Do not make the Auto Configuration Assistant call..

Call Pick Up policies With Call Pick Up you can specify the set of phones that can pick up calls on this group. Call Listening and Call Recording. Click New button. not even from the group. This number is optional. Description of the Access Control policies The access control policies of a phones group are configured in the Access Control tab when you create or edit a group. Click Groups in the Related Topics section of the menu.124 edgeBOX 5.Click Save button. can pick up calls ringing in this group Intercom Calls policies With Intercom Calls someone could make a phone call to this group in which the destination phone will go into loudspeaker mode and the call will be listened to by the people near that phone. 4. Enter a name (like Sales) in the Name field. Enter a description (like Sales Personnel) in the Description field. Define the access control policies to apply to the phones in the group (see examples below for better understanding). when defined enables Group Calls. Go to IP-PBX > Phones. Select the Access Control tab. In this panel you can Critical Links. 10. 6. 3. 8. You can choose: · any network phone can initiate Intercom Calls to the phones on this group (this is the default setting) · only phones in the group can initiate Intercom Calls to each other · this group will not accept Intercom Calls Call Listening policies With Call Listening you can listen to ongoing calls on other extensions. Intercom Calls. Inc. 2. select and add the phones to make part of the group (use Ctrl key to select multiple phones at the same time). Click Add button. To create a group of phones proceed as follows: 1. 5. The policies are organized by the operations: Call Pick Up. 7. The choices are: · any phone can pick up calls on this group (this is the default setting) · only the phones that belong to the group can do this · no phone. Enter a phone number (like 450) for the group in the Extension field. like calling all phones in the group at the same time. .0 Help About Phone Groups Basic steps to create a phones group. 9.

can pickup calls ringing at any phone of the group by dialing *8 followed by the group extension number (300 in the example). How to create a group of phones that can pickup calls only between them? In this example. when using *8<phone extension number> the user will pickup the call ringing at the specific phone (*81001 will pick the call ringing at phone's extension 1001). Click New button. Inc. 3. . Below you can find some examples of the most typical configurations. default setting is 'no'). 4. 9. lets assume that you have a group of support personnel and they want to pickup calls that ringing in another extension of the team (because the person is not at his desk). Enter a description (like Support Personnel) in the Description field.Click Save button. Click Groups in the Related Topics section of the menu. Configuration examples You can configure any number of phone groups. Other phones not belonging to the group Support won't be able to execute pickup to the group. Enter a phone number (like 300) for the group in the Extension field. This number will be used to identify the group from where to pickup the call. select the option Only phones of this group can pick up calls ringing on these phones. or specific extensions belonging to the group. 2. Click Add button. and · if phones on this group can or can't be recorded (see Recording calls. Select the Access Control tab. Go to IP-PBX > Phones. 6. 8. 7. but they don't want other people outside the group to pick their calls.IP-PBX and VoIP 125 specify if: · if phones on this group can be used to listen to calls on other phones (default setting is 'no') · if calls on these phones can be listened (default setting is 'no') Call Recording policies The Call Recording settings for a group allows you to specify: · if these phones can record calls (see One Touch Recording. default setting is 'no recording'). Enter a name (like Support) in the Name field. At this point any phone within the group Support. 5. When using the group's extension number like *8300 the user will randomly pickup a call ringing in the group. with many variations of access control policies building from the most simple to the most complex set of policies. At the Call Pick Up section. Critical Links. For the scenario above execute the following steps: 1. select and add the phones to make part of the group (use Ctrl key to select multiple phones at the same time). depending on your company requirements. 10.

The user can then make internal calls just by dialing the extension he wants to call or make outgoing calls that will appear to the recipient as being made by user's regular work phone. Inc. and give instructions to them during the call. as a cell phone for example.These phones can be used to listen to ongoing calls on other phones . when the user answers a call on his cell phone that was sent by egdeBOX through an analog line. This is useful. In Access Control panel. The user just needs to dial the number of the company. Create a group called Help Desk. Add to the group the supervisors phones. Otherwise the extension will keep on ringing despite the call had already been answered by the user. lets assume we have a group of supervisors that need the ability to listen ongoing calls in the Help Desk group. Create a group called Supervisors. at the Calls Monitoring section. At this point any phone within the group Supervisors. · The user can make calls with his cell phone as if he was on his extension at work. at the Calls Monitoring section leave both policies unselected. In Access Control panel. For the scenario scenario above do the following: 1. However.6 Twinning Twinning enables you to almost duplicate the behaviour of an extension of the network on another external phone. 6. when a user goes out of office. He is able to answer calls to his extension on his cell phone.2. Learn More. select both policies: . 2. 3. can listen ongoing calls of any phone in the group Help Desk by dialing *990* followed by the extension number of the phone to listen (*990*1001 to listen phone extension 1001). while others can't? In this example. 8. The phone that will pick up the call is the one that will be first answered. If you activate and configure twinning with. extension 2001) then both the network phone and the cell phone will ring. for example. Add to the group the phones of the help desk team. a cell phone: · When a call arrives at the network phone (for example.0 Help How to create a group of phones that can listen and whisper calls. the user needs to press the # (pound) key after answering. . Activate Twinning for an extension Critical Links. This will inform edgeBOX that the call was picked up and edgeBOX will stop ringing the extension of the user. To listen and give instructions at the same time (whisper mode) dial *991*1001.126 edgeBOX 5.Calls on these phones can't be listened by other phones 4. even if he is at home. The call will be answered by edgeBOX and the user will hear the dial tone again. 5. for example.

through the phone. the network phone and his personal cell phone. Enter the phone number to be twinned to in the Phone Number field. Inc. But you. Change the twinned phone number 1. can enable it again at any time. Twining will be now enabled. Note that the feature is still allowed at the phone. Select the desired network phone from the phone list and click the Edit Phone button. · Disable twinning . But to do so. 2.IP-PBX and VoIP 127 The twinning feature is defined at each specific phone. 2. this phone is not twinning with another phone. 3. twinning must be Active on that phone. Twinning will be disabled. Unselect the option Activate Twinning. 3. By default phones are not allowed to twin with other phones like cell phones. See Configure Twinning using the phone. Click Save button. · Enable twinning . Select the desired network phone from the phone list and click the Edit Phone button. dial *91. directly on the phone itself instead of the edgeBOX. 4. Click Save button.on your phone. so you can switch off twinning so just the company phone rings when a call is received. it is just not enabled at the moment. Select the desired network phone from the phone list and click the Edit Phone button. · Change the phone your phone is twinning with . . through edgebOX's interface. To allow a phone to twin with another one: 1. To turn twinning off of a phone: 1. In the Twinning section you can see the number of the phone this extension is currently twinning with. Click Save button. Configure Twinning using the phone The user of the phone with twinning can also enable. 3. 2.on your phone. or you can leave it blank for the user of the phone to configure it himself. this is. disable and change the number of the phone your extension is twinning with. Select the option Activate Twinning. having both phones ringing at the same time is not really useful. for example. 4.on your phone. In this cases. dial *90. dial *92* Critical Links. or the phone's user. Enter the new phone number in the Phone Number field. Turn off twinning This is particularly useful when the user is close to both phones at the same time. for example.

The Internal Dial Plan should only be used for advanced configurations. the right-hand panel shows you the Extension Dial Plan: the configured sequence of actions the PBX will execute upon reception of a new call for this extension. For your convenience. The Configure the Extension Dial Plan popup window will show. you can use the New button to add new extensions or the Edit button to change existing entries. Those operations should be performed in the Phones list. Don't use the Internal Dial Plan for simple operations like the creation or removal of extensions.2. a Duplicate button is provided for quickly creating new entries based on the existing ones. The popup dialog shows you initially: · on the left: the list of Extensions currently active in the Internal Dial Plan: each new phone created is automatically added to the Dial Plan and each phone deleted is automatically removed. . for a specific entry: · Extension: type-in the extension name to which this Extension Dial Plan applies. The Internal Dial Plan menu gives you access to a finer-grained control of the way edgeBOX processes calls: it allows you to route each call through a set of simple or complex sequences for each call processed. You can consider the Internal Dial Plan as a set of individual Extension Dial Plans. Critical Links. if your cell phone is 912154014 you can dial *92*912154014. dial *93 and the call you are answering in the cell phone will continue in the network phone. · with Caller ID: check the box and type-in the Caller ID if you wish to further specify that this applies only to that specific Caller ID.7 Internal Dial Plan The Internal Dial Plan popup window is accessible in the Related Topics corner of the Phones menu. As usual.on your phone. 8. · on the right: when you select an extension on the left. Configure the Extension Dial Plan This dialog lets you configure.0 Help followed by the phone number you want to twin to.128 edgeBOX 5. · Transfer an ongoing call from the cell phone to the network phone . in the IP-PBX section. Inc. For example.

Inc. Related Topics: Critical Links. When configuring Incoming Call Rules you have at your disposal the following tasks: · Creating Incoming Call Rules. · Wait: this action makes the call wait for the specified number of seconds. the selected sound file will be played and all numbers entered by the caller will be ignored until the sound has finished (see here for details on sound files).IP-PBX and VoIP 129 · Actions: an ordered list of actions edgeBOX will try to route the call through. · Build Automatic Attendant voice menus. For each action you can: · Forward to Phone: this action forwards the call to a phone. · Forward to Conference: you can choose a conference number for the call to be forwarded to (see Conferences). · Play: the caller will listen to the sound file you choose. · Hangup: the call will be hung-up. use the Up and Down arrows to change the sequence. you must select the phone from the drop-down list that appears below. you may choose any extension with an active voicemail. · Forward to Group: here the call will be answered by some phone in the group you specify from the drop-down list. · Answer: the call will be answered. you must specify the number you want in the text filed. · Forward to external number: this action forwards the call to an external number.3 Configuring incoming call rules Incoming Call Rules instruct edgeBOX on how to deal with a call coming from the outside world. · Forward to Queue: with this option the call will be forward to the queue you choose (see Queues). 8. use the New and Delete buttons to manage the contents of the list. · Forward to Voicemail: the call will be forwarded to the chosen extension's voicemail. The Incoming Call Rules menu is accessible in the IP-PBX section. . · Define Schedules (or calendars).

· rule conditions. Click New button. 8. There are two default example rules: work-hours and after-hours. and how it's going to be answered. Each rule as a set of conditions and a set of actions.130 edgeBOX 5.0 Help · Voice Lines · Groups · Sound Manager · Music On-Hold · Automatic Call Recording · Automatic Attendants · Schedules 8. Click Add button to add the condition to the rule. Basic steps to create an Incoming Call Rule 1.3. Go to IP-PBX > Incoming Call Rules. Enter the parameters for the action in the fields at right side of the action. 3. to determine if the rule is to be applied or not not. to voicemail or to automated attendants. 5. Enter the name of the rule in the Rule name field. Rules are applied in the order of appearance. 9. to determine the order by which the rules are evaluated. Click Add button to add the action to the rule. Select a condition in the Conditions combobox. 2. that define how the call is to be treated. Select an action in the Actions combobox. Repeat from step 4 for as many conditions as you need. It can be redirected to a specific extension. A rule is composed by: · a rule priority.1 Creating incoming call rules Incoming Call Rules define how an incoming call is routed through the system. Conditions determine if the rule is to be applied or not not. Click on a rule and use the UP and Down buttons to change the order. which is a human readable name describing the rule. . 4. · a rule name. · rule actions. Enter the parameter value for the condition in the text field at right side of the condition. Repeat from step 7 for as many conditions as you need. Critical Links. 6. 7. The Incoming Call Rules menu can be reached in the IP-PBX section. while the Actions specify how the call is to be treated. Inc.

you must choose a Schedule from the drop-down list at the right side of the condition type. · Calls to (DDI): This condition tries to match the destination number (DDI) of the call with the supplied value. but out of hours (or at vacations periods or holidays) you want an automated attendant to answer. This condition is useful when you need to redirect a call based on who's calling. Inc. You can: · Forward to Phone: this action forwards the call to a phone.IP-PBX and VoIP 131 10. you must specify the number you want in the text filed that appears at the right. So you could easily build up complex rules such as ''from this origin. you may choose any extension with an active voicemail.At the rules list. to that destination within some period of time''. you must enter the DDI in the text field at the right side of the condition type. you must select the phone from the drop-down list that appears at the right side. the sequence of actions specified are executed. · Forward to Queue: with this option the call will be forward to the queue you choose (see Queues). Rule Conditions When a call is received by edgeBOX. · Forward to Voicemail: the call will be forwarded to the chosen extension's voicemail. · Calls from (CallerID): This condition tries to match the originating number (CallerID) of the call with the supplied value. · Forward to Conference: you can choose a conference number for the call to be forwarded to (see Conferences). The rule's actions will be executed if (and only if) all conditions together are true. · Schedule: This conditions evaluates if the call is being made at a particular time or day (see Schedules for more details). This condition is useful when you have multiple public phone numbers. . · Forward to Group: here the call will be answered by some phone in the group you specify from the drop-down list at the right side. · Answer: the call will be answered. For the first rule to match all conditions. Critical Links. · Forward to external number: this action forwards the call to an external number. 11. Rule Actions The Rule Actions determine the behaviour in case the rule conditions are met.Click Save button to save the rule. · Ring Phone: this action tries to forward the call to the specified phone by making it ring. In a single rule you can use as many conditions as you want. you must enter the CallerID in the text field at the right side of the condition type. each one with a different destination department or receptionist. use the Move Up and Move Down buttons in the toolbar to place the rule in the order you desire to be evaluated. · Forward to internal number: this action forwards the call to an internal number. if the phone is not answered then the next action will take place. the conditions of each incoming call rule are evaluated. you must specify the number you want in the text filed that appears at the right. This condition is useful for example when at work hours (or days) you want the call to be answered by a person.

In this case a call from 987654321 would be forwarded to internal number 9921. If you select that option and indicate the passcode.132 edgeBOX 5. if. specify an action like ''Forward to Internal Number 99XX''. and GREAT care must be taken NOT to compromise your security. first is asked the user to enter the passcode before getting dialtone. the user gets authenticated automatically. the user will hear dialtone on which a call may be placed. · Change Music On Hold: to change the music to be played if the call is placed on hold.0 Help · Hangup: the call will be hung-up. · Pattern '*': the symbol * accounts for any digit sequence. Allows someone calling in from outside the telephone switch (PBX) to obtain an "internal" system dialtone and dial calls as if from one of the extensions attached to the telephone switch. · Pattern 'X': each X accounts for exactly one digit. . If the passcode is correct. Is it secure? This type of access has SERIOUS security implications. in the same rule. for example. you specify ''Calls From (DDI): 9876543XX'' you could latter. · Play: the caller will listen to the sound file you can choose. · Set Project Code: to label the call detail record (CDR) with the supplied code. Rule actions can be moved Up and Down with the help of the corresponding buttons. · Start Automated Attendant: this action will start the execution of the specified automated attendant menu. you can use constructs like "Ricardo Loureiro <916291182>" or even the usual * and X signs for field replacement (see more on this below). You can add several rule actions. Use of pattern characters You can make use of patterns in your rules. Critical Links. you must type the code on the right. This way you could compose complex sequences for edgeBOX to execute on the call. the selected sound file will be played and all numbers entered by the caller will be ignored until the message has completed. when the DISA action is executed. · Wait: this action makes the call wait for the specified number of seconds. If you do not enter a passcode. wait for 10 seconds and then forward the call to some Conference. followed by the pound sign (#). when the action DISA is executed. In each call the XX sequence from the DDI will be evaluated and re-used in the action. · Change CallerID: to change the CallerID to a diferent one. you must type it on the right. We advise you to ALWAYS enter a passcode. The DISA application may require the user to enter a passcode. Inc. · DISA: Stands for Direct Inward System Access. As an example you could play a sound.

8. play sound files. An automated attendant menu is built with actions and conditions: · Actions define what is to be done in the call. fully integrating all of edgeBOX's VoIP PBX functionalities. 9. · Ring Phone: · Forward to Voicemail: the call will be forwarded to the chosen extension's voicemail. allowing the administrator to create response menus for a large range of applications. Repeat from step 5 to add more actions. Select the desired action in the Action combo box. To change to action's order execution use the up and down arrow button in the toolbar.Select the type of action desired. Automated Attendants are displayed as a tree structure. you may choose any extension with an active voicemail. 10. 4. 11. Each child node is either an action or a condition which may be expanded to see it's underlaying actions. Callers using a touch tone phone will be able to navigate these menus by pressing the appropriate numbers.3. Basic steps to create an automated attendant 1.Click Save button when finished. Click Save to confirm the action. or a number is dialed. like when a key is pressed. Go to IP-PBX > Incoming Call Rules 2. Click Add Action button in the toolbar. like answer.For actions to be executed when a condition is met. making it easy to understand the concept of flow of actions and conditions. select the condition in the list. you must select the phone from the drop-down list that appears at the right side. · Conditions are used to respond to user input. 5. 6. Inc. Click New button in the toolbar. Click Automatic Attendants option in the Related Topics section of the menu 3. Enter the parameter values for the action in the fields shown below the Action combo box. 12. · Forward to external number: this action forwards the call to an external number. Critical Links.IP-PBX and VoIP 133 8. you must specify the number you want in the text filed that appears at the right. joining conferences or jumping to another automated attendant menu. . and click Add Action (steps 5 to 8).2 Defining Automated Attendant menus edgeBOX provides a flexible Automated Attendant builder. Enter a name to identify the automatic attendant in the Name field. Automatic Attendant's Actions · Forward to Phone: this action forwards the call to a phone. 7. Click Add Condition button in the toolbar.

and will execute the underlying actions if the keys match the ones you specified on this condition. Rule actions can be moved Up and Down with the help of the corresponding buttons. If you do not enter a passcode. · Forward to Group: here the call will be answered by some phone in the group you specify from the drop-down list at the right side. · Hangup: the call will be hung-up. · Wait: this action makes the call wait for the specified number of seconds. first is asked the user to enter the passcode before getting dialtone. If you select that option and indicate the passcode. instead of being forced to wait for the sound to finish. when the DISA action is executed.134 edgeBOX 5. the selected sound file will be played and all numbers entered by the caller will be ignored until the message has completed. in that case the caller will be able to dial the internal extension he wishes to reach. · Start IVR: this action will start the execution of the specified automated attendant menu (IVR). · Play in background: similar to Play. the drop-down list will show you all currently configured automated attendants for you to choose the one you want. Inc. · DISA: Stands for Direct Inward System Access. . The DISA application may require the user to enter a passcode. and GREAT care must be taken NOT to compromise your security. · If user didn't press any key: This condition will execute the underlying actions. We advise you to ALWAYS enter a passcode. Is it secure? This type of access has SERIOUS security implications.0 Help · Forward to Queue: with this option the call will be forward to the queue you choose (see Queues). additionally you can also choose the Internal Extensions option. when the action DISA is executed. · If user pressed invalid keys: This condition will execute the underlying actions. Automatic Attendant's Conditions Conditions are used to execute a set of actions based on the user's input. the user will hear dialtone on which a call may be placed. You must enter the set of keys that should be pressed in the Keys field. As an example you could play a sound. if the user didn't pressed any keys (after a 5 seconds timeout). You can add several rule actions. · If user pressed keys: This condition will compare the keys typed be the caller. If the passcode is correct. · Forward to Conference: you can choose a conference number for the call to be forwarded to (see Conferences). Critical Links. · Answer: the call will be answered. if the sequence of keys pressed by the user is not matching any of the previous conditions. the user gets authenticated automatically. wait for 10 seconds and then forward the call to some Conference. · Play: the caller will listen to the sound file you can choose. This way you could compose complex sequences for edgeBOX to execute on the call. but in this case the user can press keys while listening. followed by the pound sign (#). Allows someone calling in from outside the telephone switch (PBX) to obtain an "internal" system dialtone and dial calls as if from one of the extensions attached to the telephone switch.

3. Inc. Go to the IP-PBX section. You can do this based on: · Date: you can either specify a range of calendar days or a single day. from 0h0m up to 23h59m. Click New button. You can have distinct rules based on Phone Dialing. 2.3. You would call this schedule WorkHours2ndSemester09. Next you must specify a set of time Rules. Enter a name identifying the schedule in the Name field. Give me an example. This is very useful to specify working hours. Usually Outgoing Call Rules are used with Least Cost Routing (LCR) in mind. vacations. · Days: you can either specify a range of week days or a single week day. reducing the overall cost of your voice communications. . 5.IP-PBX and VoIP 135 8. From that menu you can: · Configure edgeBOX to require PIN authentication for outgoing calls · Configure Outgoing Call Rules and Access Control policies for specific Groups or Devices · Configure the Emergency route Critical Links. holiday periods that you can then easily use when defining your call rules. Dialed Number and Time. 4. since you can create rules based on destination number in order to use the least cost route for that destination. In that case the schedule will actually be defined as the superposition of all rules (logic AND). 8. · Time: you can specify any time span within a day. Incoming Call Rules menu. You can specify multiple rules for a schedule.. Please refer to the IP-PBX section's Outgoing Call Rules menu. As an example you could specify a three rules based schedule as: ''Date: from 1/7/2009 to 31/12/2009'' AND ''Time: from 9h00m to 18h59m'' AND ''Days: from Monday to Friday''. To define a schedule proceed as follows: 1.4 Define your outgoing call rules Outgoing Call Rules instruct edgeBOX on how to route calls to the outside world.3 Schedules Schedules allow you to define periods of time for executing rules in Incoming Call Rules. Click the Schedules option in the Related Topics section of the menu..

· Time of day: the period of the day for which this rule will apply · Routes: in the routes section you define · Route: which line (or lines) should be used to make the call · Outbound Pattern: the number to dial out.4.e. Inc. here you can reuse pattern matches from the Inbound Pattern. more details below. you can use patterns such as 123*: this will match all calls to numbers starting with 123. In this mode of operation users are not required to supply a PIN when making calls. Mobile. Local.136 edgeBOX 5. The Outgoing Call Rules menu in the IP-PBX section displays the current status of the authentication service at the top. .4. As usual the green/gray colors are used to show the operational status of the Outgoing Calls Authentication service. Critical Links. i. When inactive. Outgoing call permissions. · Type of call: Free. International or Special Call. Long Distance.2 Rules Definition An Outgoing Call Rule is defined by the following data: · Conditions: this is where you define the conditions when to apply the rule. the system will still check the type of each call. Click the Require users to authenticate/Don't require users to authenticate to change it. namely: · Inbound Pattern: the Dialed Number.1 Authentication edgeBOX supports authentication of outgoing calls. the type of outgoing calls a user is allowed to make. Authentication is based on a PIN assigned on user creation. but only to find the correct Route to use.0 Help Related Topics: · Configuring Voice Lines · Phones Groups Access Control · Automatic Call Recording · Configure usage of ENUM routes 8. When active the PBX will block outgoing calls if the user supplied invalid credentials or if the user doesn't have the necessary permissions to make the call. 8. are also set on user creation.

whilst your outbound pattern would be 10109*. More details. Enter the amount of time in seconds (like 30). One example is when you need to add prefixes to select a specific provider. or 800XXXXXXX for all 10 digit numbers started with 800) in the Inbound Pattern field. you may use several X characters to match a specific number of digits.Select the Access Control tab. The rule is only applied to calls made during the specified time period. Select the route (or line) you want the call to follow through in the Route field. The outbound pattern may differ from the inbound. Enter a name for the rule (like US_Calls) in the Name field. in the From and To fields.Repeat 7 to 11 adding all routes you wish to use as fall back routes. Classify the type of access level required to use this rule (like Free) in the Type of Call field. Click New button in the toolbar. · CallerID: outgoing caller ID. More details.Click Add. . Enter the time period you want this rule to be applicable. The 'X's must be uppercase. This way you can have different rules in different time schedules to the same destination number. Critical Links. In the both patterns (outbound and inbound) you can use two special characters: * matches all remaining digits. thus your inbound pattern would be 9* (all numbers starting with 9). If you entered 9XXX. in these cases edgeBOX will change it at the protocol level but produces no effect as the provider will override it..IP-PBX and VoIP 137 · Timeout: timeout for this route. say a prefix of 1010 needs to be added. Caller ID is the identifier displayed (usually the number associated with the phone line) in the destination phone. 5. 4.. in this case the Inbound pattern would be 0* and the Outbound pattern would be *. 13. Inc.If you want to enforce a specific Caller ID for the call. Examples: The 9* indicates a digit 9 followed by any other numbers. 7. 10. check the Caller ID and enter the number (or text) you want in the CallerID field. Enter the number (pattern) that should be dialed (usually the same as the Inbound Pattern you entered in 3) in the Outbound Pattern field. if you wish to transform the number. 2. 11. Other situation is when you want an outbound prefix like 0. Goto IP-PBX > Outgoing Call Rules. 8. this would indicate a 9 followed by exactly 3 other digits (which may or may not include the digit 9) 9. X matches exactly one digit.. this route shall ring before ending the call (or falling to the next route if defined) in the Timeout field. Not all providers allow this to be changed. 3.. 6. Steps to create a new outgoing call rule 1. 12. All these additional routes will be used if the previous one is not available or times out. Enter the dialed pattern (or number) you want as a condition to apply this rule (like 001* for all numbers started with 001.

In a sentence this rule could be read as “Calls to any number (*). for whom you want to be able to use the rule. the Default rule doesn't include any routes (lines) to the PSTN. made from any phone will follow demo-proxy route”. 8. at any time (00:00 – 23:59) made from any phone (Access Group Default) will follow routes specified”.Move the Groups and the Devices from Denied to Allowed. Inc. The rule will only be applied if the phone making the call belongs to a group in the Allowed area. See more in Configuring Voice Lines.0 Help 14. If everything is working properly your call will be answered and you'll listen an automated attendant saying “Welcome. at any time. thus your edgeBOX needs a working internet connection for this test to work. so you need to edit this rule and add the routes you've connected. Goodbye”. The emergency rule it's a system rule and cannot be deleted.4. and then the call will finish. demo-proxy is a ITSP connection to Critical Links data center for you to test your edgeBOX setup. 15. In a sentence this rule could be read as “Calls to number 123. Note: You can test the Demo rule by dialing 123 in one of the already connected phones. Critical Links. You can easily identify it by the red cross icon . Goto IP-PBX > Outgoing Call Rules. Thank you for calling. Default Outgoing Call Rules There are two pre-configured outgoing call rules in edgeBOX: · Demo rule: This rule is meant for testing purposes only.Click Save to save the rule. meaning that every connected phone (even phones in "not registered" state due to bad password) are allowed to make the call. Note: When you first receive an edgeBOX. or if the call is coming from a Device in the Allowed area (like DISA).3 Emergency number The Emergency rule is a special rule to be used when the emergency number (e. Steps to setup the Emergency call rule 1.g: 911 or 112) is dialed. Please note that this call is made through a connection to Critical Links servers. .138 edgeBOX 5. · Default rule: This rule is the most generic rule. and will match all calls (except if rules with more specific conditions are applicable). This rule behaves pretty much the same way as other rules but authorization and authentication policies are bypassed. Select the rule Emergency and click Edit button in the toolbar (double mouse click also works). 3. Enter the emergency number (like 911) in the Emergency Number field. 2.

in this case the Inbound pattern would be 0* and the Outbound pattern would be *. you may use several X characters to match a specific number of digits.IP-PBX and VoIP 139 4. or pure VoIP interfaces such as SIP or IAX2. Click Add. this route shall ring before ending the call (or falling to the next route if defined) in the Timeout field. Repeat 5 to 8 adding all routes you wish to use as fall back routes.. Caller ID is the identifier displayed (usually the number associated with the phone line) in the destination phone. The outbound pattern may differ from the inbound. . 8.Click Save to save the rule. Enter the number (pattern) that should be dialed (usually the same as the Emergency Number you entered in 3) in the Outbound Pattern field. in the Related Topics corner. You can reach the Voice Lines popup from the Incoming Call Rules . The 'X's must be uppercase.5 Configuring Voice Lines edgeBOX can be connected to the public telephony network or to the IP network in a number of ways. check the Caller ID and enter the number (or text) you want in the CallerID field. 9. Voice lines are classified as follows: Critical Links. this would indicate a 9 followed by exactly 3 other digits (which may or may not include the digit 9) 6. 8. All these additional routes will be used if the previous one is not available or times out.. With edgeBOX you can manage your connections such as ISDN or FXO-FXS hardware. One example is when you need to add prefixes to select a specific provider. Inc. More details. in these cases edgeBOX will change it at the protocol level but produces no effect as the provider will override it. 5. In the both patterns (outbound and inbound) you can use two special characters: * matches all remaining digits. Examples: The 9* indicates a digit 9 followed by any other numbers.. Enter the amount of time in seconds (like 30). Select the route (or line) you want the call to follow through in the Route field. whilst your outbound pattern would be 10109*. If you entered 9XXX. thus your inbound pattern would be 9* (all numbers starting with 9). The Voice Lines panel allows you to manage all these interfaces in a consistent unified approach. When the panel loads you get a summary display of all your phone lines and corresponding status. If you want to enforce a specific Caller ID for the call. Not all providers allow this to be changed. 10. the Outgoing Call Rules and the MailFax Accounts menus. 7. say a prefix of 1010 needs to be added. Please go to the IP-PBX section. X matches exactly one digit. if you wish to transform the number. More details.. Other situation is when you want an outbound prefix like 0.

Please fill the details regarding your VoIP provider account: · Name: type in an identification name for this provider. press the Settings. How to create a remote office connection? · All Lines: Display all the above mentioned connection types plus FXS lines. ISDN BRI and ISDN PRI. supported signalling protocols are SIP and IAX2. Inc.140 edgeBOX 5. button and type-in: · Register Name · Authentication Name · From User · From Domain · Outbound Proxy · Realm · Contact Critical Links. additionally you can Customize Authentication Fields. The supported line types include FXO. . Calls received on this lines are considered internal calls. meaning that extensions can be called directly. In the subsequent dialog choose Connect to a VoIP provider on the Internet and press Next. where you can connect directly analog phones or fax machines.0 Help · Public Lines: Lines connected directly to the PSTN (Public Switched Telephone Network). · Remote Offices: IP connnections to other office. meaning that extensions can be called directly. The panel will automatically display all lines installed based on your hardware configuration..5. How to create a VoIP Provider connection?. 8. The signalling protocol used is SIP (Session Initiation Protocol). Calls received on this lines are considered internal calls.1 VoIP Providers To enable edgeBOX to connect to a VoIP provider on the Internet. · IP Address / Hostname: type-in the IP address or the FQDN of your provider. Step 1: in the first dialog you need to define the destination host and authentication for the connection. · Remote PBX: Lines connected to a PBX (includes ISDN BRI and ISDN PRI). Authentication · Authentication is not required · Authenticate with credentials: if the provider requires authentication please fill in the Username and Password. · VoIP Providers: IP connections to VoIP providers.. please load the Voice Lines dialog and click the New button.

How to use ENUM service? ENUM service is used like a Voice Line. Inc.5. 4. info and rfc2833 8. so if for a given Outbound Route you want ENUM service to be used. press Next. You can also select the preferred order of use. Step 2: in the second dialog you will define codecs and other advanced options. Select ENUM in the Route combobox. For more information see Codecs section. Please note that calls coming through trusted SIP proxies are only trusted if the proxy name is equal to the FROM header. Double click the rule where you want to use ENUM (or create a new rule). 1. Critical Links. In edgeBOX ENUM service is conceptualized as a voice line.2 ENUM service edgeBOX supports ENUM. 5. you just need to add the ENUM line to your route.IP-PBX and VoIP 141 For convenience you can use the Test Connection button to validate the connection. you need to add ENUM line to your list of routes. · Manage Codecs to be used on this connection: select the codecs to be used (these codecs have to be supported by the provider). You may choose to provide: · Max Calls: maximum number of simultaneous calls allowed. . Go to IP-PBX > Outgoing Call Rules. Click Add. to send a query to each active ENUM server to try to lookup the called PSTN number. which is a service to map PSTN telephone numbers into VoIP URLs. meaning that whenever you want a given Outgoing Rule to search and use ENUM service. For more details about ENUM see Telephone Number Mapping. and if found the call will proceed as an URI call. Use the Up and Down buttons to place the ENUM at your desired execution order (typically it should come first). and enter the desired Outbound pattern. 2. · Manage DTMF and other advanced options: · Disable NAT support · Disable Keep Alive · DTMF Mode: inband. Once you're done. 3. This will make for every call routed through that rule.

. etc. To enable edgeBOX to connect to a Remote Office.5. outbound calls following this rule will be converted to URI Calls whenever the ENUM server returns a valid URI for the dialed number. making call conferences.142 edgeBOX 5. Advanced Options · Manage Codecs: click the Codecs. If you need to use others follow the steps below: 1. 3. Double click the ENUM Service line. 4. 5. Go to IP-PBX > Outgoing Call Rules. Use Add and Remove buttons to setup your ENUM servers. Note that besides calling internal extensions. A benefit of this configuration is that an extension from edgeBOX A is able to call an extension registered in edgeBOX B.3 Remote Offices The Remote Office functionality allows the creation of an IAX or SIP trunk between two edgeBOXs. How to configure ENUM service? By default edgeBOX comes preconfigured with two ENUM server (e164. as if the phone was registered on edgeBOX A. Click Save button. Now all the Outgoing Rules that you've configured to use ENUM will query the specified servers. please load the Voice Lines dialog and click the New button. 2.0 Help 6. In the subsequent dialog choose Connect to a Remote Office and press Next. allowing you to make a conference call between two remote offices with no costs. Calls between these devices benefit from an optimised connection. for example). Authentication · Password: the password to use in the connection. Now.. all VoIP functionalities will be available for the remote edgeBOX users (making local calls. Select Voice Lines option in Related Topics section. . 8.org and e164. button and use the following dialog to enable/ Critical Links. Step 1: in the first step you need to define a name and a security key for the conection: Name: a descriptive name for the connection (such as office2.arpa). resulting in a better use in bandwidth. Inc. ). Click Save button.

select the desired entry and click the Edit button. Critical Links.IP-PBX and VoIP 143 disable and prioritize the application of audio and video codecs for this connection. · Manage Protocol (IAX or SIP): click the Protocol..4 Hardware edgeBOX supports automatic hardware detection. To access them. Press the Finish button when done. · Automatically configure remote server: check the box and type-in the administration password of the remote host. NT Mode . Step 2: in the second step you need to specify the Remote Office location: · IP Address / Hostname: type-in the IP address or the FQDN of the remote office IP-PBX.5. All supported VoIP card types are automatically detected and the system is automatically configured so these cards can be used by the IP-PBX. for SIP don't forget the Max.4.1 ISDN BRI When editing a BRI port. Each card type has it's own specific set of configurations. IP-PBX menu. Click Next. See Codecs section for more information. Simultaneous calls value.. For each specific type follow the details below: · ISDN BRI · ISDN PRI · Analog FXO-FXS 8. Inc. All supported card types are displayed in the Voice Lines popup. button and choose the protocol SIP or IAX. 8. ports in NT Mode are available when you configure your Incoming Call Rules. .5. you can configure the following parameters: Mode Choose the desired operating mode: · This line connects to an ISDN Phone: if this line will be used to connect a phone.

PMP links allow to connect up to 8 terminals in parallel along the bus.5.144 edgeBOX 5. additionally the number of ports (31 ports in E1 mode. NOTE: changing this option requires restarting edgeBOX's PBX and thus hanging-up all ongoing calls. 8.0 Help · This line connects to an ISDN Line: if this line will be used to connect edgeBOX to the exterior using ISDN. ports in TE Mode are available as outbound routes when you manage Outgoing Call Rules. Others Select the following two options as required: · Consider calls on this line as internal calls (Trusted Line): select this option if you want inbound and outbound calls through this line to be considered internal calls by edgeBOX. · Wait for all incoming digits before fallback to Dial Plan: select this option if you want to wait for all incoming digits before fallback to Dial Plan. 22 ports in T1 mode). this means that the inbound call rules and outbound call rules will not be applied to these calls. How to change mode? Critical Links. Accepting calls restrictions: · Accept calls to any number · Accept only calls to the following numbers and ignore other calls: use the Add. TE Mode. Connection Type Choose the desired connection type: Point to Multi-Point (PMP) or Point to Point (PTP). . Edit and Remove buttons to manage the list of numbers to which this line accepts calls. Inc. You can use this option to restrict the inbound calls you accept on this ISDN line.2 ISDN PRI When editing a PRI port. it can be E1 or T1.4. you get a two tabbed dialog window: General · Mode: shows you the current operating mode for the port. it allows edgeBOX to integrate with PBX's which work with overlap digits. PTP links allow only one TE to be connected. · Point to Multi-Point (PMP) · Point to Point (PTP) MSN numbers The MSN numbers are your public phone numbers.

Available options are: · EuroISDN. the following settings may be changed: · SwitchType: switching used by the line. · QSIG. it allows edgeBOX to integrate with PBX's which work with overlap digits. Inc. · Enable Echo Cancellation: select this option if you want the card to use the embedded echo cancellation mechanisms. · Wait for all incoming digits before fallback to Dial Plan: select this option if you want to wait for all incoming digits before fallback to Dial Plan. · Group: the current Group. · NET. Note that this option is only displayed for cards that support echo cancellation. Available options are: · CPE. used on the client side. · Signalling: signalling used by this span. used in Europe. . Advanced The advanced tab gives you access to further configuration details In the Advanced tab of the configuration details for PRI cards. · E&M · Timing: · Primary Master · Secondar Master · Slave · Coding: · HDB3 · AMI Critical Links. · Consider calls on this line as internal calls (Trusted Line): select this option if you want inbound and outbound calls through this line to be considered internal calls by edgeBOX. this means that the inbound call rules and outbound call rules will not be applied to these calls.IP-PBX and VoIP 145 · Ports: the current port assignment (example 5-35 for an E1). used on the network side.

FXO and FXS modules may be installed in this card: · FXO Module: should be connected to an analogue line. Customize National and International Prefixes · National Prefix: check the box and enter the desired prefix. Dynamic.146 edgeBOX 5. Inc. Be careful not to connect phone lines (PSTN lines) in the FXS port. allowing you to receive or make calls using the PSTN network. Local. the port will stop working. National.1 How to change configuration mode (E1 / T1) To change the mode from E1 to T1 (or vice-versa) you need to access the hardware and configure jumpers accordingly. National.5. 8. International. 8. Private. When editing an FXO-FXS port you'll be prompted by a panel with two tabs: Critical Links.4. Private. Even if you unplug the phone line cable and connect an analog phone into the port. edgeBOX supports TDM Digium cards.3 Analogue FXO-FXS To allow connection to analogue lines. Local. Dynamic. the port will still not work.4. please refer to your support service for more information on how to proceed.0 Help ISDN Signaling · Dial Plan: choose from Unknown. . To see more information about E1 and T1 see here. International. · Local Dial Plan: choose from Unknown.2. · International Prefix: check the box and enter the desired prefix. you will have to reboot edgeBOX. · FXS Module: should be connected to an analogue phone or fax machine. If you do so.5.

.6 Phone operations This section of the manual brings together hands-on information on how to execute several useful operations or configurations directly with your phone: · Blind and Supervised Transfers · Group Calls · Intercom Calls · Call Listening and Call Whispering · Call Pick-Up · Twinning · Follow Me Critical Links. Advanced · Enable "#" confirmation for outgoing twinned calls: only for FXO mode. edgeBOX is not able to know if the call was answered or not because it is an analog line. check then box and type-in the desired direct phone number for this line. show me more details. · This line has a direct phone number assigned: only for FXO mode.. when an analog phone is in Twinning. · Mode: FXO or FXS. if the call is answered on the twin phone. · Sound Volume Gain (dBs): adjust the volume for transmission and reception on this line.. only for FXO mode. · Enable Echo Cancellation: only if card supports echo cancellation. 8.IP-PBX and VoIP 147 General · Number: number of lines for this card. this will inform edgeBOX that the call was picked up and edgeBOX will stop ringing the other extension. otherwise the extension will keep on ringing despite the call having already been answered by the user. · This line receives dialtone: select the period: immediately or up to n seconds. Inc. so it is necessary to the user to press the # (cardinal) key after answering. you need to select this option if you have Twinning enabled on your analog phone and you are not in the USA.

You will hear the busy line tone. Inc. Critical Links. Dial the prefix for a blind transfer and the telephone number you wish to transfer the incoming call to. which means the transfer is complete and you can hang up. When you are answering a call. To do that use a Supervised Transfer instead. 3. you cannot check to see if the number you are transferring the call is busy or offline. 3. · Supervised Transfer: transfers a call to another phone by putting it on hold and allowing you to talk to the transfer destination phone. for example. If you make a mistake when dialling the number you're transferring the caller to. but you can change it). ask if you can transfer the call.148 edgeBOX 5.6. Also. The caller will no longer be able to hear you. Supervised Transfer . Dial the number of the phone number you wish to transfer the incoming call to. 4. 4. it is also know as Attended Call Transfer. After the person answers. hang up your phone and the call that is on hold will be transferred to the recipient.How to do it? 1. Dial the prefix for a supervised transfer (*2 by default. Blind Transfer . inform the caller that you are going to transfer the call. 2. you and the caller will be disconnected from the original call. If the person says no wait until he/her hangs up.How to do it? 1. Example: #12001 to forward the call to extension 2001. The call on hold will be transferred back to you and you can inform the person holding that it is not possible to transfer the call. When you are answering a call. If the person says yes. this allows you to determine if the transfer will succeed and if the person at the other end will actually be able to accept the call.1 Blind and Supervised Transfers edgeBOX allows you to execute Calls Transfers from your phone to other phones. inform the caller that you are going to transfer the call. .0 Help · One Touch Recording · Labeling CDR records with Cost Centers 8. There are two major kinds of transfers: · Blind Transfer: immediately transfers the call to another number. 2. The caller is immediately connected to the number you transferred the call to. before making the transfer.

That's the group's extension. Mr Alves'.IP-PBX and VoIP 149 If the person to whom you've are transferred the call doesn't answer it in about 15 seconds.. Alves' and Mr Sousa's phones will stop ringing. The call will be listened to by the people near that phone. Why is this useful ? This is useful for making quick announcements (for example: a short request for the sales team to gather for a quick meeting in the hall). This also happens if that person answers the call but hangs up the phone before you do.6. Related Topics: · Operation Key Codes (Prefixes) 8. Alves'. The result of a call directed at a group extension is that all phones in that group will ring: that's a Group Call. Mr Sousa's and Mr.. if you dial 5432 from your phone.3 Intercom Calls An Intercom Calls is a special kind of call for which the destination phone will automatically answer the call and go into loudspeaker mode. Mr Sousa's and Mr Carreira's phones will start ringing.How to do it? To end a Supervised Transfer and get back to the initial caller you can dial the Hangup Key Code (*0 is the default key code for Hangup but you can change it if you want to). Let's assume you've just created a new group of phones called whosincharge and you've chosen the 5432 extension for the group. then you added Mr.6. Critical Links. the call is transferred back to you. When anyone picks up the call on any of the group's phones all the others stop ringing.2 Group Calls Group Calls are calls directed at a Group extension number (instead of a Phone extension number). or to try to reach someone that might be nera the phone but might not be authorized to answer it without being specifically requested to. Mr. When you create Groups of phones you are prompted for an optional Extension number to be assigned to the group. Hangup a Supervised Transfer . Inc. Carreira's phones to the group. . that's how a Group Call works. if Mr Carreira picks up his phone first you will start talking to him. 8. all three. Give me an example.

The person at phone B does not ear your voice. then all phones that belong to the group will answer the call and go into loudspeaker mode). The availability of these features is restricted by the Phones Access Control policies and depends on the three phones involved: if any of the target phones can not be listened to.0 Help To make an Intercom Call you need to dial *9<number> (if you dial *9 followed by a group number. only phones with loudspeaker mode can receive such calls.6. while listening to the conversation between A and B. Call Whispering This feature consists in the ability to secretly talk to the person at phone A. To do this dial *990*<extension number>: you will listen the ongoing call at that extension. Inc. Additionally. You need to dial *991*<extension number>: your phone will allow you to listen to the ongoing call at <extension number> and you will be able to "whisper" to that extension. .150 edgeBOX 5. Phones currently supported for this feature are: · Snom · Linksys · Aastra · Grandstream · Polycom Related Topics: · Phones Access Control 8. only the person at phone A. instead of an extension number. without B's knowledge (just like whispering in the A's ears). or Critical Links.4 Call Listening and Call Whispering Call Listening This feature is gives you the ability of a user at a phone C to listen to a call between phone A and phone B. The access to this feature is can be restricted based on the Phones Access Control policies.

to some extent. Make sure to check out the details at the Phones Access Control section in this manual. Your phone will be able to pick up calls: · by pressing *8: will pick-up any call that belongs to any of the groups the phone belongs to.6 Twinning The Twinning feature can. disable and change the number of the phone the extension is twinning with. Related Topics: · Phone Groups 8. be managed directly through the phone: the phone user can enable.IP-PBX and VoIP 151 your own phone can not listen to calls. To: · Enable twinning: dial *90. · by pressing *8<group extension number>: will pick-up a call to that specific group. Twinning will be disabled. Inc. then none of this will be possible. Related Topics: · Phones Access Control 8.6. Twining will be now enabled. .6. · by pressing *8<phone extension number>: will pick-up a call to that specific extension. directly on the phone itself instead of the through edgeBOX (twinning must be allowed on that phone). to pick a call ringing at extension 2001. · Disable twinning: dial *91. · Change the phone your phone is twinning with: dial *92* followed by the phone Critical Links. dial the Pick Up prefix *8 plus 2001: *82001.5 Call Pick-Up Call Pick-Up is the ability to grab a ringing call at a given extension. Call Pick-Up operations are bound to the limitations defined for the Groups the phone belongs to (please make sure to review those settings in the Groups section of this manual). For example.

then.Dial *12* plus your extension number. dial *93 and the call you are answering in the cell phone will continue in the network phone. pick up the meeting room phone and dial *12*2013. · If you are close to the extension you want to forward calls to . *92*912154014 (to actually start the twinning process).Dial *13*.152 edgeBOX 5. if you have a meeting on a meeting room. You can't do this operation in edgeBOX's interface. Related Topics: · Twinning 8.0 Help number to twin with. for example.Dial *14* plus the phone number or the extension number you want your calls to be forward to. from now on if your work phone rings your cell phone will ring too.Dial *13* plus your extension number (example: *13*2013). For example. Calls that arrive at your extension will not be forward to another phone anymore. For example. Inc. . that you can pick up your extension and dial *14*4002.Allows you to forward calls that arrive at your internal extension to another extension or phone where you are at the moment. first. To disable Follow Me: · If you are close to your extension . Calls that arrive at your extension will not be forward to another phone anymore.7 Follow Me Follow Me . you should pick up your work phone and dial. this way all calls that arrive at your extension will be forward to your cell phone... Or you can indicate your personal cell phone number instead ( *14*912154103). if you are on a meeting room and you want to forward calls that arrive at your extension (ext: 2013) to the phone that is on the meeting room. let's assume your cell phone is 912154014 and you want your work phone to twin with your cell phone.6. *90 (to enable twinning) and. and there is a phone there (extension 4002). Critical Links. only in the network phones. show me an example. How to do it? To enable Follow Me: · If you are close to your extension . you can pick up the call on any of them. · If you are close to another extension . · Transfer an ongoing call from the cell phone to the work phone: on your cell phone. and all calls that arrive at your extension will be forward to the meeting room phone. All calls that arrive at your extension will be forward to the meeting room phone.

An e-mail message will be sent to the user's e-mail account. Related Topics: · Phone Groups and Access Control 8.CDR Critical Links.6. if the phone on the other end of the conversation belongs to a group that can not be recorded then the recording will not take place. Related Topics: · Logs · VoIP activity logs . Depending on global Voicemail configurations the sound file may or may not be attached to the e-mail. After the call finishes the file with the call recorded will be available at the user's Voicemail.9 Labeling CDR records with Cost Centers CDR Project Codes If. additionally.8 One Touch Recording Users can start the recorder by pressing *9 during the call. Inc. during a call. The availability of the One Touch recording (OTR) feature for a given call is configurable on a per Group basis and depends on the phones at both ends: if the phone trying to use OTR belongs to a group that can not record calls then the recording will not occur. The CDR files. . are available through the logmaster FTP account.IP-PBX and VoIP 153 8.6. the user dials #79<code> the call will be marked with that <code> in the corresponding CDR log line.

Inc. you can Change. the number users dial to access the service. Critical Links. · Static conferences: created by the administrator. additionally you will have an option to choose a moderatror PIN. If you want to. Any registered user may dial the pre-defined dynamic conference extension (9000 by default) and create a conference just by dialing any desired number. Conferences menu. The default is 9000.0 Help 8. Static Conferences This other type of conference is created by the administrator. · Conference Pin: type the desired conference PIN.. other users should to dial the pre-defined dynamic conference extension and enter the conference room number. That number will become the conference room number.to show you the current service administrative status. Two major types of conferences are supported: · Dynamic conferences: created freely by the users. Dynamic Conference service To enable dynamic conferences you need to start the Dynamic Conference service in the usual service bar at the top of the page: you should click the Start Service/Stop Service links on the right and the bar will change color .7 Conference Rooms You can setup edgeBOX's conference support in the IP-PBX section. · Security-enabled Conference: the access to this conference will be restricted to users that know the conference PIN.154 edgeBOX 5. To create a New static conference a two tabbed dialog window will show: General · Number: type-in the desired Conference Number (also known as the Room Number. To join this conference. · Music On-Hold: choose the music Playlist for this conference. . or Conference Room Number) · Type: you need to choose from · Public: this conference will be accessible by anyone that tries to join it and you can not specify a moderator. The list of static conferences configured is displayed in the list at the bottom of the Conferences menu..green or gray .

Configured queues are shown in a tabular manner. · Assign the calls to: this option allows you to specify the so-called Ring Strategy . · Have a moderator for this conference: check the box if you want a moderator and type-in the Moderator PIN and repeat for safety · Don't allow members to communicate until moderator joins the conference: check the box if you want this behaviour. . In the General tab you'll find: · Name: type a name for the queue (when editing an existing queue you cannot change it's name). Creating Queues To create a new Queue you need to press the New button (to edit an existing Queue the operations are similar).the algorithm used to assign calls to agents. The conference moderator has the same privileges as normal users plus Lock/unlock conference and Eject last user. · Announce when a user joins or leaves the conference: select or deselect the check box. While in a conference. 8. you can choose one of the following options: Critical Links. · Conference Pin: 9910. and others. · Moderator Pin: 9911. you can press the * to listen to the available options like increase/decrease volume.8 Managing Call Queues The Queues menu in the IP-PBX section allows you to manage edgeBOX's call queuing system. This popup contains two main tabs. Inc. mute. An appropriate dialog window will popup. edgeBOX is shipped with a pre-configured Static Security-enabled conference for your convenience: · Number: 9010.IP-PBX and VoIP 155 Advanced · Maximum: maximum number of simultaneous members the conference may accept.

allowing them to have the phone on-hook as apposed to the standard method of having the call into the queue system always on going. Dial *22 followed by your by the User PIN number (see IP-PBX Authentication for more details).0 Help · The agent that picks up the phone first (all ring). select the users you wish to assign to the queue and click the Next button. Inc. This agent login method is useful for agents that are not fully dedicated to answering queue calls. the last screen shows you this assignement. followed by the # key. the extension where the agent has logged in will ring. when you click the Add button please choose: · Add Extension: this option allows you to add extensions to the Queue. without requiring the agent to have the phone off-hook (on call) to receive calls. Using this service whenever a call from a queue needs to be delivered to an agent. · The agent that answered less calls. · The agent that has been longer without calls. users that don not have a PIN will be assigned one.156 edgeBOX 5. The status of the callback login service is controlled by the service bar at the top of the page where you can Start and Stop the service. Callback Extension. · Add Agent: this options allows you to add users to the Queue. which is the extension number of the callback login service. 2. Together with the status of the service there's also a parameter that you can change. a new popup will give you a list of users. How can an agent login? The standard login for an agent is through the following steps. these extensions will be used by the queuing system to assign calls to. agents and/or extensions must be assigned to the queue. select an extension from the list and hit Add. In the Advanced tab you get to configure several advanced features of edgeBOX's queues. Type your password (same as the User PIN number). Please follow the details here. in order for it to function correctly. whoever is near that extension will now start receiving calls from this queue. · Agents: since queued calls are answered by the queues's agents. then. · Each agent in turn. . Critical Links. this way you can assign calls to users in a way that is independent of the extension the user might wish to use when starting work. you can use the Add and Remove buttons to manage the contents of the Agents list for each queue. CallBack Login Service CallBack agent service is a way for agents to be logged in. · Each agent in turn but keep track of the order. An automated attendant will answer. 1. · A random agent.

followed by # key. followed by the # key. This method is very useful for "professional agents" that use an headset and are 100% dedicated to answering queue calls. 3. · Indicate the postition in the queue every . seconds: select this box and choose the time interval for edgeBOX to update the caller about his position on the queue. . which is the User PIN number (see IP-PBX Authentication for more details).IP-PBX and VoIP 157 3. followed by the # key. 4. also remember to select the check box immediately below if you want the users to get also an estimate remaining time for the call to be answered. When asked by the extension number. just type # key. or you can · Play music from the Music On Hold library: in this case the caller will listen to music while waiting. How can an agent login through Callback Service? The steps for an agent to login at the Callback Service are: 1. An automated attendant will answer. Type your password (same as the User PIN number). 8. you should additionally specify: · Playlist: select the desired playlist from the drop-down list. 4. and listening "Music on-hold". An automated attendant will answer. Dial the Callback Login Extension (by default the number is 8000).8. 3. which is the User PIN number (see IP-PBX Authentication for more details). Calls delivered to the agent will be proceeded by a "bip" sound. followed by # key. Critical Links. Dial the Callback Login Extension (by default the number is 8000). It will be logged in as long as the phone stays off-hook (on call). At this point the agent is logged in. Type your agent number. 2.. Type the extension number where the calls to this agent shall be delivered. How can an agent logout through Callback Service? The steps for an agent to logout at the Callback Service are: 1. Inc.1 Advanced Settings for Queues In the Advanced tab you get to configure several optional features of edgeBOX's queues: · Waiting Sound: you can choose to · Play the regular ring tone. 2. · Calls Hangup: · Hangup the calls in the queue when there are no agents online: check the box if you want this. Type your agent number. Type your password (same as the User PIN number).

729? You need to download the codec from Digium web site. it has the lowest latency as no type of compression is used. Very High. which will then upload the file to the edgeBOX. besides being supported by most VoIP providers. · Other Settings: · Maximum Number of simultaneous calls waiting · Relative priority of this queue: Low. Thus. It is the codec used in PSTN and ISDN lines. It is the most commonly used codec for VoIP calls because. Inc.711 (ALAW): Basically. Each license you purchase allows a single simultaneous use of the codec. to be able to use it you have to activate it and purchase. the fourth person will not be able to use this codec. · G. this codec uses a small amount of bandwidth providing an acceptable quality of sound. If there isn't a specific system requirement. The codec to purchase is: codec_g729a_v32_i386 in the asterisk-1. Medium.. · Speex: Audio codec designed specifically for speech. you will need to activate the license(s) (which will be locked to your edgeBOX hardware). · Dialogic ADPCM: This is a legacy codec. High.9 Codecs Codecs are used when converting an analogue voice signal to a digital one. the choice should be ULAW. by pressing the activate button.711 version used in E1 European lines. kept for compatibility with version 3 of edgeBOX. This codec is selected by default in edgeBOX. 3 users can simultaneously use the codec. · G. x86-32 directory on the Digium site. because it is compatible with most phones and softphones available on the market. a G. However. . Provides good quality sound.711 (ULAW): Known as the native codec in modern communication lines. This codec is selected by default in edgeBOX. at the expense of bandwidth. unless one of the current users has completed their call. seconds: please activate the box and choose the time in seconds if you want this behaviour for calls that don't get an answer in time. Critical Links. · GSM: Usually used on European mobile networks. · Agent Answer Time 8. select the browse button and choose the codec file and then the upload button.158 edgeBOX 5.729: Offers good sound quality with conservative use of bandwidth. The choice of the codec to be used usually results from a compromise between sound quality and bandwidth used. if you purchase 3 licenses. and as such. After downloading to your PC.4. How to activate G.0 Help · Hangup the calls that are not answered in . After uploading the file. edgeBOX supports several types of codecs allowing a flexible client configuration. well suited for VoIP. Audio Codecs · G.

H. you can.722: High quality voice codec. · H. or MPEG-4 Part 2). RTSP (streaming media) and SIP (Internet conferencing) solutions as well. and PBX networks if the PBX networks are configured to support ADPCM. Create a new fax account 1. this is the number people use when they sent faxes to your company. half or less the bit rate of MPEG-2. fill this field with the e-mail account of your company's receptionist. It was first designed to be utilized in H. · G.261: An 1990 ITU video coding standard originally designed for transmission over ISDN lines on which data rates are multiples of 64 kbit/s. for example. respectively). You may also send a fax via e-mail.320 (ISDN-based videoconferencing). 8. you will need to enter the License ID and other details which you entered when you purchased the License (as shown below).IP-PBX and VoIP 159 After pressing the Activate button. The standard supports CIF and QCIF video frames with resolutions of 352x288 and 176x144 respectively (and 4:2:0 sampling with chroma resolutions of 176x144 and 88x72. 2. this is commonly known as HD-Voice. H. FAX Number: the DDI associated to your FAX line. · iLBC: Low bit rate · G.726: ADPCM can be interchanged between packet voice. .10 MailFax Service With the MailFax service you can send faxes (via a software modem) from a fax machine to edgeBOX's fax gateway. Go to the MailFax Accounts menu. A dialog window will appear: FAX Account: Incoming Fax Settings 3. but has since found use in H. Video Codecs: · H. PSTN.263. The data rate of the coding algorithm was designed to be able to operate between 40 Kbits/s and 2 Mbits/s. · H. The e-mail will be converted to fax format and sent to the remote fax machine.263: is a video codec designed by the ITU-T as a low-bitrate encoding solution for videoconferencing. You can find the MailFax Accounts menu in the IP-PBX section. FAX Account: Outgoing Fax Settings 5. This fax is then converted to an e-mail and sent to the fax mail account. Click the New button in the MailFax Accounts list.323 (RTP/IP-based videoconferencing). 4. Press Activate to complete the process. Inc. E-mail address: enter the e-mail address account of the person of your company that will receive all incoming faxes.324 based systems (PSTN and other circuit-switched network videoconferencing and videotelephony). incoming faxes are converted by edgeBOX to e-mails and then delivered at this e-mail address. Fax E-mail Account: type the name of the e-mail address that will be used by the Critical Links.264: Is a standard video codec capable of providing good video quality at substantially lower bit rates than previous standards (e.g.

· Password means the users can send e-mails from any e-mail account. if they have their edgeBOX e-mail account configured on Outlook and they send a fax through it. usually this will be the DDI you typed above. button. Display Company Name: your company name to be displayed at the top of faxes sent bty edgeBOX. How to send a fax using MailFax service? Critical Links.160 edgeBOX 5. Display Number: your fax number. for example. but if they send the fax through a Gmail or Hotmail account or through an e-mail account of another edgeBOX. edgeBOX converts the received faxes to pdf files and sends them as e-mail attachments to the fax reception e-mail account you specified. in the Incoming section: 7. the fax will not be accepted. Retry Attempts: the number of times edgeBOX tries to send a fax when the number it is trying to fax to is busy. select the desired language for the mailfaxes Attachment format 5. for example. by default. Also. choose PDF or TIFF From E-mail 6. however they have to specify a password on the body of the e-mail to authenticate.0 Help network users to send e-mails that will be converted to faxes. Authentication 9. The From field in the e-mails sent by edgeBOX with the incoming FAXes. You can change the format the attachments and the language of the e-mails sent by edgeBOX. Go to the MailFax Accounts menu in the IP-PBX section. Inc. then the fax server account will be fax_account@example. · Local means the network users can only send e-mails from the Webmail or from the edgeBOX local SMTP server. Please enter: E-mail Language 4.com. 8. A short 3 fields summary displays the current configurations. a new dialog will come up.. indicate from which e-mail accounts users can send the emails and if they are required to indicate a password. · Local + Password means that the users have to use the Webmail or the SMTP server of edgeBOX to send the e-mails and they also have to specify a password in the body of the e-mail to authenticate. Change the type of the attachments. In the Authorization Type. if you type fax_account and the domain on edgeBOX is example. . change the language or change the From field of the emails By default. 2. 3. edgeBOX sends all the faxes it receives as e-mails to the e-mail account you specified in English language.com. For instance. To change any of these settings: 1. 6. the fax will be accepted.. click the Change.

it will convert the file in attach into a fax and try to send it to the phone number you indicated in the Subject of the e-mail. If authentication is required. Inc. Enter the e-mail address of your edgeBOX fax account in the To field. 2. type PASSWORD: plus the fax account password in the first line of the body of the message. 3. After edgeBOX receives this e-mail in the fax e-mail account. A little while after. Open an e-mail client as Thunderbird or Outlook or edgeBOX's Webmail and create a new email. 5. Send the e-mail. Note that the document cannot have more than 25 pages. you will receive an e-mail from edgeBOX indicating if edgeBOX was able to deliver the fax to the recipient or if it couldn't deliver it because of some error or because of the receiver fax being busy. 4.IP-PBX and VoIP 161 Related Topics: · Voice Lines · E-mail server 8.10. 6. Convert the document you want to send to PDF or TIFF format and add it to the e-mail as an attachment. Critical Links.1 How to send a fax using MailFax? Lets suppose you wish to send a invoice to a customer: 1. In the Subject type the fax number of your client. .

In the popup dialog please enter: Extension Type the extension to be used for users to listen to voicemail.0 Help 8. this is important as some e-mail servers may reject this e-mail if the sending domain (the part at the right of the @ in the address you type) is unresolvable. Go to the Options menu in the IP-PBX section.729 Codec License · Billing Interface Service · Asterisk Manager Interface · Network Address Translation (NAT) 8. Inc. Click the Voicemail options.11 Advanced VoIP Options Several VoIP related advanced features are accessible via Options menu in the IP-PBX section.1 Voicemail When you created your SIP. · Name: the name to be used as the sender of the e-mail.11.. · Attach sound file: Yes or No. wether edgeBOX sends the voicemail file attached on the e-mail warning about voicemail. · Voicemail · Call Parking · Automatic Call Recording · Operation Key Codes · Customize Sound Files · Define Country Zone · Echo Cancellation Options · G. if users experience instability or don't receive the e-mail warnings please make sure you are using a resolvable domain. E-mail message from · Address: e-mail address to be used in the From field. E-mail body Critical Links.. . Additionally. or does not exist. link to further specify other details. In Voicemail you'll fin the current settings for: · Voicemail Number: 9999 is the default value.162 edgeBOX 5. several global options allow you to configure the way users access their voicemail and the way the feature works globally. Analog or IAX phones you were prompted to configure individual Voicemail account for each.

Blind Transfer... Critical Links.. 8. Voicemail quotas Click the Properties. Pickup a call and Hangup operations.11.11. link and enter the values desired for: · Number to dial for parking: you need to dial this number for a call to be parked. The Operation Key Codes area shows you the current configuration for those operations. You can rise or lower the available parking base number and the park size.3 Operation Key Codes If you need to change the current key codes for the Assisted Transfer. · Language: language used in notification messages. IP-PBX section.. · Max length of message: voicemail messages longer than this will not be saved. and immediately puts the conversation on hold. · Parking Max Time (seconds): enter the parking maximum time.. You can up the parked call from another internal phone later on by dialing 703 on the desired phone. · Signature: signature of the notification messages. in seconds. The pre-configured park numbers ranges from 700 to 714. Inc. button and enter: · Max Messages: Maximum number of messages that a user can have in his/her mailbox.2 Call Parking Call parking allows a person to put a call on hold at one telephone and continue the conversation from any other telephone set. The Phone Operations section in this manual shows you the details on the usage of these codes. Go to the Options menu in the IP-PBX section. 8. 703 as example. after this period the call is hungup. park size. but you can change this). In the end. press the Save button. link and change the keycodes as needed. . Hit the Change the keycodes. as usual.. Click the Call parking options. if you wish to save your changes. · Min length of message: voicemail messages shorter than this will not be saved. This action transfers the current telephone conversation to an unused park extension number. you can do it in the Options menu. It is activated by dialing the parking number (by default 700. · Parking available lines: total number of parking lines available.IP-PBX and VoIP 163 · Attach sound file to e-mail: check this box if you want the voicemail file to be attached to the e-mail notification messages.

In this process edgeBOX may be configured to playback instructions to the caller or warnings of several types. 2.0 Help 8. edgeBOX will use the language pack correspondent to the Country Zone definition in the Options menu. 2. 3. 5. Select a sound bank file from your file system (. both in the IP-PBX section. Upload a custom sound file 1. for convenience. 3. You can access it in the Related Topics area of the Incoming Call Rules menu or. · System Sounds: contains all sounds used natively by the PBX. Click Open. Incoming Call Rules menu. Select My Sounds package. The sound files are divided in three groups: · My Sounds: your own custom sounds.4 Customize Sound Files edgeBOX can use sound prompts in several situations such as the process of receiving and routing an external call to a Queue for example. Incoming Call Rules menu. you can reach it at the Customize Sound Files. like the voicemail prompts. 4. 5. where you can upload new sound files to be used in Automated Attendants..164 edgeBOX 5.gz or . Click Add. Select the Sound Manager option at the Related Topics section. Go to the IP-PBX section... 4. . or Automated Attendants.11. Click the Browse button and select a sound file from your file system (.zip format). You can now use this sound file when creating Incoming Call Rules. Enter a description for the file (usually a text script of what the sound says). Critical Links. The language pack will now be listed below System Sounds with the name of the language (like Portuguese). Select the Sound Manager option at the Related Topics section. Inc. Upload a language sound bank 1. Click Add button and select Sound File option. etc. and select Sound Bank option.tar. Click Add button. 7. The sound files used to accomplish this are accessible to you through the Sound Manager dialog.gsm files).. 6. · Language sounds: sound packages that contain system sounds translated for a given language. conferences. Go to the IP-PBX section. link in the Options menu.

Inc.5 Define Country Zone To configure specific regional/country settings go to the IP-PBX section and click the Define Country (Zone). · Language: User may want to selected a language for the sound prompts different from the country tones applied to the phones. 8. edit as needed. and selected a different language.. Usually produces much better results where KB1 and MG2 fail. edit as needed. · OSLEC: Stands for "Open Source Line Echo Canceller". user must check the checkbox. · International Prefix: may be filled by default. and thus all CURRENT CALL WILL BE TERMINATED! Critical Links. · MG2: A variation of KB1 to solve some of the scenarios where KB1 fails. and it's considered the best configuration option for software echo cancellation. The software determines the best configuration from the initial line characteristics and preserves the settings for the period of the call. which have echo cancellation checked.11. Note that the soundbank for the selected country must be installed. the default sound bank will be used (system sounds). This setting will apply country settings to three different areas: · The tone zone for all analog cards (if installed). · National Prefix: may be filled by default. The echo cancellation will only be applied to analogue phones.IP-PBX and VoIP 165 8. Changing echo canceller will issue a restart of the VoIP service engine. A popup dialog will open: · Zone: choose the appropriate country/zone for your needs. . · The language for the sounds prompts. This is the built-in Zaptel echo canceller since Zaptel v1. if not.6 Echo Cancellation This panel offers a range of choices to allow for software echo cancellation.11.. link in the Options menu. This is important because the ring and busy tones may differ from country to country · The frequency of the generated tones for the PBX phones. It's an evolution of KB1 and MG2 using a different approach. If this is the case.2. The options are: · KB1: The default echo canceller.

Show me an example If the billing software can only be used from computers on the local network.729 Licensing G. unless one of the 3 calls has finished. What is billing software? Billing software is an application used to calculate call costs. After downloading the codec to your PC you can install it with the help of edgeBOX's webadmin interface. Please go to the Options menu. Thus. Activate the Allow computers with billing service to connect to edgeBOX option and fill in the rest of the deitails: Authorized Computers Only the IP address(es) specified will be allowed to access the Billing service: · Only from a specific computer: type in a host IP address. ..168.255. link. In the following screen just fill in the license details as obtained from Digium and finish up the process.0. 192..4. and then the netmask of your network. then you have to indicate the IP address of your local network.128. if you purchase 3 licenses. Billing software can connect to edgeBOX's calls database. in the IP-PBX section and click the G.. Options menu.0. 255.11. 192. for example. x86-32 directory on the Digium site.729 installation wizard. Click the Billing Interface Service options. Each license you purchase allows only one usage of the codec at a time.digium.166 edgeBOX 5.90.0 Help 8.168. the duration of the call or the user that made the call. such as Easylink for example. · Only from a specific network: type in a network IP address and a Netmask. 3 users can simultaneously use the codec. only hosts on this IP segment will be allowed.729 Codec License. Inc. 8. the line used. to connect to edgeBOX's database.7 G.8 Billing Service Allow billing software.com.. retrieve that information all calculate and the cost for a billing service. To allow billing software to connect to edgeBOX go to the IP-PBX section. The codec to purchase is: codec_g729a_v32_i386 in the asterisk-1. edgeBOX saves all important information about calls.11. as the time of the day a call was made.90. for example. the fourth person will not be able to use this codec. You will be requested to browse your computer for the file and then you need to click Next. only this IP address will have access.729 codec. Once there hit the Run the G.. If it can only be used from a specific computer of the local network then you need to type the fixed IP address of that computer. Critical Links. link. You need to download the codec from the Digium web site www.729 Licensing This panel allows you to add support for the G..255.

allowing you such diverse administration options as placing calls remotely or receiving events related to the state of calls and extensions. If at any time you don't need to allow the Billing Interface anymore just deselect the Allow computers with billing service to connect to edgeBOX option. Authorized Computers Only the IP address(es) specified will be allowed to access the Manager Interface · Only from a specific computer: type in a host IP address. link and select the Allow computers with manager interface to connect to edgeBOX option. · The database structure: . · Only from a specific network: type in a network IP address and a Netmask.Database Name: edgereporting . To configure the Manager Interface go to the Options menu in the IP-PBX section. Configuring your billing software To connect the billing software on a computer to the edgeBOX. · The port used for the billing service: TCP port 5432. Inc.. only hosts on this IP segment will be allowed.Table: cdr . . only this IP address will have access. · Repeat Password: repeat for verification.9 Manager Interface Manager If you enable the manager interface you will be able to establish a telnet connection to edgeBOX's IP PBX. This interface may be useful if you own some kind of monitoring software which you want to integrate with edgeBOX. In the end you will need to allow the Billing service in the Firewall.. · Password: the respective password.Fields: all fields of the cdr table 8.11. Critical Links.Database Model: Asterisk . Follow the Asterisk Manager interface options. you need to indicate: · The username and password you specified on edgeBOX when you activated the billing service. depending on the billing software you will use.IP-PBX and VoIP 167 Authentication Here you must configure a username and a password for the manager software to be able to access edegBOX: · Username: a username to be accepted by edgeBOX used for authentication.

168 edgeBOX 5.0 Help

Authentication Here you must configure a username and its password for the manager software to be able to access edegBOX: · Username: a username to be accepted by edgeBOX used for authentication; · Password: the respective password; · Repeat Password: repeat for verification. In the end you will need to allow the CTI service in the Firewall. If at any time you don't need to allow the Manager Interface just deselect the Allow computers with manager interface to connect to edgeBOX option.

8.11.10 Advanced NAT
You need to configure Advanced NAT if you have a scenario where edgeBOX does not connect directly to the Internet but is behind a Router with NAT and Port Forward, and you want to allow remote phones (a phone you have at home, for example) to register in edgeBOX and behave as internal extensions.

That being the case, please go to the Options menu in the IP-PBX section and follow the Network Address Translation (NAT) options... link. The Advanced NAT settings dialog window will come up. To indicate that edgeBOX is behind a router: 1. Activate the My box is behind a router with NAT option. 2. Indicate in the following field below the router WAN IP address or its hostmane.

Critical Links, Inc.

IP-PBX and VoIP 169 3. If you have local networks that are managed by the router and you have phones on those networks, select the option I have additional networks with phones to be served, and then, in the table below add an entry for each of those networks. Learn More... edgeBOX can detect phones that are on its local networks (LAN, DMZ and the VLANs). However, as you have a router in front of edgeBOX you may also have local network managed by the router. And you may also have phones on those networks. edgeBOX cannot recognize these phones automatically because it is not managing these networks. So you need to indicate to edgeBOX the networks so it can recognize the phones and allow them to register.

4. Click the Save button to save the settings. 5. To finish, you need then to configure on the router port forward from port 5060 of the router to port 5060 of edgeBOX.

8.12 Music On-Hold
Music On-Hold (MOH) allows you to specify a number of Playlists to be used when putting calls on hold. Playlists are lists of sound files to be used in several possible situations: · Queues: you can specify the playlist to be used on a per-queue basis (see the Queues section); · Conferences: you can specify the playlist conference members will listen to while they wait for the conference to start (please refer to Conferences section); · ICR: you can choose the playlist to be used for each call (see Incoming Call Rules).

Critical Links, Inc.

170 edgeBOX 5.0 Help You gain access to the Music On-Hold (MOH) configuration popup from the Related Topics corner in the Queues, Conferences and Incoming Call Rules menus in the IP-PBX section. It displays the current playlists on the left side. If you click a paylist you'll get it's contents on the right side. You can upload your own MP3 sound files to edgeBOX. These sound files will be kept in edgeBOX's MOH Gallery. You'll be able to build your own playlists by choosing sound files from the Gallery. Managing Playlists To add a new playlist just hit the New button and select Playlist. A new dialog will ask you for: · Playlist: enter the desired name for you new play list; · Play tracks randomly: select this box if you wan the tracks from this list to be played randomly. To add tracks to the Playlist choose the play list you want to add files to, click the New button and choose Track. The Gallery pop's up. Just select the tracks you'dd like to add and press Ok. You've just added a new track from the Gallery to your playlist. For each sound file displayed you can execute several actions with the buttons at the top: remove that file from the list, bring that file to the top of the list, bring it up one position, bring it down one position and bring in to the bottom if the list. Managing the Gallery To access the Gallery click New button and choose Track. The Gallery window will popup: · Available Tracks: at the top, a list shows you the available sound tracks in the gallery; · Delete: deletes tracks from the gallery; select a track and hit Delete to remove a track from the gallery; · Upload Track...: use this button to search your computer for more MP3 files to add to the Gallery.

8.13 Automatic Call Recording
edgeBOX can record phone calls automatically. The recordings are kept in edgeBOX internal storage. You can, at any time, access the recordings by FTP, download them to your computer and erase them to avoid disk space saturation. If you wish to activate this service please go to the IP-PBX section and choose the Options menu. Once there, search for the Automatic Call Recording area. You get a short summary showing you: · Status: states witch types of calls are currently configured for automatic recording; the possibilies are: Not recording any calls, Record all calls, Record all incoming calls, Record all outgoing calls; · Disk Usage: a coloured horizontal bar will show you, in graphical form, the relative disk space your call recordings are currently taking up.

Critical Links, Inc.

IP-PBX and VoIP 171

Hit the Call Recording options... link to configure the service. The Automatic Call Recording popup appears. As usual, you can globally enable and disable the service by hitting the Start Service / Stop Service options at the upper-right corner.

Types of Calls and Maximum disk size The types of calls being recorded and your current disk occupation are shown just below the service status bar. Hit the Change... button to configure this: · Record incoming calls (includes internal calls): select this option to record incoming and internal calls; · Record outgoing calls: select this option to record incoming and internal calls; NOTE: Select both of the above options to record all types of calls; unselecting them both is the same as not recording any calls; · Maximum disk space for recordings: type in the maximum amount of storage space you allow for recordings; above this value edgeBOX will not record calls any more; All call recordings are made available through the logmaster FTP account. Through that account you can download and delete any call recordings. If the recordings take up more than the configured maximum space you need to remove the current recordings from edgeBOX. After removal the recordings will continue automatically.

Phones, Groups and Queues to be recorded The table shown, displays the phones, groups or queues currently configured for recording. Click Phones to filter table in order to show you only Phones; the same applies for Phone Groups and Queues. Click All to display all entries. You need to specify which phones, groups and queues you wish to record. To do this, click the Add button. From the drop-down list select Phone, Phone Group or Queue; from the list shown select the entries you want and click the Add button. Queues will only be recorded if the incoming/internal check box is selected. Please note that the permissions defined in Phones Group Access Control will be applicable, so if you have a group of phones with call recording disabled, those calls won't be recorded.

In order to remove an entry, or several entries, from the list, just select them and click the Remove button. The same goes for the process of adding new entries to the list.

Critical Links, Inc.

172 edgeBOX 5.0 Help

8.14 VoIP activity logs - CDR
You can obtain the VoIP activity log files (also known as CDR) via FTP with the logmaster account. They are stored with the filename Master.csv (the current log file). The log files are rotated daily (Master.csv.1-7) and kept for seven days, after which the oldest file is overwritten by the new log file. The entries in the Log file have the following meaning: accountcode src dst xt clid channel dstchannel lastapp lastdata start answer end duration billsec disposition amaflags uniqueid What account number to use (Only used when Authentication is enable) Caller*ID number Destination extension Destination context Caller*ID with text Channel used Destination channel if appropriate Last application if appropriate Last application data (arguments) Start of call (date/time) Anwer of call (date/time) End of call (date/time) Total time in system, in seconds (integer) Total time call is up, in seconds (integer) What happened to the call: ANSWERED, NO ANSWER, BUSY Flags used: DOCUMENTATION, BILL, IGNORE The unique ID for this call

8.15 Default Predefined Phone Numbers
The initial edgeBOX configuration uses a set of pre-defined phone numbers (that you may eventually change overtime). These are: · Voicemail: 9999

Critical Links, Inc.

given the importance of the Emergency number . please make sure to review and configure it's Outgoing Call Rules. Related Topics: · Voicemail · Parking · Conferences Critical Links.715 · Conferences: 9000 · National Prefix: 0 · International Prefix: 00 · Emergency Number: 112 (for EU countries).IP-PBX and VoIP 173 · Call Parking: 700 . Inc. .

managing network users is an essential part of edgeBOX.174 edgeBOX 5.0 Help 9 Users In the Users section you can manage Network Users. ability to make some or all kinds of phone calls. Inc.1 Authentication Authentication is the process by which your network users identify themselves before edgeBOX when using the network. remove or change network users · Assign a Phone to a user · Configure Privileges network and service access · Assign a configurable set of administration capabilities to a Local Administrator user · Manage User authentication locally or remotely with Active Directory. This section lets you: · Add. such as access to the Internet. Authentication and access Privileges . . This process is fundamental for all subsequent access authorizations or denials in several possible situations. LDAP and RADIUS · Configure Groups · Customize the login page for user authentication Related Topics: · Connected Users · Groups · Local Administrator · Phones · RADIUS 9. and many more. Critical Links.

. furthermore. Inc. this additionally allows you to have specific users accessing specific services and other users being blocked and granted access to different sets of services. More on this. Managing Network Users edgeBOX is shipped with two pre-configured users. Critical Links. edgeBOX will still manage granting and revoking of access by means of a default access profile. You might wish to: · Add or change a network user · Configure Privileges for users · Configure local authentication · Configure a remote Active Directory. The password is "password" for any of them.1. Their usernames are "user" and "user2". Why should I do this ? It renders your network more secure: access to the network and network services will be granted only if the user successfully logs-in.Users 175 Even if you choose not to use Authentication.1 Managing network users You can allow everyone to use your network and the network services. RADIUS or LDAP server for autehtication Related Topics: · Connected Users · Local Administrator · Phones · Firewall · RADIUS · Groups 9.. the All Users Privilege. Managing Authentication comprises several related aspects. or you can assign specific permissions for granting and revoking access to specific users or groups of users. You can use them to review their configurations and to do quick experiments.. This permits an optimal usage of resources such as bandwidth and processing power.

to check which type of calls the user has permission to make. National.. in this case the process is the same as in the IP-PBX section . you can rise or lower this value. . Inc. you won't be able to add or import any more users. Disk Space. you should choose among the Privileges in the drop-down list (as configured in the Privileges menu). if he tries to login from a thrid host he will not be able to... what are the rules for choosing a username. each of these types includes it's predecessors: National calls include Local calls. Mobile calls include both National and Local calls. A three tabbed dialog appears: General · User Name: First and Last name (up to 127 ASCII characters are allowed). options are Free. Sessions: users can be logged-in from 2 computers by default. Mobile. Disk Usage · user's current disk usage and · maximum allowed. ? and the password. leave the password field blank if you do not wish to change his password.see details. · User PIN Number: the pin to be entered if the IP-PBX authentication is turned on.0 Help To add or manage existing users go to the Network Users menu in the Users section of the administration web interface. if you need. When editing an existing user. ? · Newtork Access Privilege: determines the network privileges plolicy for a group of users. If you reach the maximum number of users your licence offers.. Click the New/Edit button... Phone (VoIP) · Allow the user to make phone calls (VoIP): use the Select Phone.. International and All Types of Calls. To create or import new users on the edgeBOX you need to delete existing users first or upgrade your edgeBOX solution.. A short overview is provided with a summary of user details including phone extension and online status. you can change this: click Change Max. that means that each user may have 2 computers logged into the network with his credentials. button to immediately add a new phone. for convenience you can also use the Add Phone. learn more about Privileges. and so on. button to search the list of existent phones and assign one to this user. · Network Login Information: username and password.. Local. like the services they can use or the type of internet access they get.. This way the password will not be altered. · VoIP Call Permissions: please select the type of calls this user can make.... See details about the different edgeBOX solutions in edgeBOX's website.176 edgeBOX 5. · Max.. Critical Links.

The reverse operation is also possible. you'll find two buttons that allow you to Import and Export the users list.1. the file generated will be named Export_21-0609_11. This process may take a few minutes. · Step 2: a list is presented with all the available and correct users found in the file. the process will create a new CSV file in this folder. Export By clicking Export you'll trigger a dialog window asking you to select a Folder in your computer's hard-drive. You can.. You can add a number of network users to the edgeBOX by Importing them from a CSV file in your computer. please wait. at any time.1. The Import function allows the import of users with the possible following settings: · Name (first and last) · Username · Password ... Inc.. a CSV file from your computer's hard drive. hit Next. select from the left the ones you wish to add and click the Add button to add them to the list on the right.Users 177 9.43... · Step 3: a final list with details about the users being imported is presented.. click Next.if field is empty one will be provided · Extension Number · Extension Name · User PIN number Critical Links.csv Import An appropriate wizard-like dialog will popup with a detailed explanation of the process: · Step 1: read the specifications and Browse. · Step 4: one last step will Export back to your computer a list of the Imports done. 2009. Press Finish. the file name is automatically chosen. If you export you users at 11:43 on 21 June. . Users section. Export the users list onto a CSV file.1 Importing and Exporting Users In the Network Users menu.. see an example.

Critical Links.phoneextension. firstname lastname.pin. firstname lastname.accessprofilefirstname lastname..username.... duplicate extension names or duplicate extension numbers.0 Help · Privilege Some of this fields are mandatory: Firstname + Lastname and Username.178 edgeBOX 5..privilege firstname lastname... privilege About importing users: · You can only import users if you are managing the network users on the edgeBOX. that is.phoneextension. as a LDAP server.username.phonename....username.phoneextension.phonename. username. VoIP fields are only considered if they are valid and if both are present (if only extension number is provided.username.phoneextension.phonename. ...password. if possible): extensionnumber and extensionname.username.username.privilege firstname lastname.password. If you try to import users with duplicate usernames.password.firstname lastname. firstname lastname.phonename.username.phonename...pin..pin.password.phonename.phoneextension. How must the information be arranged in the CSV file? The available options are: firstname lastname.. firstname lastname.username.. those entries will be ignored. Inc.privilege firstname lastname.phoneextension. depending on the existent users) If we try to import entries with duplicate PIN numbers.username. for instance.password. If we import entries were we have defined valid extensions (name and number) those extensions will be added to system and the extension's password will be equal to the user's passwords. you will be asked if you want to: · keep the existent user · replace the existent user with the new one · keep both and change the new username to "username1" (or "or username2".. if you are not using Remote Authentication. extension name will be equal to the username. The other fields will only be taken into account if present and valid... etc.

then again. link below the Disk Space.. If you choose to authenticate users locally.2 Default Quota When creating new users a default quota is suggested. button. Type-in the value you need. as configured. regrading the usage of system access Privileges.. If it is not already active. If you Critical Links. this might be a good reason to configure it. If you want to change it go to the Options menu in the Users section. Choose the Authentication Method you want from the Change. all Users and Privileges are stored internally in edgeBOX's internal database. But. Inc. then you need not to worry because the Firewall settings will fallback to an "allow" approach. · remotely using: · a remote Active Directory server. Click the Change. edgeBOX will grab these credentials and authenticate users using. that's all the configuring you'll need.2 Activating Authentication After you have setup your Users you might want to increase the security and manageability of your network by activating Authentication: users will be required to enter their username and password into a Web based authentication page. 9.1. If the Firewall wasn't previously active. Authentication requires Firewall: when starting the Authentication Service you'll also need to activate the Firewall service.. an appropriate dialog message will inform you that the Firewall will be activated.Users 179 9. at the upper-right. System access Privileges with Authentication Active When you start the Authentication service the message below will be displayed. To activate authentication go to the Network Users menu in the Users section.1. this might be a good time to review your Firewall settings as they may potentially interact with users Privileges.1. For the remote authentication methods please refer to Using Remote Authentication. one of the following methods: · locally: this is the default authentication method.. Please read it carefully: You are about to Start the Network Users Authentication Service. · a remote LDAP server or · a remote RADIUS server. If the Firewall was already active. Press Save and hit the Start Service option. .

180 edgeBOX 5.0 Help proceed you have to take the following into account: 1. The "All Users" Privilege will not be displayed in the Privileges Panel since Network Users will be asked to authenticate themselves. 2. The "Not Authenticated Users" Privilege will be displayed in the Privileges panel. This Privilege will be applied as a default rule for all non authenticated users, so one must take into account that configurations of this Privilege may affect users that fail authentication or even before they are requested to authenticate. 3. If you have previously changed the "Not Authenticated Users" Privilege those changes will now be loaded. 4. Changes that you may have done to the "All Users" Privilege will be kept and will be loaded the next time you switch OFF the Network Users Authentication. 5. You may reset the "Not Authenticated Users" privilege by opening the Privileges panel and selecting "Reset Not Authenticated Users privilege to factory configurations".

System access Privileges with Authentication Stopped When you stop the authentication service the message below will be displayed, regrading the usage of system access Privileges. Please read it carefully: You are about to Stop the Network Users Authentication Service. If you proceed you have to take the following into account: 1. The "Not Authenticated Users" Privilege will not be displayed in the Privileges Panel since now there won't be any unauthenticated users. 2. The "All Users" Privilege will be displayed in the Privileges panel. This Privilege will be applied as a default rule for all users, so one must take into account that configurations of this Privilege may affect users from other Privileges. 3. If you have previously changed the "All Users" Privilege those changes will now be loaded into system. 4. Changes that you may have done to the "Not Authenticated Users" Privilege will be kept and will be loaded the next time you switch ON the Network Users Authentication. 5. You may reset the "All Users" privilege by opening the Privileges panel and selecting "Reset All Users privilege to factory configurations"

Critical Links, Inc.

Users 181

9.1.3 Using remote authentication
edgeBOX allows you to use remote user authentication. With remote authentication, users are authenticated in a remote server instead of the edgeBOX when they try to login to the network. The whole process is transparent for the user as edgeBOX will do all the work. To activate remote authentication go to the Network Users menu, Users section. Choose the Authentication Method you want from the Change... button, at the upper-right. The currently supported methods are: · Authenticate users on a remote Active Directory Server, · Authenticate users on a remote LDAP Server, · Authenticate users on a remote RADIUS server. In each there's a convenience Test Connection button that allows you to verify basic connectivity to the specified server. When you're done press Save and hit the Start Service option. Please refer to Activating Authentication for common details about the Authentication service. Activating remote authentication will purge all your locally configured users. An appropriate warning, in red color, is displayed warning about this.

Related Topics:
Details about edgeBOX's authentication architecture

9.1.3.1 Using a remote RADIUS Server To authenticate users on a remote RADIUS server type-in: RADIUS Server · IP Address: type the IP address of the remote server; · Password: to be used to access the RADIUS server; · Port: the TCP port to be used on the RADIUS server (defaults to 1812); · Timeout: maximum time waiting for the RADIUS server (defaults to 5 seconds); Privileges Verification Choose if you wish that the access Privileges to the network services (E-mail, Internet, Secure

Critical Links, Inc.

182 edgeBOX 5.0 Help connections, etc.) are always verified in the remote RADIUS server and not locally. How to configure a RADIUS Server to perform users authentication and authorization? · Authenticate users on the remote server but verify the privileges in system · Verify also user's network privileges on the remote server Why is this useful ? This might be useful if your company is already using a RADIUS server for authorizing users on several other services, besides edgeBOX's ones; in this situation it makes sense to have all Authentication and Authorization relegated by edgeBOX into those servers As users login for the first time, and their authentication is verified in the Remote RADIUS Server, their information is saved in the edgeBOX users list. Still, each time the users tries to login, the authentication will be done in the remote server.

9.1.3.2 Using a remote LDAP Server Using an LDAP Server to authenticate the network users: there's an option to toggle between Basic Mode and Advanced Mode. Type-in:

LDAP Server Basic Mode · Domain: the LDAP domain; · Group: the optional LDAP Group; · Username: to be used by edgeBOX's LDAP client to access the LDAP Server; Advanced Mode · Base DN: see example below box; · Bind DN: see example below box; Common to both modes · IP Address: type the IP address of the remote server; · Password: to be used by edgeBOX's LDAP client to access the LDAP Server; · Port: the TCP port to be used on the LDAP server (defaults to 389); · Timeout: maximum time waiting for the LDAP server (defaults to 5 seconds);

Critical Links, Inc.

Users 183 Privileges Verification Choose if you wish that the access Privileges to the network services (E-mail, Internet, Secure connections, etc.) are always verified in the remote LDAP server and not locally in the edgeBOX. · Authenticate users on the remote server but verify the privileges in system · Verify also user's network privileges on the remote server Why is this usefull ? This might be useful if your company is already using an LDAP server for authorizing users on several other services, besides edgeBOX's ones; in this situation it makes sense to have all Authentication and Authorization relegated by edgeBOX into those servers. As users login for the first time, and their authentication is verified in the LDAP Server, their information is saved in the edgeBOX users list. Still, each time the users tries to login, the authentication will be done in the remote server.

When you are using remote LDAP, the network users have first to login one time using the LAN user authentication before they can login in the domain for the first time.

9.1.3.3 Using a remote AD Server Using a remote Active Directory Server to authenticate the network users: there's an option to toggle between Basic Mode and Advanced Mode. Type-in:

LDAP Server Basic Mode · Domain: the Active Directory domain; · Group: the optional AD Group; · Username: to be used by edgeBOX to access the Server; Advanced Mode · Base DN: see example below box; specify the active directory domain configured in the Base Name field; · Base DN 1, Base DN 2: You can set up two additional Base DN. Authentication System will try to search and authenticate users in these locations also. To enable the text fields

Critical Links, Inc.

184 edgeBOX 5.0 Help please select the check boxes on the right of each field; to Learn More... In more elaborate scenarios the Active Directory server might have users spread over serveral Organizational Units (OUs); if that is the case, edgeBOX can be configured to search users in all those OUs. An example follows, for a situation where users should be searched in three OUs (ouone, outwo and outhree), and the administrator user belongs to OU ouone: Base DN: OU=ouone,cn=local,cn=loc Base DN 1: OU=outwo,cn=local,cn=loc Base DN 2: OU=outhree,cn=local,cn=loc Bind DN: cn=administrator,OU=ouone,cn=local,cn=loc

· Bind DN: see example below box; Common to both modes · IP Address: type the IP address of the remote server; · Password: to be used by edgeBOX's LDAP client to access the AD Server; · Port: the TCP port to be used on the AD server (defaults to 389); · Timeout: maximum time waiting for the AD server (defaults to 5 seconds); · Copy the users information from the AD Server to the system's user list: check this if you'dd like edgeBOX to copy information from the AD server into the internal users list. As users login for the first time, and their authentication is verified in the Remote AD Server, their information is saved in the edgeBOX users list. Still, each time the users tries to login, the authentication will be done in the remote server. If the Active Directory server in not reachable, and only in this case, then, the authentication system will try to authenticate users locally.

When you are using remote AD authentication, the network users have first to login one time using the LAN user authentication before they can login in the domain for the first time.

9.1.4 Customize the user login web page
If your looking for information regarding Default User Quotas please follow this link. In the Users section - Options menu you can customize several aspects of the appearance of the login page the local users of the network will use to authenticate:

Critical Links, Inc.

directly inside the zip file. · The zip file can not contain any folders or sub folders. and type and try to open a random website. button and select the image with the logo from your computer. Click the Change the company name and information text 2. Click the Select Image. To show a welcome message and the company name in the login form 1. 3. · Upload a customized authentication page with your own style. this text can contain HTML. CSS and image files. your CSS file(s) and your images. one or more CSS files and one html file only. The new login page with the changes you made will appear. See Activating Authentication for details. · Change the company name and information text. 2. that is. Click Change the Company Logo. That is if the Authentication service is running. Show the requirements of the files. View the changes To view the changes and the appearance of the login page. Upload the files for a custom login page You can upload the files for your custom login page to edgeBOX to have a login page with a completely different appearance. if you enter HTML in this field the browser will display it correctly. go to a computer of the local network. Type-in the Company Name 4. .. · You must include the code <!--AUTHENTICATION--!> in the place where you Critical Links. create a Zip file (. All files must be all at the same level. After creating your HTML file.zip) with all these files. Use a custom login page Completely modify the look & feel of the login page by uploading your own HTML. Press Save. To do so: 1. open a web browser.. Type-in the desired Information text. Network users will only see this page if they are required to login.Users 185 · Change the Company Logo. All most common image formats are supported. Click the Upload button save the image to the edgeBOX. 3. Inc. To change your Company logotype 1. · The zip file can contain image files.

· DMZ: same as for Internet..186 edgeBOX 5. Services. Boss-10. the World Wide Web). Click the Save button to upload the zip file to the edgeBOX Related Topics: Manage the firewall properties 9. This code will then be replaced by the necessary code for the login form. 4. Click the New.. examples: a-b. choose simple but meaningful names like 'no-restr'. to access further tuning details. An overview table is shown. Select the Upload a customized authentication page with your own style option. 2. after you can enter any sequence of letters and digits.. in the Users section provides the means for bulk management of your network users and to control their access to the services and areas your network offers. by configuring access Privileges (policies) to which users will be assigned.. Inc.h. . "[a-zA-Z][azA-Z0-9]*[-]?[a-zA-Z0-9]*[a-zA-Z0-9]". a list showing all current Privileges. what are the rules for the Privilege name ? the name must start with a letter (lower or upper case).0 Help want the login form to be placed in the HTML file. Click the Browse button and select the Zip file from your computer in the dialog window. hit the Advanced Properties.h. Advanced and Devices: General · Name: the name by which this Privilege will be identified.. A dialog window will popup with four sections General. button. the basic options are to Allow access to the Internet. 3..2 Privileges The Privileges menu.m and . a123.. On the left. a single '-' can also be used excpet for the first and last postions. 'servers35' or 'vips'.m and Do not allow access to the Internet. Services Critical Links.. Click one of them to get a summary of it's configurations on the right panel. · Internet: here you determine how and when your users can reach the Internet (same as saying "the world beyond edgeBOX". Allow access to the Internet between .

The list below the three options shows the services available for the users with this Privilege. on a per-Privilege basis.1x Authentication: these users will be able to authenticate in edgeBOX be means of the IEEE802. Advanced · 802... this option is relevant only when you have a switch or switches in your network infrastructure that support dynamic VLAN assigment. These services will be available for those users if you choose the 1st or 2nd option.m: same as the previous on but service is granted only within the given time of day period (please take into account that a delay of up-to 5 minutes may occur. Services not included in this list will not be accessible by users in this Privilege.h. .. Use the Add and Remove buttons to edit the list (this list will not contain the DNS nor the Webadmin services as they are always accessible for host in the internal network). · Allow access to edgeBOX services listed between . while trying to use your network services.m and . the edgeBOX services accessible by the users: · Allow access to edgeBOX services listed: users in this Privilege will have access to the services in the list. additionally you should specify if they will have access to the LAN. This is where you determine.h. one of the supported L2 switches with this feature is the Procurve 2650. to this VLAN. or limitations. with this feature active the switch will automatically move the switch port. don't choose this option. workgroup or domain services).1x authentication. · Do not allow access to edgeBOX services: access is denied regardless of the composition of the list. Please note: these are services running on edgeBOX. Give me an example If you don't add the Samba service to the list of accessible services. Temporary Shared Folders or Windows Shared printers (Samba is a short term for any windows file sharing. Inc. See edgeBOX services for a short description of all services available here.Users 187 This panel is of utmost importance as it directly affects the way your users experience network access. that is because these rules are re-applied at most. · IPSec: if these users will be able to access IPSec VPNs..1x. additionally you may specify whether you wish to assign a specific VLAN for these users.. to learn more. no users in this Privilege will be able to access any File Sharing related resources. · Remote Users: if these users will be allowed to connect to the PPTP VPN.. every 5 minutes). · VLAN Routing: a listo of rules specifying inter-LAN-VLANs routing permissions for these Critical Links. if you wish that the users of this access profile belong to the LAN network instead. not services provided somewhere else but accessible through the edgeBOX. where the user is connected and after a successful 802.

a profile may also contain IP addresses.. what type of traffic these users will be allowed to exchange with the other VLANs in edgeBOX.. Indicating a range is most useful when you. How do I restrict access to certain types of web sites ? edgeBOX contains a web filter that allows you specify Website Restrictions based on words present in the website's URL or domain. Use the left side buttons to manage the list. Related Topics: · Local Administrator · Firewall · RADIUS devices authenticating in edgeBOX · Remote Authentication and Authorization · Adding Users and changing their Privileges Critical Links. Devices IP Addresses to which this Privilege will also be applied.. Besides containing users. for example.. that machine is allowed the access rights of the profile. You can indicate a specific IP address of a machine or you can indicate a range of IP addresses. Additionally. without the usual login screen. see details. This allows the machine to automatically authenticate with the edgeBOX..0 Help users.188 edgeBOX 5. Inc.. . you can block overall access to certain IP addresses by using a block-all type rule in the Advanced Firewall Rules. If an IP is added. see more details. see details. want all devices of a VLAN to be automatically authenticated. How do I restrict access to services other than edgeBOX services ? You can block overall access to certain IP Addresses and/or Protocol services/ports by using the Advanced Firewall Rules.. see details..

The list will display all your rules in an easy to read manner. port and/or protocol. The sequence by which rules appear in the list can be relevant and you can use the Up and Down buttons to change it Inbound Rules By default all incoming Internet traffic is dropped: all connection attempts coming from the Internet are denied. to learn more. For each rule: Critical Links... Thres tabs are presented: This panel presents three tabs: Quality of Service · Class of Service for Upload Traffic: here you can choose to apply the usual Gold. Click the Add button to add new rule or Edit to change an existing one. For each rule: · Policy: choose Allow Access or Deny Access (tipically you'll want to add Deny rules here). individual ports or even port ranges like 21. · Protocol: All. . This means that traffic from the internal network to the Internet is granted access.somewhat similar to a Firewall configuration. By default all outbound traffic is allowed. Click the Add button to add new rule or Edit to change an existing one. · Class of Service for Download Traffic: the choice here is Best-Effort or Premium. TCP (you can choose All ports. Here you can allow incoming traffic based on its origin. Bronze and Best-Effort traffic classes or your own Pipes.and network services allowance/denial .assigning traffic classes to users . if you have configured any. to learn more.Users 189 9. port and/or protocol. UDP (same as TCP) and ICMP. as specified by an IP Address and a Netmask). a short Description string should also be added. Inc. Silver. 500-600).2.. The approach is based on QoS aspects .. You can allow or deny outgoing traffic based on its destination. 80.1 Fine tunning Internet and DMZ access This panel allows you Advanced Configuration options for defining how users access the Internet (same for the DMZ). · To location: Any (connections to any host). Network (connections to a specific IP segment. 22. Device (connections to a specific IP Address). Outbound Rules Rules to control access to the Internet.

500-600). · To Address: Any (connections to anywhere). Network (connections to a specific IP segment. Nevertheless. For each rule: · Protocol: All. UDP (same as TCP) and ICMP. Click the Add button to add new rule or Edit to change an existing one. The sequence by which they appear in the list can be relevant. Critical Links. 500-600). as specified by an IP Address and a Netmask). TCP . if you have specific needs you can overcome this default behaviour by indicating exceptions: locations (services/ports) on other VLANs the users will be able to access even though not belonging to that specific VLAN.2 Access to other VLANs Inter VLAN Access By default.190 edgeBOX 5. TCP (you can choose All ports. individual ports or even port ranges (like 21.0 Help · Policy: choose Allow Access or Deny Access (tipically you'll want to add Allow rules here). Related Topics: · Firewall · QoS 9. · To Ports: if TPC or UDP are selected you can choose All ports. 22. Device (connections from a specific IP Address). Device (connections to a specific IP Address). the sequence by which they appear in the list can be relevant and you can use the Up and Down buttons to change it. 80. 22. Inc. Please note that controlling access for Inbound traffic may be particularly useful in some very specific scenarios such as situations where edgeBOX might act as a router for inbound traffic directed at specific IP addresses that might belong to each Privilege. This also includes the LAN. UDP and ICMP.2. . · From location: Any (connections from anywhere). as specified by an IP Address and a Netmask). As for the outbound rules. It's good practice to keep your VLANs isolated from each other: that's one of the advantages of using VLANs. 80. individual ports or even port ranges like 21. you can use the Up and Down buttons to change it. The LAN is also know as default VLAN. users in a given VLAN cannot communicate with users of other VLANs. · Protocol: All. Network (connections from a specific IP segment. a short Description string should also be added.

com. The local administrator is one of the users of your local network that you give the permission to manage parts of your network and configure some of your services.. in the Users section. A short descriptive table is shown with the currently configured groups. 2. With a browser. Learn more details about edgepacks at edgeBOX's website. Click the New. use the Add Users. edgepacks. and Remove buttons to manage the contents of the list. (or as an alternative.. users can be part of one group. Inc.. point the browser to the IP address of any of the WAN or LAN interfaces.Users 191 9. the local administrator has to: 1. open the webpage https://myedgeBOX. What are edgepacks? edgePACKs are optional modules for edgeBOX that add functionalities for particular markets or add a new set of features. this will be needed only if edgeBOX is not your DNS server) Critical Links.. you should to use Privileges instead. Click the Local Administrator option. in the Related Topics corner. their description and number of users in each. 9. . How can local admin user access the edgeBOX web interface? To have access to the edgeBOX. button.4 Delegate a Local Administrator Go to the Users section. Some examples are: edgeLMS and edgeDESKTOP.3 Groups You can use groups if you have edgeBOX third-party applications. Go to a computer of the local network (LAN). several groups or no group at all. someone that can access some sections of the edgeBOX web interface. Groups have no direct use in the edgeBOX or the network. If you need to manage groups go to the Groups link in the Related Topics corner. A dialog window will popup: · Name: choose a name for this group · Description: Type-in a short description · Users: the list of users that belong to the Group. If you want to create groups of users that have common privileges and types of accesses in your network. Network Users menu.

Inc. Create a local administrator of the edgeBOX To make a user of your network local administrator hit Select. click the link Login.. you need to check the ones you want. You can collapse and expand the tree by clicking the '+' and '-' signs. Type the username and password he uses to authenticate to the network. Click the Login button.192 edgeBOX 5. and choose from the list. edgeBOX initial page 4. . View an example Critical Links.. Each section (main menu option) of the edgeBOX is represented by a branch and the menus inside it are represented by subbranches. 5. 2. Check the areas you want the local administrator to have access to. A tree like data structure is presented.0 Help 3. Now you need to indicate the areas and functionalities of the edgeBOX the local administrator will have access to: 1. After the page opens.

Users 193 3. edgeBOX has a backup and restore option that allows you to make backups of all the configurations and data. and a some time later you changed the local adminitrator to 'david_parker'. View example For example. However. Remove the local administrator Just hit Remove on the dialog window If you restore an old backup. . Click the Save button. if your local administrator was 'john_simmons' and you made a backup of the edgeBOX at that time. Critical Links. Inc. and now you restore that old backup you made. for security reasons local administrator settings are not saved in edgeBOX backups. the local administrator will not change. your local administrator will still be 'david_parker'.

· VLAN Assignement: check this if you want edgeBOX to assign a VLAN when performing Critical Links. go to the Users section and hit the RADIUS option in the Related Topics area.194 edgeBOX 5. · Type of device: select the most appropriate from the drop-down list.5 View currently Connected Users If you need to get a list of Users connected to the system you can do it: just navigate to the Users section and click the Connected Users in the Related Topics corner. · Login: the user's username (or login name). · Password: the password edgeBOX will use to access the device and encrypt RADIUS packets. · MAC Address: the hardware address of that host/computer. · IP Address: the IP Address of the host/computer from which the user made his login. among other settings: · IP Address: the device's IP Address. It will show you a table with the list of users currently authenticated. You'll need to specify their IP Addresses and the type of device.6 Configure authorized RADIUS clients When you need to authorize network devices to access RADIUS authentication in edgeBOX. Related Topics: · How do I add more users ? · How do I configure network access privileges ? 9. The details are: · Name: the user's full name. Inc. . · Name: the device's name. · Privilege: the Privilege under which the user is logged.0 Help 9. · Confirm Password: retype the password.

You must use a compatible port based authentication device. the edgeBOX internal RADIUS server sends the correct VLAN id to this switch according to the User Access Profile. Name is any text you wish to enter. Supported EAP methods: PEAP-EAP-MSCHAPv2 and EAP-TTLS. If you select the "HP ProCurve 2650" drop down. This page allows you to view. Some of the devices supported include 802. Critical Links. If you select the Generic 802. These are normally called NAS (Network Access server). This feature allows the remote port based authentication device to put the user in the correct VLAN. Inc. independently of the port / SSID the user is currently connected. This option allows the Procurve switch to put the user in the correct VLAN.1x switches with dynamic VLAN assignment like the Procurve 2650 or the Procurve 420 Access Point for Wireless communications with multiple SSID and dynamic VLAN assignment. the edgeBOX internal RADIUS server sends the correct VLAN id to the Switch or Access Point according to the User Access Profile. The edgeBOX supports different types of 802.1x port based authenticators. and after a successful 802.Users 195 authentication for this device. the IP address is the IP of the Switch and the password the login password of the switch.1x Access Point or Generic 802.1x user authentication. If "VLAN assignment" is checked. . Name is any text you wish to enter to identify this unit. independently of the port the user is currently connected. the IP address is the IP of the AP/Switch and the password the RADIUS client password configured in the remote AP/Switch. If "Enable Dynamic VLAN assignment" is checked. delete and add remote RADIUS clients for user authentication.1x Switch from the drop down list.

enter the desired Date and Time into the popup dialog and press Save. temperature and hard-disk usage statistics · Configure a Remote Management server 10. your Timezone or use an Internet time server · Change the language or the administrator's password and e-mail address · Shutdown or Reboot · Manage Software Updates . Otherwise just hit the Adjust. Date and Time menu..1 Adjusting Date and Time To adjust time related settings please point the browser to the System section. the current Time. Inc. button. In that case your Date and Time are adjusted automatically. perform Restore operations and scheduled Backups · Configure edgeBOX's Hotbackup redundancy system · Receive e-mails and SNMP Traps when relevant status changes occur · Review or download system logs and configure logging to a remote log server · Send user's Accounting records to a RADIUS server · Globally enable/disable the embedded SNMP Agent · Schedule regular maintenance operations to optimize edgeBOX's relational database performance · View and change the status edgeBOX's main network services · View the current status of your hardware devices. Critical Links. Adjusting date and time is not possible if you have configured an Internet Time server.. .196 edgeBOX 5. like fans.and receive related notifications by e-mail · Backup edgeBOX settings and user files to a secure medium.0 Help 10 System The System menu allows you to configure a variety system related aspects of the edgeBOX: · Adjust the Date.manually or automatically . There you can view and adjust edgeBOX's date and time and synchronize with a preferred Internet Time Server to keep the date and time always accurate.

3. Internet Time Synchronize the date and time with a Time Server on the Internet You can use a time server on the Internet to keep date and time always accurate. Critical Links. button.168. Inc. edgeBOX can also work as a Time Server so you can synchronize all your network devices as phones. 2.. if edgeBOX's hostname is ebox and the network domain is example. Hit the Change. 3. Click Change. For example.254. Go to the device's date and time settings. The status/time of the latest synchronization is shown.System 197 Time Zone Change the time zone 1.100. edgeBOX will try to synchronize with the selected server every day. This way you can keep an the same. time on every device of your network.. computers and servers with edgeBOX. . Select the Syncronize edgeBOX date and time with a time server on the Internet option at the top. To do that you can type in edgeBOX's IP address or edgeBOX's hostmane. 2.com or 192. accurate. 3.. then you can type ebox. Indicate that the the time server you want to synchronize with is edgeBOX. How to synchronize all the network devices with edgeBOX's date and time Besides synchronizing its date and time with an Internet Time Server.168. 1. Press Save.254. Search for the option to Synchronize with an Internet Time Server.com and edgeBOX's IP address is 192..example. Select the NTP server you want to synchronize with from the list.. 2. If edgeBOX's date and time is delayed more than 1000 seconds (17 minutes) edgeBOX will not synchronize and create an entry in the Log Viewer and send a notification by e-mail. Pick the world Zone from the list on the left and the City closest to edgeBOX from the list on the right.100. To synchronize a device with edgeBOX's date and time: 1.

System E-mail Messages edgeBOX sends several types of system related messages . Inc. shutdown or restart edgeBOX. If you find that this password is not working correctly. example. How do I choose a good password ? Shutdown or Restart You can.such as warnings or available software updates. Hit the Change e-mail. and type the desired new password in both the New Password and the Confirm text fields. If you do not wish to receive e-mail messages just choose the Do not send system messages option..0 Help 10.. you need to edit it yourself. The browser will reload the management interface with the newly selected language. the admin password is by default the word root. Administrator Password When the edgeBOX is installed.2 Administration To change edgeBOX administrations settings you need to navigate to the Administration menu in the System section. by e-mail.com is an invalid e-mail address.. Critical Links. Also. .com is not a valid public domain and thus edgeBOX may find problems in delivery to the final domain.. A warning message will inform you of the fact. Choose the Send system messages to: option and fill in your email address (this is the e-mail address to which edgeBOX will send system e-mail messages). The default sender e-mail address edgebox@example.. you can change it to a valid e-mail to avoid problems with E-mail Servers because E-mail Servers usually perform validation of domains when they deliver e-mails. So. button. and select the desired one from the list provided. then you should contact your reseller. Language edgeBOX's web management interface supports several languages. To change the password click Change Administrator's password. The recipient of these e-mail messages is not specified by default. It is made of the word edgebox and edgeBOX's default internal domain: example.com. Click Change language. just choose the option you need and press Ok. at any time..198 edgeBOX 5. You can change it to a valid address so people can reply to those messages.

· choose the Notify me when updates are available option to receive a graphical notification in the Dashboard.. you will receive Critical Links. Please go to the System section.the edgePaks. · receive automatic e-mail messages with information about new software updates..3 Managing Software Updates The updates available are new functionalities. Software Updates menu.edgeBOX will let you install them manually. download new software packages and. Inc. · have software updates managed and installed automatically. Status The menu displays a short summary information stating whether you should check for available updates or if there are already updates available (this second information is automatic if you configure automatic checking for updates). if you need to: · get a list or install available software updates. · Install Updates: installs available updates. You can also ask edgeBOX to check for updates and install them automatically.if updated software packages exist they will be automatically downloaded but not automatically installed . security updates or performance enhancements. depending on your choice.System 199 10. · Check and install updates automatically: this will make edgeBOX connect to the update server. · View Update Log: reports all the updates that have been applied to edgeBOX. Clicking on the buttons you can perform the following operations: · Check Now: will immediately check for new updates. without installing them. Hit the Change. · Check for updates automatically but let me install manually: edgeBOX will check for software updates . · install edgeBOX's third party applications . the list can be cleared by clicking on the Clear Entries button. Automatic Updates You can manually check for and install available updates. But you can also make edgeBOX check for updates and notify you of the updates so you can install them yourself. . button: · Disable Automatic Updates: edgeBOX will not try to check for updates.

if services restart is needed or if a full restart is needed nothing will be installed. · Also notify me by e-mail: notifications configured in the previous options will also be sent by e-mail to the administration e-mail address. 13h15m and 19h15m. please note the following two options. see example. 7h15m. starting at 13h15m. If you want to check every 6 hours. 12 or 24 hours. if this is the case. If an error occurs while edgeBOX is trying to update. restart the services that need to be restarted. · Starting at: the base hour/minute at which the check will be started. all downloaded packages will be installed.System section .0 Help notifications.. a notification will be displayed in the web interface indicating you the problem and asking you to try to install the update again. then nothing will be installed and you will receive a notification accordingly. · Notify me when Services restart is needed: you should choose this option if your network users can not tolerate any restarting of services or restarting edgeBOX itself. if applicable. if necessary. edgeBOX will check four times a day at 1h15m. execute a full restart or. you should go to the administration web interface. you will receive a notification. Common Settings · Check every: you can choose to trigger the software updates check task every 6.and execute the installation manually (and any needed restarting. otherwise software updates will be installed and the needed restarting of services will be carried out. · Notify me when System reboot is needed: choose this option if don't mind that some services may need to be restarted but you don't want edgeBOX to perform a full restart automatically.200 edgeBOX 5. similar to the ones in the previous option. as part of the process). you need to use the administration web interface to execute the installation manually (and the needed reboot as part of the process). Inc. in this situation. if no restarting whatsoever is needed.. navigate to the Software Updates menu . The following options are available: · Notify me when Updates are installed: in this situation edgeBOX will actually install the downloaded updates and. . Critical Links. this approach may not be the most appropriate for your needs.

.. · Multiple edgeBOXes can use the same directory. These backups can be stored either on a remote FTP server. · Restore is supported from the same architecture to the same architecture only. or a Windows File Share.7). additionally the Restore operation always requires a system reboot in the end. Restore Here you can manually restore backup files from either a Windows Share. as the backup files have a unique prefix associated with an edgeBOX · Full backups and Incremental backups are supported · The backup can not be stored in the edgeBOX it self. · Local USB disks can not be formatted as NTFS. pop and e-mail services are stopped when executing a Backup. Please note: the imap. an FTP server or a local Critical Links. . if you prefer a time based schedule of cyclic backup operations.. · Restore is only supported from the same version of the Operating system to the same version (eg v4. The following notes aplly: · Backups may only be created/restored to/from a local USB disk.System 201 10. or on a USB disk connected to the edgeBOX. It's important to setup a backup policy from the start. Inc. · Both the Backup operation and the Restore operation cause edgeBOX to stop several system and application processes (eg VoIP and authentication). this means that while the Backup is running edgeBOX will not be able to receive or send e-mails and users will not be able to read their e-mail. to prevent the loss or corruption of data. remote a Windows File Share. if at any time you need to execute a Manual backup.. a remote FTP server. · Schedule.4 Backup & Restore edgeBOX can schedule backups to occur periodically at a predefined time.7 to v4. Backup Using the buttons provided you can choose to: · Backup Now. day and date.

Click on View details to be assured of the details. Once all the relevant fields have been entered. Lets assume.0 Help USB disk. Finally. you should click Restore to perform the operation. It will not automatically create the folder.4. Click any of them to get a list of the corresponding Backups points-in-time. The options are: FTP Windows Share USB Critical Links. A dialog will popup with a confirmation telling you that. edgeBOX will be rebooted.. press Save to immediatelly start the backup.. If you select an incremental backup. the following backup policy: · Sunday: Full Backup · Monday to Saturday: Incremental Backup If you restore the Wednesday Incremental. or Windows share or USB disk) does not exist. Give me an example. button to select the device where the files are stored and enter the appropriate details (the details needed are in all similar to those described for the backup operations). the backup will fail. . The list on the left will show you all the available Full backups. in the end. the system will restore a) this backup and b) all appropriate incremental backups and the c) the appropriate full backup..1 Immediate Backup Manual backup allows you to undertake a backup immediately. as example. Inc. Selecting one of the three possible backup destinations: · Use an FTP server from the network · Use a Windows Shared folder from the network · Use a USB Flash disk attached to edgeBOX It is not possible to save the backup locally on the edgeBOX itself. Press the Change.202 edgeBOX 5. If the folder specified (for the FTP server. the system will also restore the Tuesday and Monday Incremental and the Sunday Full backup.. 10.

4. See examples. you can select which one you will use to store the backup files. For full and incremental backups.2 Scheduled Backups This panel allows you to specify a scheduled backup regime.System 203 Method: FTP allows you to select Method: Windows Share allows an FTP server which will store the you to select a share from a backup files windows server. Critical Links. Port: FTP Port (usually 21) Folder: Which folder on the FTP Folder: Which folder on the server where the backups will be Windows Share will receive the stored backup files Use Authentication: If checked Use Authentication: If checked Folder: Which folder on the the username and password fields the username and password fields USB device. Backup Destination A summary information is displayed stating the current Backup destination details. where the backups will be active will be active will be stored Username: The username of the Username: The username of the account you are going to use on account you are going to use on the FTP server the Windows File server Password: The password of the Password: The password of the account which you are going to account which you are going to use on the FTP server use on the Windows File server 10. which will store the backup files Server: IP address of the FTP server Server: IP address of the Windows Server Method: USB allows you to select a local USB disk (Not NTFS formatted) which will store the backup files Refresh Devices: Will scan the local USB devices and present you with a drop down list to enable you to select the device which will store the backup files Device: The chosen device (You may have more than 1 USB disk connected) on which the backups will be stored Partition: If the device has more than 1 partition... Inc. .

The dialog presented for this purpose equal to the one in the Immediate Backup section. the backup will not take place). you can pick up exactly the day(s) you want the backup to be executed. Full Backup You may create (or disable) a schedule for full backups. The scheduling possibilities are: · Day: · Every Day: the operation will take place every day. to change the destination medium of your scheduled backups. · Every Week: any day of week. If you schedule them at exactly the same time (hour and minute) the Full backup will take precedence and the Incremental backup will not occur. at the top right corner. button. You can choose to perform backup operations onto an FTP server.212) · Backup destination: Windows share (192. · Every Month :once a month. a Windows share or an external USB storage. choose a day of the month (please note: if you select a day such as the 31st and the month has less than 31 days. except if you have configured Incremental Backups: the execution of an Incremental backup assumes the execution of a Full backup at some point in time.0 Help · Backup destination: FTP server (212. so that you can fit the backup tasks to better suite your company's Backup policy.100.204 edgeBOX 5. every day from Monday to Saturday The Full and Incremental backups should not be scheduled to occur at the same day and time (it does not make sense to execute both of them at nearly the same time as the Full backup will render the incremental backup useless or a waste of time and processing power).168. Scheduling Several scheduling approaches are possible.55) · Backup destination: USB flash disk Hit the Change..13. you would schedule: · Full Backup: on Sundays at 04:00 and · Incremental Backup: at 04:00. Typically. Critical Links. The same options are available for Incremental as for Full Backups..13. . Inc. Incremental Backup Incremental backups backup the files which have been modified since the last Full or Incremental Backup.

the Hotbackup menu. Assumptions and pre-requisites The stable operation of the Hotbackup feature assumes a set of pre-requisites which must be assured by the adminitrator: · The base hardware on both edgeBOXes must be exactly the same and the extra function cards installed on each must be identical and plugged into the same connectors. the Hotbackup process will not be possible. For example.. Inc. So if you plan on executing full backups on Sunday and incremental backups on all other days..the Slave. . Netmask.to manage the network and daily replicate its configuration and data to the other edgeBOX .. button: 1. allows you to configure one of them . you should manage both edgeBOX's updates manually and not automatically. Indicate below IP Address.the Master . if you update only the Master with a new revision of the edgeBOX's software. · The Slave and Master must have identical operating system releases and revisions.System 205 · Hour and Minute: the exact time of day at which the task should be started.5 Using HotBackup for redundancy Using two edgeBOXes. See details. NOTE: incremental backups are valid only if there is already a full backup.. Select the Configure this edgeBOX to act as the Hotbackup Slave option. edgeBOX's networking is reduced to a minimum necessary only for the Master to be able to access the Slave and replicate it's configs and data Critical Links. The Slave edgeBOX works as a backup (hence the name Hotbackup). Default Gateway and Nameserver to be used in Slave mode. Incremental backups taken before the first Full backup are invalid and should not be used. ready to take over the Master's place if a failure occurs. in the System section. you should start the process on Sunday. 10. 2. in Slave mode. To assure this. Using Hotbackup Setting edgeBOX as Slave To set edgeBOX as a Slave edgeBOX (backup edgeBOX) hit the Change.

It will only work as a backup for the Mater edgeBOX. edgeBOX will search for the Slave. the replication is made every day at that time. when edgeBOX has finished entering Slave mode an appropriate text mode screen. To make your edgeBOX run in Master mode. or remotely via ssh. button: 1. then you could choose for the Slave 192.0 Help onto it. in Slave Mode only the LAN interface is active and it's IP basic configurations are the four values you entered in the previous step. Critical Links. in the VGA terminal. keep in mind that this setup is not the only solution). 4. Set your edgeBOX as the Master edgeBOX You can only set your edgeBOX to run in master mode after you have an edgeBOX configured and working as a Slave edgeBOX. Click the Save button. during dawn. If you have an edgBOX with LCD display.255. validate it's configuration and start working as a Master edgeBOX. the Slave must be accessible to the Master through the network. in order to make the replication. you can view an "S" in the top right corner of the LCD.. When you set edgeBOX in Slave mode. Choose a time of day when your network has less activity.255.206 edgeBOX 5.0. Inc. indicating that the edgeBOX is running as a Hotbackup Slave. edgeBOX will reboot and run in Slave mode. please. you can view an "M" in the top right corner of the LCD. click the Change.255. if you have an edgBOX with LCD display. Ethernet Wiring: you can choose any IP address you wish. you will be able to access it using it's command line interface. 3. The most simple way to wire up this setup is to choose for the Slave an IP address which falls into the Master LAN segment.100.. Also. This way you will be able to perform a limited set of commands that are specific to the Slave Mode.255. Still. For example. for example. because. if your Master has LAN address 192.0 and connect the Slave LAN port the the same switch as the Master LAN port (but. as long as the Master edgeBOX can access the Slave through TCP/IP. it's a good idea to have a VGA and a keyboard connected to the Slave in order to get a better grasp of the process. will help you determine and remember these settings. indicating that the edgeBOX is running as a Master edgeBOX.253/255. the Master edgeBOX has to stop a considerable amount of services to grant that the configuration and information are correctly replicated.168.100. Indicate below the IP address of the Slave edgeBOX and the time of day at which you want to replicate the configuration and data from the master to the slave. 3.254/255.168. . Click the Save button to start the process. you loose access to the web interface and you can no longer use the edgeBOX for managing your network. either locally using a keyboard/VGA or a serial console. 2. that's the interface to which you should connect your ethernet cable. Select the Configure this edgeBOX to act as the Hotbackup Master option.

if the operation fails you will get a detailed diagnostic message. Make the Slave edgeBOX take-over if the Master edgeBOX fails If your Master edgeBOX (the edgeBOX that is managing your network) is malfunctioning and you need the Slave edgeBOX (backup edgeBOX). to take over it's functions: 1. if you have an LCD unit then just srcoll down Critical Links. Please wait.System 207 Please note: you should avoid performing administrative tasks close to replication time. button and select the Disable Hotbackup option (this operatin will not perform any change of configuration in the Slave). To do this just click the Replicate Now button. edgeBOX will stop replicating to the slave edgeBOX.. you loose access to the web interface. edgeBOX has to stop a considerable amount of network services. in order to replicate correctly. Make sure that your network has few activity when you ask edgeBOX to replicate. Still you can ask the Master edgeBOX to replicate at any time. To do this just hit the Check Slave button. please consult the Slave's logs via CLI commands hotbackup view replica status or hotbackup view slave log. If you are configuring your Master and the replication procedure starts. then hit the Change. the replication of the Master edgeBOX's configuration and data is made everyday at a given hour that you defined when you configured the Hotbackup process. please avoid doing any other tasks while this one is running. . This operation may take a very long time. If the Master determines that the Slave is not reachable or inconsistently configured a detailed message will be displayed. Note that. In the end you will bet an Ok saying that everything went all right. Inc.. As a practical rule do not use the GUI or the CLI at replication hours. Before initializing the process. As stated above. All other services will continue working normally. Still you can check its connectivity status from the Master. Stop edgeBOX from being in Master mode If you have your edgeBOX running in Master Mode and you want to stop using HotBackup and make the edgeBOX run again in the default normal mode. check the status of the last replication in the Slave edgeBOX. there could occur severe damage to your edgeBOX compromising stability. in normal situations you will get an Ok assuring you that everything is normal. Manually replicate edgeBOX's configuration and data to the Slave edgeBOX In Hotbackup. Check the status of the Slave edgeBOX When you have an edgeBOX in Slave mode.

4. you should manage edgeboxes' updates manually and not automatically to grant that the Master and the Slave have identical software versions.208 edgeBOX 5. as it finishes the return to normal mode operation. Despite other/mixed approaches may be possible. Analogue etc) to the Slave edgeBOX. Software updates. is a process that should be planned carefully. Inc. all subsequent replication attempts will fail. 5. 3. if you allow the Master to update automatically. This will not install anything but will periodically query the update server and send you notifications if needed. Connect all Master's appropriate cables (eg ADSL. 10. So. but do not select the option that installs software automatically. The same happens if you update the any of them manually. in the context of Hotbackup. Open the slave edgeBOX's Comand Line Interface (CLI). please follow the process until the end. in the System section. use the password that you used to login on the Master edgeBOX (the administrator password is also replicated onto the Slave). Just follow the process described in the Software Updates menu. Shutdown or power-off the Master. ISDN. You can activate the Check for updates automatically but let me install manually option in the Software Updates menu. Please keep in mind that the slave. but you forget to update the other one. The Slave edgeBOX will take over all services previously provided and managed by the Master. the following may be used as a step-by-step approach to executing the software update on the slave: a) Before proceeding with the upgrade of the Slave please note the following: Critical Links. · Master software update Updating the Master is quite straightforward.5. The Master automatically detects that the Slave has a diferent operating system version/release and will refuse to proceed. . 2.0 Help the menus in the Slave and you´ll get the Replica Status with a date and an Ok. it becomes a perfect replica of the Master. To login to the web interface. Type in the command hotbackup returntonormalmode or hotbackup return to normal mode. this is of utmost importance. When you stop the Slave edgeBOX to work as a slave and make it take over the master. · Slave software update The Slave edgeBOX is not able to execute nor to check for software updates by itself.1 Managing software updates in a Hotbackup scenario When you use the Hotbackup functionality. you gain back access to edgeBOX's web interface.

Access the Salve's web interface and proceed as described in the Sofware Updates menu (assuming your laptop is still connected to the LAN interface you should point it to https:// LANIPADDRESS:8011. in this case you really need to disconnect the Master's WAN interface. wait until edgeBOX is fully back in Slave mode (watch the VGA terminal.255. Access the GUI and reconfigure Hotbackup Slave Mode. simply.255. 2. in Slave mode there is no DHCP server running.1/255. to do this you can connect your laptop directly to the Slave's LAN connector (using a crossover cable. so. if your laptop is connecte to the WAN segment of the Slave you should point to https://WANIPADDRESS:8011). according to the example given. b) The steps to executed the software update on the Slave are: 1. 5. with.System 209 · As the Slave returns to normal mode it's LAN interface will have the same configuration as the Master. . 6. when this command completes you will loose your connection.70. please change the Slave's LAN IP address by with the CLI command: lan static ip 192.70. then the Slave's WAN interface will obtain an IP address in the Master's LAN segment. you need to re-configure your laptop manually. make sure no warnings popup and everything processes normally. 4. wait until the Slave has finished returning to normal mode of operation (you determine this by watching it reboot into normal mode from the VGA terminal). Disconnect the Slave's WAN cable. · If the Master is the default gateway of the network segment to which the Slave will connect in ordero to access the update server. Critical Links. 8. the laptop IP configuration must be manual. re-enter and double check the Slave Mode's IP settings (IP. Netmask. In this scenario either the Slave's LAN IP address is temporarily changed or.200. 3. Connect to the Slave's WAN interface the cable that will provide internet connectivity (through the Master or directly through th ISP). in order to prevent double IP on same segment). Execute the hotbackup return to normal mode command in the Slave's CLI (putty/ssh or keyboard/VGA). re-wire the slave's network cable(s) back as they were before. for example192. gateway and nameserver) and apply slave mode again. Access the Slave's Command Line Interface (in Slave Mode there is no GUI).168. After update is complete all connections may be brought back to normal and the Slave returns to Slave mode.0 (or any other subnet that does not collide either with the Master's LAN nor any of the VLANs involved). it will tell you).168. Disconnect any network cable which might be connected to the Slave's WAN interface. the Master is turned off and the Slave takes it's place for software upgrade (during the night or weekend). If the Slave is going to access the update server using the Master as default gateway. this step is not needed at all if the Slave will connect directly to the internet without the Master involved (unless you have static IP configuration on the WAN and you are planning to share the same network segment for the upgrade. Inc. depending ion the type of update it may be necessary to reboot. using the keyboard and VGA is also a good approach. this will surely frustrate the Slave's attempts to reach the update server. This implies that the WAN and LAN interfaces in the Slave will have configurations "in" the same IP segment. 7. if needed) and access the CLI by ssh/putty.

0 Help 9. SNMP Traps You may Enable. if you changed anything). To configure the system to send these specific e-mail notifications and SNMP traps. Inc. the result must be "Ok".The subject of the e-mail message.in case you use SNMP to manage your network(s). · E-mail Subject . E-mails You may Enable. Re-wire the Master back to the way it was before (that is. 10. go to the Master's GUI and execute the "Check Slave" operation. edgeBOX is able to detect such events and forward them to you by e-mail and by means of SNMP traps . Disable and Edit the details of SNMP Traps notifications: · Name · Hardware status changes: if you want to receive traps for temperature changes and other hardware issues.210 edgeBOX 5. · Status .Execute the "Replicate now" operation if you don not wish to wait for the up-coming daily replication.the e-mail address to which the notifications will be sent (leaving it as root@localhost will make the e-mail be delivered to the administrator e-mail address). As usual.6 Notifications You may find the need to receive notifications regarding Hardware events. · Receiver . Critical Links. Disable and Edit the details of e-mail notifications: · Notification · Hardware status changes: if you want to receive e-mails for temperature changes and other hardware issues. · RAID if you want to receive e-mails about hard disk status related to RAID. 10. you can Start and Stop the Notifications service and an appropriate coloured status bar shows you the current operating status. please go to the Notifications menu in the System section.Whether each e-mail notification is active or not. . RAID status and others.

10. only RAID1 is supported and it is managed by the RAID menu in the System section (this menu is only available if your system uses RAID). it is mirroring the disks · Degraded . · SNMP Version .all disks in the array are active · Recovering . Total capacity of the array is just the capacity of a single disk..The SNMP Object Identifier configured on the server which will receive the traps.e. The panel has the following elements: · At the top the array status is presented and it may be one of the following: · Clean . · RAID if you want to receive SNMP traps about hard disk status informations related to RAID.there is a faulty disk in the array · A list with the array disks · A button to add a disk to the array and another button to remove a disk from the array. i. Generic will be included for a future release. Critical Links. · Trap Type .the array is rebuilding.System 211 · Backup result summary: if you want to receive traps with the results of your scheduled backup operations. etc). Several different arrangements are possible.IP address of the SNMP management Server which will receive the traps. so that data is not lost so long as one disk survives.7 Managing and Diagnosing RAID A RAID array distributes data across several physical disks which look to the operating system and the user like a single disk. does not increase the chance of a failure or decrease the reliability of the remaining drives (second. The failure of one drive.Only Enterprise should be selected. RAID1 uses two (possibly more) disks which each store the same data. · Object ID . third. Inc.The community which has been configured on the server which will receive the traps. Currently. · Trap Community . · Status . . in the event of a hardware or software malfunction.SNMP versions 1 and 2c are available options . · Trap Receiver .Whether each e-mail notification is active or not.

one may not have to shutdown the system immediately. i. This action is accomplished by the following steps: 1. Notification actions will occur under the following circumstances: · DeviceDisappeared . The array status may be checked on the RAID panel. Note: The replacement disk must match the original disk.the new disk must have the same capacity (in bytes) as the faulty disk.A spare disk (if one exists) which was being rebuilt to replace a faulty disk.e.0 Help 10.The Array is degraded (eg disk failure) · SpareActive . Start the system The new disk should synchronize with the active one. .7. · FailSpare . 4.A spare disk (if one is available). just follow the steps: 1.212 edgeBOX 5.7.An active disk in the RAID mirror has been marked as faulty.1 Disk Notifications If the status of the array changes. has lost a device and is no longer working as a RAID array · RebuildStarted . There are different ways to perform disk replacement: No Hot Spare To replace a faulty disk automatically.2 Replacing a faulty disk If the array becomes degraded the faulty disk should be replaced.The (new) disk has either completed construction (and is now part of the RAID1 array) or the construction was aborted. Replace the faulty disk (check the serial number) . · Fail . it cannot have a larger or smaller disk capacity (in Bytes) Hot Spare If the box has more than two disks. has been successfully rebuilt and has been made active. 10. a notification action may be performed as defined on the Notifications panel. without the need of management intervention.The RAID array has started reconstruction (eg when a disk is replaced. the new disk has to be reconstructed from the good disk to form the array) · RebuildFinished . Shutdown the edgeBOX at the earliest opportunity 3. Write down the serial number of the faulty disk 2. Highlight the faulty disk and press the "Remove" button Critical Links. A third disk (spare) may replace the faulty one.A mirrored array which was previously configured. which was being rebuilt to replace a faulty device has failed. · DegradedArray. Inc.

Highlight the Spare Disk and press the "Add" button. VoIP. Synchronization process progress may be checked in the RAID panel.8 Reading and Managing System Logs Reading system or services logs may become necessary as a way to understand or solve specific operational issues. If a spare disk is available in the "Array Disks" panel. Hardware Monitor. Daemon. Shut down the edgeBOX and remove and replace (if you wish) with a new disk which has the same Byte capacity as the faulty disk. select High or Low (changes will be applied to new log messages only). Authentication. To replace the faulty disk. The Previous and Next buttons allow you to scroll chronologically through the pages (earliest messages are displayed first). it would be prudent to add this replacement disk to the "Array Disk" panel for automatic replacement in the event of another disk failure. highlight it and select the "Remove" button.. Point your browser at the Logging menu in the System section. · The faulty disk may be replaced without shutting down the system. Clikc the Log viewer. The Log Viewer panel will popup: · Service: select the service for which you wish to read logs. Backup. 10. . this setting is global to all services. In this case. among others). Hotbackup.. the new disk will be included on the RAID array and synchronization will begin.System 213 2. however the following precautions should be taken: · Write down all disks serial numbers and respective slot to know which disk is the faulty one. voip's cdrs. Each page displays at most 25 lines. edgeBOX includes comprehensive solutions for accessing system and application logs (such as syslog. it will be automatically used to rebuild the RAID array in the event of a disk failure with one of the current RAID disks. RAID. Mail. Kernel. Critical Links. Inc. Blacklist. · Verbosity: controls the level of detail of the messages displayed. the available services are: Anti Virus. http logs. link. Website Access Restrictions. There you'll find: Log Viewer The Log Viewer lets you examine several application's logs with 2 levels of verbosity. Hotswap Hotswap is also supported in the Enterprise Appliance.

10. this FTP access should be used to access.. To enable this behaviour click on the Change. download and delete call recordings made by means of the Automatic Call Recording. If your edgeBOX is currently recording calls.. The logmaster username gives you FTP access to edgeBOX's log files: · System Log Files (sys.9 RADIUS Accounting This menu option allows you to review and configure the RADIUS servers used for accounting. Password: The password used by edgeBOX's RADIUS client to access the server Confirm Password: Confirm the password you have entered Critical Links. Server Port: The port used. The configured servers will be contacted in sequence. Inc.csv files) Additionally.0 Help Logs Destination edgeBOX can send logs to a remote logs server. Log manager password You should set the logmaster password from this panel. button and specify: · Also store edgeBOX logs in a remote server: check this box. you'll find them inside the call-recordings FTP folder. . but another port may be used. · Server address: the IP Address or host name (FQDN) of the server to which edgeBOX will send log messages. 514 is the default. · Port: the TCP/IP port number on which the server listens for log messages. Note that you can have authentication and accounting performed by the same server. To add a new RADIUS Accounting server you'll need: · · · · Server IP: The IP address for the new server.log) · HTTP/HTTPS Access Logs (access_log) · VoIP CDR's (Master. or have different servers for each purpose. The accounting data applies only to the WAN interface. The default value is 1813. The table lists all the servers configured.214 edgeBOX 5. and the first one to answer will store the data.

Access to objects below this level are not allowed.Enable notifications to be sent. “edgeBOX”. SNMP Agent Configures read-only SNMP access to the edgeBOX. Note: Accounting is only available with authenticated user sessions. See Authentication for details. Log Interval: possible values are “15 minutes”.g. Avoid well known strings such as “public”.System 215 · · Timeout: The maximum amount of time for connection setup with the RADIUS server. Inc. 10. This panel controls the SNMP agent running on the edgeBOX.10 SNMP The status of the edgeBOX can be queried using the Simple Network Management Protocol. This option allows you to control the period for which account information will be sent to the remote RADIUS accounting servers. Critical Links.The name of the community used when requesting access to the SNMP agent. “private” or ones that are easy to guess. · Devices within the following network segment: edgeBOX will only respond to SNMP queries coming from this IP segment (as determined by the IP Address and Netmask pair).Enables the SNMP agent and allows read-only access to report the status of the edgeBOX. SNMP Traps Configures the host (NMS) to which traps/notifications will sent. · Allow edgeBOX to send SNMP trap messages to a Trap manager . If this time is exceeded then the next server on the list (if any) will be contacted. · Community string . “30 minutes” and “60 minutes”. · Allow queries for . · Enable Access to SNMP Agent . · A specific device: edgeBOX will only respond to SNMP queries coming from this IP address. Specifically “public” is not allowed. · Allow queries from: · Any device: edgeBOX's embedded SNMP agent will respond to SNMP queries coming form any device (with the correct community string obviouslly).Enter an object identifier (OID). e. .

. 10. Some edgePakcs. may also benefit from a periodically optimized database. sometimes in order of magnitude of 4000%. A short overview is provided with: · current configuration and · last database optimization execution date and time..216 edgeBOX 5. · Every two weeks: Performs Database Optimization on a biweekly basis.. Inc. · Every four weeks: Performs Database Optimization every four weeks.The host name or IP address of a computer (NMS) to which notifications will be sent. The performance can be significantly increased by simply enabling this feature. Hardware Monitor and RAID services.11 Maintenance In the Maintenance module it is possible to schedule system database optimization in order to improve performance of VoIP service and the Reporting engine. · Receiver . These include the Backup.0 Help · Community . Critical Links. buttons to edit or remove the configuration. To enable this option. and Remove Schedule. For each previous recurrence pattern you should also set the · day of week and · time hour and minute for running database optimization. .The name of the community used when sending a notification/trap. to know: · Every Week: Performs Database Optimization on a weekly basis. The Database Optimization can be done in several recurrence patterns. Use the Change Schedule.. which also depend on the system database. To configure the type of traps/notifications sent by edgeBOX go to the Notifications section. The main reason to do this is to increase user responsiveness and overall usability. go to the Maintenance menu in the System section.

For all services displayed: · Name: the service's name. but mostly on the 'how long ago was the last optimization done?' or the 'was optimization ever done?'. changes made here will be effective even after a reboot.System 217 When to schedule optimizations ? Database optimization may consume long periods of time (varying from a few minutes to some hours . 10. Please schedule your data optimization for a period of day when there is no (or low) load on your box. Note that.in very extreme situations). It is updated every 15 seconds. the System section includes a Services panel where you can review and control . This always depends on your service usage. Avoid colisions with the Hotbackup replication hours and the Backupscheduled operations. or when no services are being used to minimize the impact on services. Inc.start / stop . Adapt the best solution for each case. Hard disks information: · Overall Health . A very simple example.Number of sectors which are unusable. · Status: whether they are running or not.12 Services Control Panel For your convenience.13 Hardware Monitor Information of the velocity of edgeBOX's fans. the CPU speed and several status of the hard disk(s). . · Temperature.Yes or No. Critical Links. To change status of a service click the service and hit the Start (green) or Stop (red) button at the top of the table. 10. It is determined by the monitoring software of the disc. or common abbreviation. · Description: the service's description.the administrative operational status of edgeBOX's main user services. based on the values of the parameters that follow next. weekly. is to set the edgeBOX database optimization tasks.. · Bad Sectors Count .. every Saturday at 4:00am. This depends on the factors as the load of the edgeBOX and the amount of data being processed. See an example.

If the syn packet was sent successfully. · SYN: adjust timeout and enter the TCP port to which to send the probes.. · Total Up Time .Number of errors when writing to the disk. and so on. 10.Number of sectors waiting to be remapped to another part of the disk. · CRC Errors Count . the ping method will only send a TCP SYN packet to the remote host then immediately return. Critical Links.14 Diagnostic Tools You can reach the Diagnostic Tools menu from the System section. the next method will be attempted until another timeout elapses. otherwise it will return false.Number of hours since the disk has been switched on.. UDP. adjust timeout and enter packet size in Bytes.0 Help · Pending Sectors Count . For additional options press +Show options. if the "SYN" protocol is specified. it will return a true value. If one of the methods receives a reply (eg ICMP). . Enter an IP Address or a FQDN and press the Ping button. · TCP: adjust timeout and enter the TCP port to which to send the probes. Inc. if no reply is received after the timeout.218 edgeBOX 5.. choose the Hardware Status Changes type Notifications panel. this produces a Ping which will try each method sequentially (ICMP. It provides some basic network and connectivity diagnostics: Ping Tests for network connectivity. · All: adjust timeout and enter the TCP port to which to send the probes. the other methods will not be attempted.: · Method: · ICMP: adjust timeout and enter packet size in Bytes · UDP: with this option selected the ping method will send a udp packet to the remote host's echo port. TCP then SYN). continues until either a successful reply is received or all methods have timed out. You can receive e-mail notifications about changes detected in the Hardware Monitor.

. · Mail Servers: allows you to determine the mailservers for a specified domain. Note: it may take more than 10 seconds to complete the task. such as google. enter an IP address. · Timeout: maximum time waiting for test results.34. 10.com and press the Lookup button.45 and press the Lookup button. such as 212. enter a domain name. A short overview is shown with the current configurations.System 219 NSLookup To diagnose DNS problems.the IP address. Depending on your Lookup for selection: · Host Names: allows you to determine the Name of a specified IP address. Inc. To alter these settings press the Change.: · DNS Server: allows you to specify a DNS Server (by IP or name) which will be used to resolve the IP address. such as critical-links. For additional options press +Show options. such as www. .fsf. enter a domain name.23.: · Method: ICMP or UDP. · IP Addresses: to determine the IP address for a specified domain name or FQDN.. Type the IP Address or FQDN in the box and press the Trace button.15 Remote Management Allows communication between edgeBOX and a Remote Management server. Traceroute Find the route that network packets follow to reach a specified host or IP address.org and press the Lookup button. A reference for how traceroute (tracert on Windows) works can be found at: Traceroute.. For additional options press +Show options.fr and press the Lookup button. Critical Links... · Timeout: maximum time waiting for test results on each router along the way. the edgeBOX default name server is used for the lookup. the type of packets used in the traceroute test. · Domain Names: allows you do list DNS servers for a given domain. enter a domain name. If not set. button and enter the values for: · Remote Management Server . Such a server allows the management of several edgeBOXes at the same time..

220 edgeBOX 5.time interval. Critical Links. The server will use this keep alive connection to warn administrators of potential problems with the edgeBOX. Inc. in minutes.0 Help · Keep Alive . . used to separate the emission of 'keep alive packets' to the Remote Management Server.

1. Critical Links. a single day or hour. or into a CSV file. per type of process (user’s and system processes) and cpu idle time. depending on the report you are seeing.1 System Displays information regarding edgeBOX’s system usage: · CPU · Memory · Load · Disk Usage · Interfaces 11. in percentage. Inc. For each report you can specify a Time Interval. Services and Users. You can drill down each line into each day to view the CPU usage just for the selected day. You can export the reports into a printable HTML page that you can print via a browser.Reporting 221 11 Reporting View and export reports about edgeBOX's System.1 CPU The CPU report shows edgeBOX's processor usage. It can be a begin/end day. . for automated processing. 11.

1. .2 Memory This report shows used and free memory. in MB. Critical Links.0 Help 11. Drill down in each day to view the memory usage for that day only. Inc.222 edgeBOX 5.

Inc.3 Load The Load report displays the load of the system through the number of active processes. . Load 5 min values indicate the average active processes in 5 minutes.1. Load 15 min values indicate the average active processes 15 minutes.Reporting 223 11. Critical Links. Drill down into each day to view the load of the CPU for each day. Load 1 min values indicate the average active processes in one minute.

11. Critical Links. in percentage and in MB.1.224 edgeBOX 5. between 3 and 4 require you to monitor closely. Inc. Drill down into each day to view usage for that day only.0 Help Values below 1 represent good CPU load. Scroll down to view disk usage for both Storages. and values over 5 require you to take action because the CPU is overloaded. .4 Disk Usage This report displays the hard disk usage. per Storage.

Reporting 225 · The System Storage partition saves the runtime system data information (database and log information).1. Drill down into each day to check the usage of the interface for that specific day. · The Home Storage partition is used to save the user account folders and the network shared folders (Shares). Scroll down to view information for the LAN and. Inc. 11. LAN and DMZ interfaces.5 Interfaces Shows the traffic received and sent by edgeBOX in the WAN. DMZ interfaces. Critical Links. if you have one. .

2 Services Displays reports showing information about the service usage. .1 HTTP Access The HTTP Accesses report displays information about HTTP accesses through edgeBOX. You can drill down into each line to see daily HTTP accesses and sites visited. page hits and users yielding these accesses.226 edgeBOX 5. the total number of sites. · HTTP Access · Web Server · Firewall · E-mail · VoIP · VPN 11.0 Help 11. Critical Links. Inc. accumulated traffic in Mega Bytes. This means.2.

. Inc. Critical Links.2 Web Server The Web Server report shows accesses to edgeBOX's web server. It is possible to drill down into each day to check the accesses on that specific day. 11. You can view the total number of visits to every page and the generated traffic. in Mega Bytes to edgeBOX's web server.2.Reporting 227 Please note: this report will contain no information if the Proxy Cache service is stopped. It is where the Intranet and Extranet websites and the users' personal webpages are storaged.

0 Help 11. Critical Links. Inc. .2.228 edgeBOX 5. You can drill down each line to a specific time frame in order to identify actions applied to unauthorized network traffic.3 Firewall This report shows Firewall related information as dropped and rejected (sent back) network packets grouped by day.

you can only see how many sender and receiver e-mail domains (the @mail. Critical Links.Reporting 229 11. You can also view the amount of e-mails processed and.4 E-mail The E-mail report shows e-mail service related information in the Services perspective.2. . if it was locally delivered to edgeBOX.com part of the email address) are processed for the sent and received e-mail. the size of the message and if it was infected with a virus. how many of those where detected as being infected with viruses by the Mail Scanner. Inc. This is. you can identify singular e-mail exchange info such as the sender or the receiver e-mail. If you drill down in each line.

230 edgeBOX 5. . · Outbound Calls . Calls are grouped into: · Internal Calls .calls made to external phones. · Inbound Calls .2.5 VoIP The VoIP report displays VoIP service usage. Critical Links.calls made between phones connected to edgeBOX.calls received from outside edgeBOX's network to internal phones connected to the edgeBOX.0 Help 11. Inc.

. Critical Links. and accumulated duration of connections per day. the number of connections made. Inc.Reporting 231 The image above is a drilled-down detailed of the Internal Calls.6 VPN The VPN report gives information about the PPTP VPN tunnels in use in the edgeBOX. number of users using the VPN service. 11.2. The information available includes the duration of the calls and number of calls made.

Critical Links.3 Users Services data correlated with user information: · Accounting information · HTTP Access · E-mail · VoIP · VPN 11. The information is shown only in a tabular format.232 edgeBOX 5. PPTP VPN tunnels and the total duration of these tunnels. it is not possible to drill down inside each line as in other reports. .0 Help 11.3.1 General The General report summarizes the activity of users. Tou can view the inbound and outbound traffic in Mega Bytes. and external calls made and the duration of the calls. Inc.

Reporting 233 11. . If you are not using authentication. LAN and DMZ). instead of the username. the user's IP Address is shown. You can drill down in each line of the table to view detailed information for each session of the users. Critical Links.3. Inc.2 Accounting The Accounting report shows network traffic and sessions made by the network users. You can check the amount of downloads and uploads that are being processed for the users in each network interface (WAN.

.234 edgeBOX 5. Please note: this report will contain no information if the Proxy Cache service is stopped. HTTPS website accesses are not showed.3.0 Help 11.4 E-mail The E-mail report shows e-mail service related information for each e-mail address. You can also drill down in each line of the table to see the sites visited for each user. accumulated download traffic in Mega Bytes and number of page hits. You can drill down in each line to view e-mail messages details for a particular e-mail account. 11. The report details the total number of sites.3.3 HTTP Access The HTTP Accesses report displays information about HTTP website accesses made by the network users. Critical Links. Inc.

Inc.Reporting 235 11. . For all registered phones the Inbound.5 VoIP The VoIP report displays VoIP calls for each phone or user. If you select a user's calls yo ucan view calls to and from that user for the specified time period: Critical Links.3. Drill down into each type of calls to view the calls made for that type. Outbound and Internal calls with their associated call duration is displayed.

0 Help 11.236 edgeBOX 5. . It shows the number of connections and the total duration of the connections.6 VPN The VPN report gives a summary of the PPTP VPNs on edgeBOX. Critical Links. Inc.3.

if from outside. Initial Page . https://WAN-IP-Address:8011 .How do I get here ? Point your browser to https://myedgebox. or. besides Login option. these are browser based user-oriented. Inc. .com. https://LAN-IP-Address:8011 . Follow the links bellow for details: · Webmail · Flash Operator Panel Critical Links.User Services and Applications 237 12 User Services and Applications On the initial page. on the left you'll find a list of accessible services: · Temporary Shared Folders Applications In the Applications section you'll find links to the following applications (if installed and/or configured). you will enter the edgeBOX Services page (this option will only be available for users in the internal network). Services Following the Services link. commonly accessible edgeBOX features. you will find the and Services and Applications options.

Select the desired settings for your safe. select "Create a new safe". Any user on your network can ask for a box to store files and access it as a normal Windows share. Temporary Shared Folders must be active. The user must belong to Privilege with access to the Samba service. To create the safe. The following page will be displayed. To be able to use safes. select "Create safe". Follow the link "Public Folders". Sizes available will always be less than or equal to the maximum size configured. Inc.0 Help 12. Any LAN user can request a safe accessing the utilities page (http://<lan address>:8011 and selecting the "Services" option). the following conditions must be met: · · · The Windows Server service must be running.1 Temporary Shared Folders Safes are available only for LAN users and may be used when there's a need for a temporary space for storage. Currently available safes will be displayed. . Critical Links. as well as the current safes' configuration parameters. as well as the maximum time the safe will be available. To create a new safe.238 edgeBOX 5.

Critical Links.User Services and Applications 239 Safe creation window If the safe was successfully created. credentials to access the safe Selecting "Public Folders" again will now display the safe just created. Inc. credentials to access it will be displayed. .

access it like a normal windows share.0 Help Public safes list To use the safe. Inc.240 edgeBOX 5. . Critical Links. entering the credentials supplied to authenticate.

If the operation completes successfully. . Note: When a Folder is closed (manually or after the timeout). the folder and contents are deleted.User Services and Applications 241 If you want to close the safe before its time expires. the message "Folder closed" will be displayed. Critical Links. Inc. go to the Services > "Public Folders" menu and follow the "Close this Folder" link next to the safe you want to close. You will need to supply the password for the safe.

Select your preferred language and login with your edgeBOX username and password. select the Applications link and then Webmail (if Webmail is not available. Critical Links. see E-mail domains and Webmail). . Inc.2 Webmail In the Initial Page of User Services and Application.242 edgeBOX 5. You will be presented with the following screen. Use the interface to send and read your e-mail.0 Help 12. this is because it has not been configured to.

Inc. the additional entries can be viewed by placing the mouse to the right of the screen. . causing the screen to scroll to the right (and vice-versa) You are reminded that you need to allow the FOP service on the Firewall Panel. FOP allows you to view: · Which extensions are busy. Note that if there are more entries than can be shown on the screen. for access and the Web Server must be running. ringing or available · Who is talking and to whom · SIP and IAX registration status (Greys out if offline) · MeetMe room status (number of participants) · Queue status (number of users waiting) · Parked channels · Logged in Agents Critical Links.3 Flash Operator Panel (FOP) Flash Operator Panel (FOP) is a switchboard type application which is able to display information about the PBX activity in real time.User Services and Applications 243 12.

Select the Applications menu and you should be presented with the following: Critical Links.0 Help FOP allows you to perform the following actions: · Hang-up a channel · Transfer a call leg via drag and drop · Initiate calls via drag and drop · Barge in on a call using drag and drop · Drag and drop to create an agent · Manage queues · Park/Unpark calls 12. Inc.3. .244 edgeBOX 5. which should present you with the following Menu.1 FOP Login To Access the FOP Interface. enter the edgeBOX URL into your browser.

please refer to the E-mail Server and Webmail for configuration instructions) When you select Flash operator. enter username and Password as admin and root (respectively) and set a new password.User Services and Applications 245 (If Webmail is not present on the Menu. you will be presented with the following screen: The default Security Code login is: root To alter this password. . this is because you have not selected configured a Webmail Domain. Critical Links. Inc.

npem's phone will ring. by double clicking on the red LED. you drag the npem phone icon to the jayme icon. Once the call is established.0 Help 12. simply drag the phone icon the person you wish to call. . Critical Links. You may force the termination of a call. jayme's phone will ring and the call is established. Inc. for example. If npem picks up the call.3. as well as the duration of the call. both phones will change their green 'LED' to red and the extension number of the caller will be shown.246 edgeBOX 5. for the user of interest to the phone icon of If.2 Initiate a Call To create a call.

3.User Services and Applications 247 Note: If a phone is not currently registered with edgeBOX (as thus cannot be rung). Inc. the caller has rung alextalk via the BRI/1 2 connection (as they both have the same tel number tag of the external caller). .3 External Calls A call which is from an outside line. 12. Critical Links. tags the incoming route with the callers number and also tags the person they have called. the icon will be greyed out. Again. In the large panel below. with their telephone number. you may terminate a call by double clicking the red LED of the phone (or the line).

248 edgeBOX 5.0 Help

12.3.4 Transfer a call
To transfer a call, you simply drag the icon to the panel where you wish to place the call. Thus you could drag a callers icon to a phone, or to a Queue, or park the call (etc).

12.3.5 Barging
Barging allows the operator to interfere with an active call. Thus if 2 users have established a call, you could (although this is not generally recommended) drag a phone to one of the phones which is already connected, to establish a new call (leaving one of the users with a disconnected call!).

12.3.6 Create an Agent
Assuming that you have configured a Queue, you can add phones to the Queue to act as Agents for the Queue. To add an Agent, simply drag the phone to the Queue (the phone LED will change from green to yellow).

To delete the Agent, drag the phone to the queue again (the LED will change from yellow to green).

Critical Links, Inc.

User Services and Applications 249

12.3.7 Queue Managment
Each Queue, consists of three panels, as shown below.

The top panel (Queue Support) shows the status of the queue (1 caller waiting for an Agent) and the queue name (support) The next two panels show the top two (longest in queue) clients in the queue.

To add a client to the queue, simply drag the ringing phone to the queue, or drag one of the phones which has established a phone connection. Note: You can reset a queue by double clicking on Queue's (top panel of the three) LED. If you do this, all callers in the queue will be removed.

12.3.8 Park-Unpark Calls
To park a call, simply drag their phone, or their incoming line, to the Parked queue.

Critical Links, Inc.

250 edgeBOX 5.0 Help

The phone/line will then show the their parked position. You can then drag the parked phone icon to a phone (or elsewhere) to establish a call.

12.3.9 Conference Calls
To enter a conference, simply drag the phone icon (or line) to the conference icon, which will cause the phone to ring.

The Conference will show the number of users of the conference.

12.3.10 Typical Caller Scenario
A typical scenario is as follows: · A caller (A) rings and is routed to the operator (B). They request C's extension. · The operator can see that C is not on a call and can drag the line icon to C's phone, or · The operator can put the caller on hold (by dragging the incoming line to the park icon) and drag the operator phone icon to C's icon to ring C and ask if they wish to take the call. · The Operator can now either drag the icon from park to C's icon or drag the park icon to their phone icon and explain that C cannot take the call.

Critical Links, Inc.

Appendices 251

13 Appendices
13.1 Appendix A: Authentication
edgeBOX runs several services under which you have to provide credentials. There are a several possible authentication scenarios and configurations. In this appendix, edgeBOX's authentication architecture will be explained. It is important to understand these concepts, as they will be needed if you want to deploy a remote authentication scenario. We will shown what happens when the "Require users to login" option is enabled. The complete sequence of events will be reviewed and detailed. Finally, some remote configuration examples will be shown.

13.1.1 Authentication architecture
Authentication (proving who you are) and authorisation (what you can do) are handled in a mixed manner in edgeBOX. Considering first a local authentication scenario, upon user creation you need to provide a password and define which services a user will be authorised to use. Services available in edgeBOX are: · Regular services, such as POP3, IMAP, FTP and Internet access for LAN users; · Windows use (Samba Print and Filesharing); · Allow authentication from wireless and wired 802.1x port based authentication devices on the LAN; · PPTP · VoIP. Internally, edgeBOX uses a RADIUS server, configured to use an LDAP backend.

13.1.2 Require users to login vs Privileges policies
Connections originating from the LAN to the Internet, to the DMZ network and to services running on edgeBOX are granted by default. But you may choose to limit this access by enforcing an access Privilege. This is done by activating the Authentication service - the Privilege policies will be enforced at the Firewall level. This is always the first level of access to be tested: when if users are required to login (LAN/VLAN

Critical Links, Inc.

252 edgeBOX 5.0 Help users), any connections are denied - they are in fact discarded by the firewall. If an user wants to access the Internet, the following steps must be taken: · The user accesses edgeBOX's authentication page or some website running on port 80 (which causes a redirection to edgeBOX's authentication page); · The user enters his credentials (username/password); · If the credentials entered were valid, the user may or may not be granted access, depending on his access Privilege. From this moment on, and if this user's policy grants him access to the Internet, he will be able to access any remote service. Furthermore, a pop-up window will be displayed, allowing him to log out. This pop-up window must be kept open to keep the user authenticated. If this window is closed and no network traffic is detected originating from this user's machine, the authentication will time out and the user will have to re-authenticate in order to access the Internet. The timeout is set to five minutes.

Privileges allow the following items to be configured: · QoS classes assigned to WAN/DMZ connections; · Access to the Internet: time interval and services; · Access to edgeBOX's services: time interval and services; · Access to the DMZ: time interval and services; · Inter VLAN access. · Access to IPSec VPNs. · Access to PPTP VPN sessions. As previously mentioned, the policies are handled at the firewall level. After an user authenticates, appropriate firewall rules are loaded in order to enforce his Privilege profile. A user authenticating from a PC in the LAN will in fact revert to an IP/MAC address pair, and each rule loaded will refer to this pair. If the profile to which the user belongs to was granted access to the Internet, a firewall rule will be loaded allowing all traffic originating from this host to the Internet. If a Privilege contains an IP address (see the Devices section in Privileges), then firewall rules reflecting this policy profile featuring this IP will automatically be loaded, making it a static entry. That is, if a user uses a machine with an IP in a profile, they will be automatically authenticated by the edgeBOX and will have the profile's privileges (rather than the users profile privileges). A typical use of this feature is to automatically allow servers to access the Internet. Suppose you have a Windows update server. By making its IP a member of a group with access to the Internet will automatically enable access to the Internet for this server.

Critical Links, Inc.

access is granted. . The following matrix displays the possible combinations for authentication/authorization schemes: Authorisation Local RADIUS Local RADIUS Local RADIUS Local RADIUS Remote RADIUS Remote LDAP Authentication Local LDAP Remote LDAP Remote AD Remote RADIUS Remote RADIUS Remote LDAP Critical Links. if the password does not match. these two functions can be delegated on remote servers. access is denied (authentication failed). · If the user closes the pop-up window and no network traffic is generated for 6 minutes. Otherwise. 13.4 Remote configuration So far we have assumed edgeBOX handles both authentication and authorization using its local RADIUS and ldap servers. access is denied by the firewall. namely PPTP and Wireless that allow you to use another (RADIUS) server to perform authentication. edgeBOX's RADIUS server is queried. · Otherwise. The IP/ MAC address pair in these rules are the user's PC IP/MAC address pair. containing a message indicating success and a logout button. If a reject argument is found. LDAP is queried. allowing for a multitude of different configurations and scenarios. · At this point. However. · Otherwise. access is denied (authorization failed). his browser will be redirected to the web page requested and a small window will pop-up. The user will have to reauthenticate.Appendices 253 13.3 Putting it all together Suppose a user in the LAN tries to access the Internet or an edgeBOX service and the Authentication service is running. · If the user has requested a web page and his policy allows.1. all services will be authenticated against the scheme chosen. · Otherwise (any other application). The complete sequence of events is as follows: · If the user tries to access edgeBOX's port 8010/8011. access is granted (authorization AND authentication succeeded). the rules will be unloaded from the firewall and further connections denied. There are some services however. be it local or remote. access will be denied. rules reflecting this user's Privilege policy are loaded into the firewall. Inc. Due to the concept of system-wide authentication. · After entering his credentials. if the user tries to access any website on port 80 or edgeBOX's authentication page. · Otherwise.1. · Otherwise. the user will be granted access according to his Privilege. the authentication page is displayed.

In this scenario. In the examples that follow. This can be useful if you want to set their service permissions beforehand (when using local authorisation) or to set the group to which they will belong (by default they are assigned to the generic group). he will be placed in the "Generic" privilege. they are not known to edgeBOX before they make their first successful login.a firmware upgrade may be needed in some cases. This schema works also in "fail-safe" mode. WiFi or LAN only using LAN authentication. Not all wireless cards will support these security schemes . In such a configuration. As users are remote. When using Active Directory as a remote authentication scheme. and will be granted permission to access the services configured in the "Generic" privilege. you will still be able to edit user's permissions.254 edgeBOX 5. only the native MS Windows client was used. POP3. you have the option to import the users. after an user logins in for the first time. local accounts and entries will be created locally. Bear in mind that although a remote scheme is used. Some cards have their own managing software. Depending on the scheme used. in which RADIUS performs authorisation. Inc.. The next table displays this information: Authentication Sheme Used Local. Special remarks have to be made when you delegate authorisation/authentication on a remote LDAP or RADIUS or Active Directory (without "import users" checked) server. 13. You can have a remote configuration replicating this configuration. i. Before this happens no user account is created locally and the same applies for edgeBOX's local RADIUS and LDAP servers (edgeBOX always keeps a local copy).0 Help The first line matches edgeBOX's local configuration (all local). To be able to have MS Windows controlling your Wireless connection. AD (with user import) or Remote LDAP Remote RADIUS or AD (without user import) First Login using any service: FTP.1x and WPA. If you are not using local authorisation.e. Critical Links. PPTP. you can still add local users before those users make their first login. . if the Active Directory server is not reachable at a certain point the users will be authenticated locally. having a LDAP backend performing authentication/authorisation. the way a user may perform his first login will vary. you must start the "Wireless Zero Configuration" service.2 Appendix B: Connecting to Wireless In this appendix. it will be shown how to configure a MS Windows client station to connect to edgeBOX's wireless access point using 802.

· Allow only specific devices to use the wireless network: not active . later you can activate this if you wish.this network will be visible for all wireless clients nearby.Appendices 255 Wireless configuration applet. . Notice that windows is being used to configure wireless In the examples that follow. later you can configure it. Inc.no Hardware Address based filtering will occur. Critical Links. the following general configuration will be used by edgeBOX: · SSID: valebox · Channel: 1 · Hide Network: not active .

Critical Links.256 edgeBOX 5.1 802. Choose "WPA" for "Network Authentication" and "AES" for "Data Encryption".1x authentication and accounting. double-click the "Wireless Network Connection" icon and select the "Wireless Networks" tab. . Inc.1x The following picture illustrates the configuration used by edgeBOX for 802.2. Select then the "Authentication" tab. On MS Windows.0 Help 13. Make sure the SSID entered is consistent with that defined on edgeBOX (valebox on our example).

uncheck the "Automatically use my Windows. and select "Secure password" as the Authentication Method. Press the "Properties" button. uncheck the "Validate server certificate" checkbox.Appendices 257 Wireless Network Connection Wireless Networks On the Authentication tab... Critical Links. select "Protected EAP (PEAP)" as the "EAP type". Inc. Press the "Configure" button. Press "OK" on all dialogs to confirm this configuration. Authentication Protected EAP Properties On the dialog window that pops-up. On the dialog window that pops-up. ." checkbox.

2. the network key to be used must also be supplied. Remember that if you choose to use Critical Links.0 Help If the configuration succeeds. If the connection was successful. . Inc. its status will appear as "Connected". Additionally. you should see a balloon warning you to enter credentials to connect to the wireless network.2 WPA If edgeBOX was configured to use WPA as the security scheme. 13. Clicking on the balloon will display a prompt requiring you to enter the username and password for a user authorised to connect to the Wireless network. the following settings must be configured on the client: · Network Authentication: WPA-PSK · Data Encryption: AES.258 edgeBOX 5.

If this connection is configured to be established manually. Wireless Configuration Network key dialog Critical Links. if less than 64 characters. asking you to supply the network key. You may obtain an automatically generate key from the website https://www. it must be 64 hexadecimal characters long. .com/passwords.grc.Appendices 259 a preshared key. htm. it may be ascii or hex. Inc. when you try to connect to it a dialog window will be shown.

you have to specifically supply the username "Administrator". Please make sure to catch all the details in the Windows Server section. . After you select "OK" to confirm the domain change.3. you will be required to supply credentials of a user belonging to the domain administrator's group. and then select the "Computer Name" tab. namely. To add a windows host to edgeBOX's Windows Domain. join domain dialog Critical Links. In edgeBOX.3 Appendix C: Windows Integration This appendix will shown you how to use some of edgeBOX's Windows Server features. select "System" under the Windows Control Panel.1 Adding a Windows Host to edgeBOX Domain This section details the process of adding a windows host to the edgeBOX Windows Domain . In the dialog window that pops-up. Select the "Change" button.0 Help 13.260 edgeBOX 5. how to: · Add a Windows computer to edgeBOX's Domain · Map an edgeBOX Shared Folder on Windows Remember that users can olny access these features if they belong to a Privilege for which the Samba service is accessible. which has the same password as the admin user (defaults to root). select the "Domain" option and enter your domain name (in our example it was "mydomain"). Inc.this assumes edgeBOX is running the Windows Server and acting as a Primary Domain Controller. 13. The windows host will be added to the Domian provided by edgeBOX.

After rebooting the machine. so the user will retain her desktop definitions after logging off. In the picture bellow the user's directory content is shown. the following dialog will be displayed. 2. This is the directory where the user's personal web page will be located. . Critical Links. 13.Appendices 261 change domain dialog If the operations was successful. where the public_html directory can be accessed. Select the Tools menu and the Map Network Drive option.3. The other directory shown (profile) is where the roaming profile data will be stored. log on to edgeBOX's domain (it should be available on the domains' list). The user's home directory will be mounted as Z:. Go to My Computer. Inc.2 Mapping a Shared Folder on Windows To map an edgeBOX shared folder on a virtual Drive 1.

254\rui.4 Appendix D: VLAN based Infrastructure With the introduction of VLANs in the edgeBOX architecture the type of scenarios where an edgeBOX can be deployed has been significantly increased.262 edgeBOX 5. · For basic VLAN scenarios any 802. Inc. · For switches with L3 features it is important to disable inter vlan routing on the switch. Inter vlan routing is done in the edgeBOX with access profile enforcement.possible to specify which share to release. For advanced features like port based authentication. followed by the name of the shared folder. . From a basic network infrastructure with generic 802.0 Help 3. 802. Type the IP address of edgeBOX. Critical Links. It's possible to disconnect from a share using the command "net use * /delete". This will release all connections to shares. 4. Some of the supported features depend on the type of Switch or Wireless AP used for deployment. dynamic vlan assignment.1Q switch will work. It's "net use" which will display which are the active shares and then "net use <share> / delete". Windows does not allow you to mount shares with different username/passwords. via the command 13. For example: \ \192. Select the character you to use for the drive.1x with single sign on or automatic guest VLAN more advanced switches will be needed.1Q Switches to full port based authentication devices with dynamic VLAN assignment. a broad range of scenarios are possible. which will disconnect that particular share.90.168.

1x SSO and Dynamic VLAN assignment · Procurve 420 Wireless AP (Firmware 2.2 or later) .1x port based authentication · No Dynamic VLAN assignment · No native Guest VLAN on switch · VLAN Scenario 2 · Standard 802.1Q VLAN only · Generic L2 switch with 802. manual session timeout configuration · D-Link DES-1228 . Type of 802.1Q VLAN and 802.Appendices 263 Type of Authenticators supported: · Procurve 2650 Series . 802.802.1Q.802.1x SSO. · Generic Wireless AP with 802.1x . 802.1q compatible switch · No 802. .1x Authentication only.1Q VLAN + 802. No single sign on available.1Q.1x port based authentication · No Dynamic VLAN assignment · No native Guest VLAN on switch · VLAN Scenario 3 · 802.1x SSO.2.802.1x supplicants tested (PEAP-EAP-MSCHAPv2): · Windows XP SP2 · MacOS X · Windows Vista · Windows Vista SP1 Please find below four possible VLAN deployment scenarios.1x .802.802.1x port based authentication · Support for Dynamic VLAN assignment – (HP Procurve switch) · No native Guest VLAN on switch Critical Links. Inc.1Q.1x and dynamic VLAN assignment · Support for 802.1q compatible switch with 802.802. 802.1x Port based authentication.1Q.802.1q compatible switch with 802.1Q · Generic L2 switch with 802.1X.1x · Support for 802. You might wish to read them in order to get a better grasp of the concepts or to adapt them to your own needs: · VLAN Scenario 1 · Standard 802. Dynamic VLAN assignment · D-Link DES-1252 . No single sign on available.Support for 802. manual session timeout configuration · SMC Tigerswitch 6726 AL2 .1Q VLAN . 802.

Inc. . allowing all configured VLANs to pass through the link.264 edgeBOX 5.1x port based authentication · No Dynamic VLAN assignment · No native Guest VLAN on switch This is the most basic scenario when deploying VLANs with edgeBOX. In this case the LAN port of the edgeBOX is connected to a trunk port in the switch.0 Help · VLAN Scenario 4 · 802. The port on the switch must be configured as 802.1q compatible switch with 802.1x and dynamic VLAN assignment · Support for 802.1q compatible switch · No 802.4. Critical Links.1q trunk.1 VLAN Scenario 1 Characteristics of this scenario: · Standard 802.1x port based authentication · Support for Dynamic VLAN assignment – (HP Procurve switch) · Native Guest VLAN on switch – (HP Procurve switch) 13.

and this means all ports are by default configured as being part of that VLAN. the LAN zone is the same as VLAN 1 (id 1). In most cases the VLAN 1 is the default VLAN on a new installed switch.When using VLANs. DMZ and access to other VLAN segments. 2 . This means the edgeBOX firewall does not allow routing of traffic between VLANs unless the administrator configures it with different type of access rules. all traffic between VLAN zones is blocked.1q compatible switch with 802. 3 .1x port based authentication · No Dynamic VLAN assignment · No native Guest VLAN on switch Critical Links.1x · Support for 802. . When a user authenticates successfully. Inc. the firewall enforces the configured User Access Profile rules for WAN.The only type of user authentication available is Web Login. then all traffic to and from this user will be filtered with the default rules for non-authenticated users.By default. 4 . If the user is not able to authenticate with success.4. 13.2 VLAN Scenario 2 Characteristics of this scenario: · Standard 802.Appendices 265 1 .Access Rules between VLAN segments can be configured per access profile in the VLAN tab.

. In this scenario.0 Help This is basically the same as Scenario 1.1x port based authentication. and this is done in System->RADIUS->Add.1x based switch. The authentication request. the RADIUS client. The edgeBOX supports protocol PEAP-EAP-MSCHAPv2. will be forwarded by the switch to the configured RADIUS server for authentication. The only requirement is that a Critical Links. At this point the client will get an IP address if configured with dhcp and the edgeBOX DHCP server is enabled.1x include support for automatic user login.1x protocol.1x port based authentication we need to configure the switch to use the edgeBOX as the RADIUS server for authentication and enable the ports where we want this enforced. To enable support for 802. The only addition is that we have some or all ports on the switch configured for 802. the switch detects the presence of a client and initiates the 802. On the edgeBOX this 802. Support for Single Sign On (SSO) Scenarios based on 802. Inc. needs to be authorized.266 edgeBOX 5. made by the Client PC supplicant. If the authentication is not successful then the port will be closed and the user will not get access to the network. The main advantage of using 802. for a client PC connected to one of the switch ports configured with 802. If the authentication is successful the switch will open the respective port and the client will be part of the static VLAN configured on that Port.1x. Both Windows XP and Vista include supplicants with native support for this authentication type.1x is that the user will not be able to access the network until he is able to get a successful authentication.

1q compatible switch with 802. the RADIUS server sends additional attributes to the 802. During 802. In case the 802. Without a successful authentication the port will be closed and the user wont be able to access the network. The following is needed to deploy this feature: Critical Links. A supported switch includes the calling station MAC address in the RADIUS Access Request packet and is able to process session timeout.1x switch is used to deploy those scenarios.1x authentication and on success. the port based authentication is still done but the user will need to do a normal weblogin when accessing the Internet or services running on the gateway. In this case.4. .3 VLAN Scenario 3 Characteristics of this scenario: · 802.1x port based authentication · Support for Dynamic VLAN assignment – (HP Procurve switch) · No native Guest VLAN on switch This is scenario 3 with a switch that supports VLAN dynamic assignment. 13. The edgeBOX supports assignment of a VLAN per access profile.1x and dynamic VLAN assignment · Support for 802.Appendices 267 supported 802.1x authenticator in the switch with information regarding the VLAN id for that particular user. the switch moves the associated port to the VLAN configured for that user access profile. after a successful authentication.1x switch does not support the calling station attribute. Inc.

1x port based authentication · Support for Dynamic VLAN assignment – (HP Procurve switch) · Native Guest VLAN on switch – (HP Procurve switch) Critical Links. The network infrastructure must be setup with Procurve 2650 or compatible switches in terms of RADIUS dynamic Vlan assignment.4 VLAN Scenario 4 Characteristics of this scenario: · 802.0 Help 1.1q compatible switch with 802. select the correct client type and enable Dynamic VLAN assignment.1x and dynamic VLAN assignment · Support for 802. 13. 3.268 edgeBOX 5. The HP Procurve follows RFC2868 / 3580 with with Tunnel-Private-Group-ID of type string. See NAC->Access profiles>”Profile”->VLAN->VLAN Name. Configure the User Access Profiles with the correct VLANs. Inc. The advantage of this scenario is the fact that we can effectively do network access control by port and at same time we are able to put the user in the correct VLAN even if he does a login outside of is main work space. .4. 2. Configure the RADIUS client as referred in Scenario 2.

will be isolated in VLAN6. As soon as the switch assigns the unauthorized-client VLAN to that port.1x Open VLAN mode in the Procurve 2650. Use the "system factory" command to initiate a factory reset. Inc. · Guest profile is configured to have open access to the Internet only. without a successful authentication. · Guest01 is a guest user with just a regular dhcp configuration on his laptop. With a successful web login authentication. LAN and a few servers located in VLAN2.1x with Unauthorized-Client VLAN assigned to VLAN6. The unauthorized-client VLAN can be configured using the 802. A practical example: · Switch ports 4 and 5 are setup for 802. · When Guest01 connects to port 5. the edgeBOX enforces the guest profile for this user and he is able to access the Internet but nothing else. · Guest01 is a member of the guest profile. 13. the user will be presented with the edgeBOX web login page when trying to access the Internet. At this point the switch automatically configures the port to another VLAN – the Unauthorized-Client VLAN. · User01 is a member of the engineering profile. These ports are located in a meeting Room. · User01 has his laptop ethernet connection setup for 802.Appendices 269 This is scenario 4 with a switch that supports guest VLAN when operating with 802. the switch is not able to start a 802. · When User01 connects to port 4.1x and VLAN dynamic assignment. the connected host is able to get an IP through DHCP. At this point he is able to get an IP address through dhcp and when trying to access the Internet he will be presented with the authentication page.5 Appendix E: Factory Reset The factory reset option is only available through the CLI (Command Line Interface). In the end the system will reboot and the hard disks will be re-imaged with the original first install contents. configured for VLAN3 (see #3 in scenario 3). · Engineering profile has access to Internet. .1x authentication.1x authentication takes place and the switch port is automatically configured for VLAN3. Critical Links. user data and software updates since the first time the edgeBOX was installed. IMPORTANT: be aware that this option erases all configuration. User01 is able to work on his own VLAN and access any other places allowed by his Engineering access profile. If the edgeBOX authentication is enabled. This is similar with scenario 3 and the only difference is when the 802. a successful 802.1x user is not able to authenticate.1x authentication and automatically opens the port on VLAN6. Users in this profile are not able to access any of the other VLANs or LAN. · Any other user that tries to connect to one of these ports.

Secure Shell · TFTP .Domain and IP Address translation · edgeDESKTOP .Remote Management Interface · FlashOperator .0 Help 13. .File Transfers · HTTP .such as the Firewall or user Privileges .Network services monitoring · NTP .VoIP Telephony Critical Links.Network services monitoring · Munin .you'll be presented with or even need to select entries from edgeBOX network services list: · Billing .edgeDESKTOP interface · eMI .Phones Swicthboard · FTP .6 Appendix F: edgeBOX Network Services edgeBOX Network Services list In several configuration situations .270 edgeBOX 5.Date and Time Synchronization · POP3 .Phone and Computer Integration · DNS .Calls cost information · CTI .Authentication and Accounting · Samba .Authentication and Accounting · Monit .Simple File transfers · VoIP .Web Server · IMAP4 .E-mail retrieving · RADIUS .Windows Domain and File Sharing · SNMP .E-mail retrieving · LDAP .Network services monitoring · Nagios . Inc.Network devices monitoring · SSH .

/ : .Appendices 271 13. '+'.62}[a-z0-9]$") · must start with a low case letter "a-z" · the midle characters may additionally contain digits ("0-9").62}") · Password: · Size: from 1 to 127 · Characters ("[a-zA-Z0-9!"#%&'()*+. it's always admin · Password: Critical Links. See more specific details bellow. numbers and special characters like '_'. Don't use simple passwords. For regular users: · Username: · Size: from 3 to 64 · Characters ("^[a-z][a-z0-9-_. with letters. General Topics Change the password once in a while. < = > ? @ [ ] _ ` { | } Specifically for the admin user: · Username: you can not change the administration username in edgeBOX. Use passwords with at least 10 characters." · up to 62 additional lower case letters and/or digits can be used ("[a-z0-9]{1./:. .7 Appendix G: Usernames and Passwords The choice of Usernames and Passwords is a relevant topic when configuring edgeBOX.]{1. .<=>?@[]_`{|}]{1. If you don't trust your memory.-. "-".127}"): · lower ("a-z") and upper ("A-Z") case letters. away from your usual work place. The characters right above the numbers in your keyboard are all good candidates too. digits ("0-9") and any of ! " # % & ' ( ) * +. write your password down on a paper and store it at home. "_" and ". Inc..

<=>?@[]_`{|}]{1.272 edgeBOX 5. < = > ? @ [ ] _ ` { | } Specifically for phones: · Number: · Size: 1 to 20 · Characters: only digits ("0-9"). Inc..0 Help · Size: from 1 to 127 · Characters ("[a-zA-Z0-9!"#%&'()*+.-.127}") · lower ("a-z") and upper ("A-Z") case letters. digits and '_' and '-' Critical Links. · Name and Password: · Size: from 1 to 20 · Characters ("[a-z0-9_-"): lower case letters. . / : . one single leading '+' if needed. ./:. digits ("0-9") and any of ! " # % & ' ( ) * +.

You're Reading a Free Preview

Descarregar
scribd
/*********** DO NOT ALTER ANYTHING BELOW THIS LINE ! ************/ var s_code=s.t();if(s_code)document.write(s_code)//-->